FrameSaver® SLV
9126, 9126-II, and 9128-II CSU/DSU,
and 9126-II Router
User’s Guide
Document No. 9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Logging On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
ii
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX-1
Time Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Proxy ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Router Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Bridge Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
IP Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Limiting Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Creating a Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Modifying a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Deleting a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Device Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
iv
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
IP Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Trap Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Modem Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
FTP File Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Problem Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Tests Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
PVC Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Test Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Physical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
IP Ping Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
vi
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Ethernet Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
viii
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
CLI Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
DTE Port Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
DSX-1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
DSX-1 Port for 9126, 9126-II, and Carrier Mounted 9128-II
(8-Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Modem Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
x
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Purpose and Intended Audience
This document contains information needed to properly set up, configure, and
verify operation of the FrameSaver SLV (Service Level Verifier) 9126, 9126-II, and
9128-II CSU/DSU, and 9126-II Router running firmware release 2.0.3 or above. It
is intended for system designers, engineers, administrators, and operators.
You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications
equipment and frame relay networks.
Document Organization
Section
Description
and 9128-II CSU/DSU, and 9126-II Router, fit into
Paradyne’s Service Level Management (SLM)
solution, and describes their features.
Shows how to navigate the menu-driven user
interface.
Shows how to access and save configuration options.
FrameSaver SLV 9126, 9126-II, and 9128-II
CSU/DSU, and 9126-II Router.
Describes the router’s interfaces and features, and
shows typical setups and configurations.
Provides procedures for controlling access to the
FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins.
Provides procedures to display unit identification
information and perform file transfers, as well as how
to display and interpret status and statistical
information.
Provides device problem resolution, alarm, and other
information, as well as troubleshooting and test
procedures.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Section
Description
for FrameSaver Devices and
located and how FrameSaver units are supported.
Manager Plus for FrameSaver
application so it supports FrameSaver units, and so
you can change alarm and history file defaults.
Describes setup of Concord’s Network Health
application so reports can be created for FrameSaver
units, and identifies those reports that apply to
FrameSaver units.
Contains a graphical representation of how the user
interface screens are organized.
Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be
SNMP format standards and with its special
operational trap features, and describes the
RMON-specific user history groups, and alarm and
event defaults.
Appendix C, Router CLI
Commands, Codes, and
Describes the configuration options available for the
router, and the minimum access level for each
command.
Provides a summary of router CLI commands,
showing syntax and defaults.
and provides pin assignments for interfaces and
cables.
Technical Specifications.
Equipment List.
Lists key terms, acronyms, concepts, and sections.
A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is
available on the World Wide Web at www.paradyne.com. Select Library →
xii
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Product-Related Documents
Document
Number
Document Title
Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation:
9000-A2-GN19
9000-A2-GN1D
9126-A2-GL10
9126-A2-GL12
9126-A2-GN10
9126-A2-GN11
9126-A2-GN12
9128-A2-GL10
9128-A2-GN10
FrameSaver SLV ISDN Installation Instructions
9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions
FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9126-II Quick Reference
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router Quick Reference
FrameSaver SLV 9126 1-Slot Unit Installation Instructions
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II 1-Slot Unit Installation Instructions
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router Installation Instructions
FrameSaver SLV 9128/9128-II Quick Reference
FrameSaver SLV 9128 1-Slot Housing-to-9000 Series Access
Carrier Upgrade Instructions
9128-A2-GN11
9128-A2-GN12
FrameSaver SLV 9128/9128-II Network Access Module (NAM)
Installation Instructions
FrameSaver SLV 9128/9128-II 1-Slot Unit Installation Instructions
Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation:
7800-A2-GB30
7800-A2-GB32
OpenLane SLM Reports Reference Guide
OpenLane SLM Administrator’s Guide
NetScout Documentation:
2930-170
2930-610
2930-620
2930-788
NetScout Probe User Guide
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server Administrator Guide
NetScout Manager Plus Set Up & Installation Guide
Concord Communications Documentation:
09-10010-005
09-10020-005
09-10050-002
09-10070-001
Network Health User Guide
Network Health Installation Guide
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide
Network Health Reports Guide
Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at
To order a paper copy of this manual:
Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-PARADYNE (1-800-727-2396)
Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-8623
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Conventions Used
Convention Used
When Used
Italic
To indicate variable information (for example, DLCI nnnn,
where nnnn denotes a 4-digit number).
Menu sequence:
To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the
selections to be made from a menu or selections from within
a menu before performing a procedural step.
For example,
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status indicates
that you should select Status from the Main Menu, then
select System and Test Status.
(Path:)
To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path
shown at the top of the screen. Always shown within
parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the
correct table (e.g., Path: main/config/alarm).
Brackets [ ]
To indicate multiple selection choices when more than one
selection is available (e.g., Performance
Statistics→ Status→ [Network/Port-1]).
Text highlighted in blue
To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing
this manual online. Click on the highlighted text.
xiv
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver SLV
1
This chapter includes the following:
System Overview, below
System Overview
Our system solution consists of:
®
FrameSaver SLV (Service Level Verifier) units
®
OpenLane SLM (Service Level Management) system
NetScout Manager Plus application
Standalone NetScout Probes, if needed
This solution provides increased manageability, monitoring, and diagnostics so
customers can identify problems more efficiently, troubleshoot those problems
faster, and maximize their network to control costs. It is also compatible with
Concord Communication’s Network Health software.
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router and 9126, 9126-II, and 9128-II CSU/DSUs
operate with other FrameSaver devices, and when teamed with internationally
based FrameSaver devices in multinational applications, provide a complete global
frame relay management solution.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
CSU/DSU-Specific Features
The following features only apply to the FrameSaver SLV 9126, 9126-II, and
9128-II CSU/DSUs:
Two Interfaces. Provides two interfaces for traffic:
— Synchronous DTE port for user data
— Ethernet Interface for management data
Upstream Pipelining. Provides pipelining capability into the Wide Area
Network (WAN) for reduced latency, where groups of bytes are transmitted as
soon as they are received, rather than waiting for the entire frame to be
collected before sending.
LMI Protocol Support. Automatically detects and initializes the Local
Management Interface (LMI) protocol type on the user data port.
Router-Specific Features
The following features only apply to the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II router:
Device Migration. The FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router can be converted to a
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II CSU/DSU with a firmware download.
In-Band Router Management. Permits the router to be managed via
customer data PVCs and EDLCIs by assigning an IP address for router
management that is different from the IP address generally used for the
network interface.
Inverse ARP for User Data. Provides Inverse ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) support for user data, as well as management data. The router
responds to Inverse ARP requests, and can acquire the IP address of a
FrameSaver device at the far end of a customer PVC. ARP information is
retained for both customer data and management data.
1-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
CLI Access and Configuration. Provides a router Command Line Interface
(CLI), along with the menu-driven user interface, for configuring and managing
the router. It is accessed from the Main Menu via a direct COM port
connection or Telnet.
The following features are configurable using the CLI:
— NAT (Network Address Translation) support provides the means to bind IP
addresses in a private network to addresses in a public, or global, network
for transparent routing between the two domains on all PVCs. Up to 30
NAT pools are supported.
— Routing table configuration permits configuration of static routes. Up to
32 entries can be made.
— IP forwarding to forward multicast IP packets and customer datagrams.
— Filtering on the Ethernet and frame relay interfaces, configurable from the
CLI access list, allows the router to filter MAC frames and prevent
unwanted inbound connections. Two filter access lists are supported per
interface, one for the transmit and one for the receive direction.
The following protocol is supported:
— DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) support for dynamic
allocation of IP addresses and automatic cleanup when a subinterface is
deleted, as well as allowing multiple IP address ranges for DHCP deny
capability. The DHCP server and relay cannot be enabled at the same
time. Up to 253 DHCP clients can be supported. One DHCP pool of
addresses, and one IP address range per pool is supported.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
FrameSaver Diagnostic and SLM Feature Sets
Depending upon the model ordered, the FrameSaver unit has the basic
FrameSaver frame relay and diagnostic capability, or it is enhanced with additional
SLM (Service Level Management) reporting capability. These are referred to as
feature sets, which provide different levels of intelligence for monitoring, managing,
and reporting performance of the unit.
The two feature sets include:
Basic Diagnostic Feature Set. Models with this feature set provide basic
FrameSaver capabilities, which include:
— Leased Line mode for standard DSU installation and operation
— Device health and status
— Layer 1 (Physical) and Layer 2 (Frame Relay) performance statistics
— Basic physical testing and non-disruptive PVC diagnostics
— A troubleshooting DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier) for service
provider use and remote management
— Limited RMON (Remote Monitoring) functionality
— Multiplexed management PVCs
additional information.
Advanced SLM Feature Set. Models with this feature set provide all the basic
diagnostic capability, plus advanced Service Level Management features.
When additional SLV data is collected and the unit is accessed from an
OpenLane SLM system, Web access to the following information is available:
— TruePut™ Technology using Frame and Data Delivery Ratios (FDR and
DDR)
— Web browser access to all diagnostic and reporting functions
— Historical SLA (Service Level Agreement) verification and trend reports
— Real-time RMON (remote monitoring) alarms and configurable alarm
thresholds
— Real-time and historical network performance graphs
— Multiplexed customer PVCs
the additional SLM capability.
If the unit does not have the SLM feature set, full SLM capability can be activated
at any time by ordering a Feature Activation Certificate. The OpenLane SLM
system Release 5.3 or above is required to schedule activation of advanced SLM
features in units, and to manage activations.
1-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
To obtain a Feature Activation Certificate, provide the model to be upgraded, your
OpenLane system license key number, and the number of FrameSaver units to be
upgraded to SLM capability. You can order the certificate for a single unit or for
many units. Your Feature Activation Certificate will include an Activation Certificate
Number, the Feature Group Number for the additional SLM features, your
OpenLane license key number, and the number of device activations ordered.
When the Feature Activation Certificate arrives, add the Activation Certificate
Number to your OpenLane SLM application’s database. Activations can occur at
any time, for as many units as desired, until no activations remain for the
certificate. When ready to activate units, simply select the units to be activated and
schedule the activations. The activations occur when scheduled, and OpenLane
updates the certificate information. The OpenLane system also provides a
Certificate Summary Report to assist you in the management of the certificate.
FrameSaver Diagnostic Feature Set
A FrameSaver SLV unit with the basic diagnostic feature set provides the following:
Easy Installation. Provides a straightforward installation menu that requires
minimal configuration to get the unit up and running quickly, and to set up
remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC
(Network Operations Center).
Frame Relay Aware Management. Supports diagnostic and network
management features over the frame relay network. The unit’s frame relay
capability also supports:
— Inband management channels over the frame relay network using
dedicated PVCs.
— Unique nondisruptive diagnostics.
— CIR monitoring on a PVC basis.
— Multiple PVCs on an interface.
— Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs.
— Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single
network PVC.
Router Independence. Unique diagnostics, performance monitoring,
PVC-based in-band network management, and SNMP connectivity is not
dependent upon external routers, cables, or LAN adapters.
Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support. Provides Inverse ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) support so the frame relay router at one end of a
management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the
other end of the PVC. Standard RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows the
router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to
that FrameSaver unit.
Security. Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access
to the unit.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
Auto-Configuration. Provides the following automatic configuration features:
— Time Slot Discovery – For automatic configuration of all network DS0
assignments.
— Frame Relay Discovery – For automatic discovery of network DLCIs and
configuration of a user data port DLCI, the PVC connection, and a
management PVC, which is multiplexed with user data DLCIs.
— LMI Protocol Discovery – For automatic configuration of the protocol being
used by the network.
— DLCI Deletion – For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCIs
from the unit’s configuration and statistical databases.
— CIR Determination – For automatic recalculation of the committed rate
measurement interval (Tc) and excess burst size (Be) when a DLCI’s CIR
changes.
— Excess burst size (Be) and committed burst size (Bc) are recalculated
when Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits) is set to CIR. The committed rate
measurement interval (Tc) is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc
(Bits) is set to Other.
Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported.
FrameSaver FrameSaver
SLV 9126-II SLV 9126
FrameSaver
SLV 9126-II
CSU/DSU
FrameSaver
SLV 9128-II
CSU/DSU
Feature
Router
CSU/DSU
Through
8
16
64
120
Connections
(PVCs)
Dedicated
Management
PVCs
2
2
2
2
Multiplexed Management PVCs. Provides a method of multiplexing
management data with customer data transparently over a single PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuit) when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the
circuit. This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests.
Extensive Testing Capability. Provides a variety of tests to identify and
diagnose device and network problems, including nondisruptive PVC
loopbacks and end-to-end connectivity. Tests can be commanded from the
unit’s menu-driven user interface or the OpenLane system.
These tests include V.54 or FT1-ANSI data channel loopback support so the
frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its
own switch without having to contact the local service provider for loopback
activation.
LMI Packet Capture. Provides a way of uploading data that has been
captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a
Network Associates Sniffer for analysis, or viewed via the menu-driven user
interface. When viewed from the menu-driven user interface, the twelve most
recent LMI messages are displayed via the LMI Trace Log.
1-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
Integral Modem. Provides an internal 14.4 Kbps modem to support dialing in
to the unit for out-of-band management and automatic dialing out of SNMP
traps.
Modem PassThru. Provides access to another device’s VT100-compatible
user interface over a dial connection. When this feature is enabled, a logical
connection between the unit’s modem and COM ports is created, allowing
access to a collocated device’s serial port via the FrameSaver unit’s internal
modem. This feature is sometimes referred to as the Router Assist feature.
Configurable FTP Transfer Rate. Allows you to control the transmit rate
when downloading firmware into the FrameSaver unit and uploading user
history statistics to an NMS (Network Management System) via the COM port
connection or a management PVC so the data can be transferred as a
background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) over
extended periods of time using low bandwidth.
RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling. Provides
access to the physical interface and basic frame relay performance statistics
by polling the FrameSaver unit using SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol). These statistics are available real-time via the Enterprise MIB and
historically as an RMON2 User History object.
Frame Relay Traffic Policing. Ensures proper alignment and correlation of
CIR (Committed Information Rate) values between the FrameSaver unit and
the network switch. When this feature is enabled, the unit can enforce CIR and
EIR (Excess Information Rate), marking frames that exceed CIR as DE
(Discard Eligible) using the same method used by the switch.
Service Provider Support. Provides information and tools useful to network
service providers, which includes the following:
— IP Routing Table – Shows the IP routing table for the FrameSaver unit,
with network as well as host routes, the number of hops to the destination,
the method by which the route was added to the table, the interface used
to get to the destination, and how long the route has been in existence.
— Trap Event Log – Displays the SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) trap event log for the FrameSaver unit from the menu-driven user
interface, with the most recent events first, keeping a running total for all
trap events stored, the amount of time since the event was logged, plus a
description of the trap.
— Troubleshooting PVC – Provides a dedicated troubleshooting
management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their
network.
ATM VPI/VCI and DLCI Correlation. For networks with both ATM and frame
relay-access endpoints, allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating
Virtual Path and Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) in the far-end ATM-access
endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for
OpenLane SLV reports.
Dual Flash Memory. Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and
running. Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user’s
discretion.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
DSX-1 Drop/Insert Port. Allows DTEs/PBXs that support the DS1 signal
format to share the T1 network with other high-speed equipment so that voice
traffic can share the same local access circuit as the frame relay data.
Back-to-Back Operation. Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected
via a leased-line network or simulation so a point-to-point configuration can be
implemented.
Enhanced Ping Operation. FrameSaver devices can check connectivity and
roundtrip response time to any remote device in either direction, via the
FrameSaver internal management network or the data path.
Payload Management. Any standard, non-management DLCI can be
designated as payload managed, providing management directly from a user
data PVC, and support for Telnet, ping, SNMP, and FTP.
Optional ISDN Backup. FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9126-II CSU/DSUs can
be equipped with a BRI DBM, which supports up to two channels. The
channels may have different destinations. The DBM may be field-installed in
the FrameSaver SLV 9126 CSU/DSU, and must be factory-installed in the
9126-II CSU/DSU.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II 1-slot units can be equipped with a PRI DBM, which
supports up to 23 B-channels, or a BRI DBM. Carrier-mounted FrameSaver
SLV 9128-II NAMs support a PRI DBM only.
When an ISDN BRI or PRI DBM (Basic Rate Interface or Primary Rate
Interface Dial Backup Module) is installed, the following ISDN backup features
are provided:
— Provides automatic dial backup through the ISDN for data when primary
frame relay network or access line failures occur, then automatically
restores data to the primary route when service returns to normal. Backup
is supported regardless of whether or not Caller ID is provisioned on the
ISDN circuit. A secondary backup phone number is also available to call
when a backup link cannot be established with the primary backup site.
— Supports simultaneous origination, answering, or origination and
answering backup calls, as needed, based upon how the ISDN Link
Profile is set up. This feature is also known as peer-to-peer calling.
— Provides automatic configuration of an alternate route and DLCI for
automatically created PVCs at either the remote site or central site based
upon the learned far-end DLCI number. When the automatic backup
feature is enabled, backup and restoration occur automatically.
— Provides backup timers that can be configured to better control the
amount of time required before backup is initiated, when a backup call will
be terminated once the failure condition clears, and a delay before normal
service is restored. These features are useful during periods of frequent
service disruption.
In addition, round trip latency thresholds can be configured that will initiate
backup when configured thresholds are exceeded.
— Supports backup call groups, where redundant PVCs can be assigned to
a specified call group. Using this feature, the unit only goes into backup
when all PVCs in the group are down, and it returns to normal service as
soon as one PVC in the group is operational again. This feature is useful
when multiple PVCs are going to redundant central sites.
1-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
— When the SLV Sample Interval is set to 10 seconds, provides advance
detection of network problems before a DLCI Down indication is received,
to minimize data loss.
— Provides customer premises equipment (CPE) with a Backward Explicit
Congestion Notification (BECN) when backup bandwidth is not sufficient
for the traffic, allowing the CPE time to slow traffic to the ISDN before the
network starts discarding data.
— Supports Frame Relay Forum Multilink Frame Relay Implementation
Agreement – FRF.15 so backup bandwidth can be increased by
aggregating multiple B-channels over the ISDN link.
— Supports collection of call and call attempt statistical information that can
be viewed from the menu-driven user interface or via SNMP, and supports
alarm generation and call security, as well.
— Provides test call capability on ISDN backup links so ISDN and DBM
function can be verified before there is an actual primary link failure and
switched over to the backup link. Periodic tests are recommended, which
can be performed from the menu-driven user interface, or through SNMP
commands. Multiple Last Cause Values are also provided to assist in
troubleshooting ISDN problems.
Additional FrameSaver SLV 9126-II and 9128-II Features
Ethernet Interface. FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Routers and 9126-II and 9128-II
CSU/DSUs units have a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet LAN interface for
management, with automatic sensing of the operation rate of 10 Mb or
100 Mb, conforming to ANSI/IEEE 802.3.
Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128-II Features
The following features are unique to FrameSaver SLV 9128-II units:
Multiple Data Ports. Provides two data ports instead of one, which have
standard connectors so no special-order cables are required.
Carrier-Mounted Models. For customers with high-density requirements,
FrameSaver SLV 9128s and 9128-IIs can be ordered as multislot units, called
Network Access Modules (NAMs), for insertion in the 14-slot 9000 Series
Access Carrier.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
FrameSaver SLM Feature Set
A FrameSaver SLV unit with the advanced SLM feature set provides the following
features in addition to those provided with the basic set:
TruePut™ Technology. Using Frame Delivery Ratios (FDR) and Data
Delivery Ratios (DDR), throughput (within and above CIR, as well as between
CIR and EIR, and above EIR) can be measured precisely, eliminating
inaccuracies due to averaging.
Intelligent Service Level Verification. Provides accurate throughput, latency,
and availability measurements to determine network performance and
whether service level agreements (SLAs) are being met, along with SLA
reporting.
RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds. Provides the ability to
change SLA parameter and RMON alarm thresholds via the OpenLane
system to correct them in real-time, before the SLA is violated.
Multiplexed Customer PVCs. Provides a method of multiplexing customer
management data and user data with network management data
transparently over a single PVC when FrameSaver devices are at each end of
the circuit.
FTP User History Poller. Provides a bulk collector using FTP through the
OpenLane system that generates a file for data at the time that data is
uploaded using FTP.
Network User History Synchronization. Allows correlation of RMON2 User
History statistics among all SLV devices in a network. Using a central clock,
called the network reference time, all SLV device user history statistics are
synchronized across the network, further enhancing the accuracy of
OpenLane SLV reports.
RMON-Based User History Statistics Gathering. Provides everything
needed to monitor network service levels, plus throughput with accurate data
delivery, network latency, and LMI and PVC availability. Continuous roundtrip
latency testing and reporting, as well as CIR to transmitted and received data
performance statistics, are included.
In addition, port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for accurate
calculation of utilization.
1-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
OpenLane SLM System
Being standards-based, the OpenLane SLM (Service Level Management) system
can be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM’s
NetView. OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane
features with the OpenView Web interface.
Being Web-based, the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data
contained in the database to provide anytime, anywhere access to this information
via a Web browser.
Some of the OpenLane system’s features include:
Real-time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement
details (not averages, which can skew performance results) of service level
agreement (SLA) parameters.
Port bursting and EIR (Excess Information Rate) performance monitoring
graphs are available when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system
is Release 5.2, or later.
Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so
frame relay SLAs can be verified.
Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy-to-use tool for performing tests,
which include end-to-end, PVC loopback, connectivity, and physical interface
tests.
For units with ISDN backup capability, provides ISDN physical interface and
PVC testing when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system is
Release 5.2, or later.
Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices. Network
DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned.
Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV
Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically,
along with their PVCs.
A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system.
Firmware downloading provides an easy-to-use tool for downloading to an
entire network or a portion of the network.
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices, and SNMP polling and reporting
are available.
The maintenance scheduling feature allows for the scheduling of multiple
periodic maintenance periods, and provides a record of all scheduled
maintenance periods – past, present, and future.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. About the FrameSaver SLV
NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes
Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for
FrameSaver devices.
The following features are supported using this application:
Thresholds for RMON 1 (Remote Monitoring, Version 1) alarms and events
can be configured.
Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2
(Version 2) data. NetScout Manager Plus’s Protocol Directory and Distribution
functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven
network-layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each. Its
IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network
bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis, identifying the network’s top six
users. In addition, it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices.
Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15-minute buckets, with 96 buckets in a
24-hour period, for up to five days worth of data.
Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices
at sites where full 7-layer monitoring, an unlimited number of protocols, and
advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired.
1-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
2
This chapter contains information about how to access, use, and navigate the
menu-driven user interface and the Router’s Command Line Interface (CLI). It
includes the following:
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Logging On
Start a session using one of the following methods:
Telnet session via:
— An in-band management channel through the frame relay network.
— A local in-band management channel configured on the DTE port between
the FrameSaver unit and the router.
Dial-in connection using the internal modem.
Direct terminal connection over the COM port.
When logging on, the User Interface Idle screen appears.
If no security was set up or security was disabled, the Main Menu screen
If security was set up and is enabled, you are prompted for a login. Enter your
login ID and password.
When the user interface has been idle, a session is automatically ended and the
screen goes blank when the unit times out. Press Enter to reactivate the interface.
Procedure
To log in when security is being enforced:
1. Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter.
2. Type your Password and press Enter.
— Valid characters – All printable ASCII characters
— Number of characters – Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login
ID and Password fields
— Case-sensitive – Yes
An asterisk (*) appears in the password field for each character entered.
2-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
If your login was . . .
Then the . . .
Main Menu appears. Begin your session.
NOTE:
Valid
If your login is valid, but access is denied, there are
two currently active sessions.
Invalid
Message, Invalid Password, appears on line 24, and
the Login screen is redisplayed.
After three unsuccessful attempts:
A Telnet session is closed.
The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly
connected terminal.
The internal modem connection is disconnected.
An SNMP trap is generated.
Access is denied.
See your system administrator to verify your login (Login
ID/Password combination).
FrameSaver units support two sessions simultaneously. If two sessions are
currently active, wait and try again.
If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit
through Telnet, the local Telnet client process returns a Connection
refused:message at the bottom of the screen.
If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit
over the COM port or modem port, not via Telnet, the User Interface Already In
Use screen is redisplayed. In addition, the type of connection (Telnet
Connection, Direct COM Port Connection, or Direct Modem Port Connection)
for each current user is identified, along with the user’s login ID.
Procedure
To end the session:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function keys area of the screen.
2. Type e (Exit) and press Enter.
— For a terminal-connected to the COM port, the session is ended.
— For a terminal-connected to the modem port, the session is ended and the
modem is disconnected.
— For a Telnet connection, the session is closed and, if no other Telnet or
FTP session is occurring over the connection, the modem is
disconnected.
If ending a session from the Configuration branch, see Saving Configuration
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Main Menu
Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit’s tasks begins at the Main Menu, which has six
menus or branches. The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when
security has been set up.
main
Access Level: 1
MAIN MENU
9128-II
05/26/2000 23:32
Device Name: Node A
Slot: 1 Type: T1 FR NAM
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Easy Install
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions Exit
Select . . .
To . . .
Status
View diagnostic tests, interfaces, PVC connections, and
statistics. You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit
identity information.
Test
Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit’s interfaces.
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Display and edit the configuration options.
Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a
selected application. You can also automatically populate
network and (for CSU/DSUs) data port DLCI configuration
options with numeric settings.
Control
Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories,
device naming, login administration, and selecting software
releases. You can also initiate a power-on reset of the
FrameSaver unit.
Easy Install
Configure minimal options for a quick installation.
represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit’s menus and screens.
2-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Screen Work Areas
There are two user work areas:
Screen area – Where you input information into fields.
Function keys area – Where you perform specific screen functions.
Below is a sample configuration screen.
Model Number
Date and Time
main
/config/system/slv
9128-IISLV
08/23/2002 10:59
Menu Path
Device Name: Node A
SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS
Device Name
SLV Sample Interval (secs):
SLV Synchronization Role:
60
Tributary
SLV Type: Standard
SLV Delivery Ratio:
Disable
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout:
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold:
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold:
Enable
3
1
Screen Area
SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold (ms): 10000
SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold:
SLV Packet Size (bytes):
2
64
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Function Keys Area
Message Area
Screen Format
Description
Menu Path
Menu selections made to reach the current screen.
Device Name
Customer-assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit.
9126, 9126-SLV, 9126-IISLV, FrameSaver unit’s model number.
9126-IIR, 9126-IIRSLV,
9128-II, or 9128-IISLV
Screen Area
Selection, display, and input fields for monitoring and
maintaining the FrameSaver unit.
Function Keys Area
Message Area
Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a
specified key, then pressing Enter.
System-related information and valid settings for input
fields are in the lower left corner.
System and Test Status messages are in the lower right
corner.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Navigating the Screens
You can navigate the screens by:
Using keyboard keys.
Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys.
Keyboard Keys
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area:
Press . . .
To . . .
Ctrl-a
Move cursor between the screen area and the
screen function keys area.
Esc
Return to the previous screen.
Right Arrow (on same screen row), or Move cursor to the next field.
Tab (on any screen row)
Left Arrow (on same screen row), or
Ctrl-k
Move cursor to the previous field.
Backspace
Move cursor one position to the left or to the last
character of the previous field.
Spacebar
Select the next valid value for the field.
Delete character that the cursor is on.
Delete (Del)
Up Arrow or Ctrl-u
Move cursor up one field within a column on the
same screen.
Down Arrow or Ctrl-d
Right Arrow or Ctrl-f
Left Arrow or Ctrl-b
Ctrl-l
Move cursor down one field within a column on
the same screen.
Move cursor one character to the right if in edit
mode.
Move cursor one character to the left if in edit
mode.
Redraw the screen display, clearing information
typed in but not yet entered.
Enter (Return)
Accept entry or, when pressed before entering
data or after entering invalid data, display valid
options on the last row of the screen.
2-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Function Keys
All function keys (located in the lower part of the screen; see the example in
They are not case-sensitive, so upper- or lowercase letters can be used
interchangeably.
These keys use the following conventions:
For the screen
Select . . .
M or m
E or e
N or n
O or o
L or l
function . . .
MainMenu
Exit
And press Enter to . . .
Return to the Main Menu screen.
Terminate the asynchronous terminal session.
Enter new data.
New
Modify
Delete
Save
Modify existing data.
Delete data.
S or s
R or r
Save information.
Refresh
ClrStats
Update screen with current information.
C or c
Clear network performance statistics and refresh the
screen.
Variations include:
ClrSLV&DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI
statistics.
ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics.
ClrDBMStats for clearing DBM call statistics.
U or u
D or d
PgUp
PgDn
Display the previous page.
Display the next page.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Selecting from a Menu
Procedure
To select from a menu:
1. Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection, or
press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list.
Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor
from position to position.
2. Press Enter. The selected menu or screen appears.
Procedure
To return to a previous screen, press the Escape (Esc) key until you reach the
desired screen.
Switching Between Screen Areas
Procedure
To switch to the function keys area:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area.
2. Select either the function’s designated (underlined) character or Tab to the
desired function key.
3. Press Enter. The function is performed.
To return to the screen area, press Ctrl-a again.
2-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Selecting a Field
Once you reach the desired menu or screen, select a field to view or change, or
issue a command.
Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another. The
current setting or value appears to the right of the field.
Entering Information
You can enter information in one of three ways. Select the field, then:
Manually type in (enter) the field value or command.
Example:
Entering bjk as a user’s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen (from the
Control menu/branch).
Type in (enter) the first letter(s) of a field value or command, using the unit’s
character-matching feature.
Example:
When configuring a port’s physical characteristics with the Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks configuration option/field selected (possible settings include
Disable, Local, DTPLB, DCLB, and Both), entering d or D displays the first
value starting with d – Disable. In this example, entering dt or DT would
display DTPLB as the selection.
Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key.
Example:
To save a configuration option change, select Save. S or s is the designated
function key.
If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections, press the
spacebar; the first valid setting for the field appears. Continue pressing the
spacebar to scroll through other possible settings.
Screen Contents
What appears on the screens depends on:
Current configuration – How your network is currently configured.
Security access level – The security level set by the system administrator for
each user.
Data selection criteria – What you entered in previous screens.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. User Interface and Basic Operation
Navigating the Router’s CLI
Access the FrameSaver DSL Router’s Command Line Interface by pressing the
Shift-r function key from the Main Menu. There is no need to press Ctrl-a first to
access the function keys area of the screen.
Once the CLI is accessed, you can use keyboard keys to navigate within the
interface. Using the router’s CLI, you can display and edit router configuration
settings, view router status, and access router tests.
For details of all CLI commands and the conventions used when entering
For a summary of abbreviated (minimal) command entries and their default
CLI Keyboard Keys
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the router’s CLI. Most terminal
emulation programs use these same keys.
Press . . .
Enter (Return)
Ctrl-c
To . . .
Accept the current command line input.
Clear the current command line entry.
Abort a command line prompt without answering.
Exit a command in progress.
Ctrl-z
Exit Configuration mode and returns to Standard mode. A prompt
appears to save any unsaved changes.
Backspace
Delete
Erase the character to the left of the cursor.
Erase the character the cursor is on.
Down Arrow
Recall command line history buffer with the most recent
command displaying first. Buffer contains ten lines of history.
Up Arrow
Scroll to the last valid command for editing.
Move the cursor one position to the right.
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Move the cursor one position to the left.
q
Abort a Move display and return to the command line prompt.
(or any key but
Spacebar or
Enter/Return)
2-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
3
This chapter includes the following:
Basic Configuration
Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates. Use
the FrameSaver unit’s Configuration Edit/Display menu to display or change
configuration option settings.
The Configuration Edit/Display menu shown below is for a FrameSaver SLV
9128-II with the optional ISDN backup feature.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Configuration Procedures
Configuration Menu
main/config
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
5/26/2000 23:32
CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY
System
Network
DSX-1
Data Ports
ISDN
Time Slot Assignment
PVC Connections
Management and Communication
Auto Backup Criteria
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Changing an Auto-Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit’s
3-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Configuration Procedures
Configuration Option Areas
The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings, which are
located in the Factory Default Configuration option area. You can find the default
settings for configuration options in the:
If the factory default settings do not support your network’s configuration, you can
customize the configuration options to better suit your application.
Four configuration option storage areas are available.
Configuration Option Area Description
Current Configuration
The currently active set of configuration options.
Customer Configuration
An alternate set of configuration options that you can set
up and store for future use.
Scratchpad Configuration
An alternate configuration area for temporary use. The
Scratchpad configuration is reset to the factory default
settings when the unit is powered off and on.
Default Factory Configuration A read-only configuration area containing the factory
default set of configuration options.
You can load and edit default factory configuration
settings, but you can save changes only to the Current,
Customer, or Scratchpad configuration option areas.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Configuration Procedures
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options
To access and display configuration options, load (copy) the applicable
configuration option set into the edit area.
Procedure
To load a set of configuration options for editing:
1. From the Main Menu, press the down arrow key so the cursor is on
Configuration.
2. Press Enter to display the Configuration menu. The Load Configuration
From: menu appears.
NOTE:
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer or
Scratchpad configuration option area may take time. Allow a minute or
more for the file to be loaded.
3. Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration
options and press Enter (Current Configuration, Customer Configuration,
Scratchpad Configuration, or Default Factory Configuration).
The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit
area and the Configuration Edit/Display menu appears.
This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration
3-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Configuration Procedures
Changing Configuration Options
Procedure
To change configuration option settings:
1. From the Configuration Edit/Display menu, select a set of configuration
options and press Enter.
For example:
Configuration→ PVC Connections
2. Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network, and make
Basic Operation, for additional information.
When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs, some
configuration options will be blank. For a valid setting to appear, Tab to the
configuration option and press the spacebar.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete.
NOTES:
— Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options.
— Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run
tests.
— Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options; they
cannot change configuration options or run tests.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Configuration Procedures
Saving Configuration Options
When changes to the configuration options are complete, use the Save function
key to save your changes to either the Current, Customer, or Scratchpad
configuration areas.
NOTE:
When changing settings, you must Save for changes to take effect.
Procedure
To save the configuration option changes:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen.
2. Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter.
The Save Configuration To: screen appears.
NOTE:
If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes, a Save
Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response.
— If you select No, the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes
are not saved.
— If you select Yes, the Save Configuration To: screen appears.
3. Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes
(normally the Current Configuration) and press Enter.
When Save is complete, Command Completeappears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE:
There are other methods of changing configurations, like SNMP and
Auto-Configuration. Since multiple sessions can be active at the same
time, the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes
being made. For instance:
— Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration
changes made via another method to be lost.
— If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and
saves them, your changes would be lost.
3-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
4-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Using the Easy Install Feature
The Easy Install feature provides a straight-forward installation menu that requires
minimal configuration to get the FrameSaver unit up and running quickly, and to set
up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC
(Network Operations Center).
Main Menu→ Easy Install
Easy Install Screen Example*
main/easy_install
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
08/23/2002 11:04
EASY INSTALL
Service Type:
Frame Relay
Node IP Address:
Node Subnet Mask:
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
980
Clear
Clear
TS Access:
DLCI
Create a Dedicated Network Management Link
Ethernet Management Options Screen
Time Slot Assignment Screen
Network 1 Line Framing Format:
Network 1 Line Build Out (LBO):
Network 1 Line Coding Format:
ESF
0.0
B8ZS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
* The Ethernet Management Options Screen applies to the 9126-II (both CSU/DSU
and Router) and 9128-II. For the Model 9126, DS0 Base Rate (Kbps) appears after
the Network 1 Line Coding Format option.
To remotely access the FrameSaver unit in Frame Relay mode, use the Dedicated
Network Management Link that was created during installation, using the Node IP
Address that was entered for the unit.
Instructions for additional information and installation procedures.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Using RIP with FrameSaver SLV CSU/DSUs
Using the system’s standard Routing Information Protocol (RIP) feature, routing
information is passed to the router over the management PVC, so the router can
learn routes to FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices. Node IP information should be
Procedure
To set up your router and FrameSaver SLV CSU/DSU so that the router can learn
routes to FrameSaver devices:
1. Configure the router to receive RIP.
For example, if using a Cisco router, you would use the commands
config-t, router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1,
then ctl-z WR.
2. Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port.
Configuration→ Data Ports→ DLCI Records
3. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured.
Configuration→ Management and Communication→ Management PVCs
4. Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out, and Save the configuration.
Options, for configuration information.
4-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock
Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the
unit, its location, and a contact for the unit, as well as to set the system clock.
Main Menu→ Control→ System Information
The following information is available for viewing. Save any entries or changes.
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .
Device Name
Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters.
SNMP system name; can be up to 255 characters.
System Name
System Location
System Contact
System’s physical location; can be up to 255 characters.
Name and how to contact the system person; can be up to
255 characters.
Date
Time
Current date in the month/day/year format (mm/dd/yyyy).
Current time in the hours:minutes format (hh:mm).
NOTE:
To clear existing information, place the cursor in the Clear field (Tab to the
Clear field) and press Enter.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up the Modem
The unit has an internal modem for dial-in access to the menu-driven user
interface, as well as dial-out capability when an SNMP trap is generated. When the
modem will be used to dial out, Modem Directory phone numbers need to be set
up. Otherwise, simply configure or change dial-in access to the unit.
The modem port is already configured for connection to an asynchronous terminal
and dial-in access, with Port Use set to Terminal. However, additional changes
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Modem Port
For dial-in access to the menu-driven user interface via Telnet, make sure Port Use
is set to Net Link, the IP address and subnet mask are entered if they are different
from the node’s, and that the Link Protocol is correct.
For dial-in access to the router connected to the unit’s COM port, make sure the
Communication Port’s Port Use option is set to Modem PassThru.
Security and Logins, for additional information.
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out
Procedure
1. Set up directory phone numbers.
Main Menu→ Control→ Modem Call Directories
2. Select Directory Number A (for Alarm).
3. Enter the phone number(s).
Valid characters include . . . For . . .
ASCII text
Entering the phone number.
Readability characters.
Space,
underscore ( _ ), and dash (–)
Comma (,)
Readability character for a 2-second pause.
Blind dialing.
B
P
T
Pulse dialing, unless B is specified.
Tone dialing, unless B is specified.
Wait for dial tone.
W
4. Save the phone number(s).
4-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature
Dial-in access to the router is possible via the Modem PassThru feature, also
known as the Router Assist feature. The FrameSaver unit’s COM port must be
connected to the router’s auxiliary (AUX) or console port, and the COM port must
be configured for this use.
When this feature is set up and active, a logical connection between the unit’s
modem and COM ports is made, and data received over the modem port is
transmitted out the COM port to the router’s AUX or console port. When an escape
sequence (minus, minus, minus, with a minimum of 50 ms between each) is
detected, the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation.
Assignments, for cable information.
Procedure
1. Configure the COM port to use Modem PassThru.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Communication Port
2. Set Port Use to Modem PassThru.
3. Save the configuration.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up Auto-Configuration
The auto-configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic
configuration and connection of DLCIs within the FrameSaver unit, as well as to
automatically remove DLCIs and connections that are no longer supported by the
network service provider.
Main Menu→ Auto-Configuration
Auto-Configuration Screen Example
main/auto-configuration
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
8/18/2000 23:32
AUTO-CONFIGURATION
Frame Relay Discovery Mode:
1MPort
Enable
Automatic Circuit Removal:
Automatic Backup Configuration:
Single_Site_Backup
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
This feature also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is
used on the network interface.
If an ISDN DBM is not installed, Automatic Backup Configuration does not appear
information).
4-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active, the FrameSaver unit “discovers”
network DLCIs from the network LMI status response message. It configures a
network DLCI and a user data port DLCI, and automatically connects them to
create a PVC.
Main Menu→ Auto-Configuration→ Frame Relay Discovery Mode
Automatically configured network DLCIs are multiplexed, and each automatically
configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network
DLCI. These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the
FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link, between your equipment and the
network.
NOTE:
A local Management PVC (e.g., the PVC between the router and the
FrameSaver unit’s user data port) must be configured manually.
The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected:
Discovery Mode
Configuration Description
1MPort
Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.
A management DLCI is configured.
A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded
DLCIs (EDLCIs) is configured for Port-1 user data and
management data.
A PVC connection is configured between the network
and port DLCIs.
1Port
Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.
No management DLCI is configured.
A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port-1 user
data.
A PVC connection is configured between the network
and port DLCIs.
1PPort
Auto-Configuration is enabled on Port-1.
A Port-1 DLCI is created for each network DLCI and
automatically cross-connected to it.
Payload management is configured for the network DLCI
and assigned the Node IP Address.
2MPorts
Auto-configuration is enabled on both Port-1 and Port-2.
(only applies to models with
multiple data ports)
A multiplexed network DLCI containing three EDLCIs is
configured for Port-1 customer data, Port-2 customer
data, and management data.
PVC connections are configured between the network
and port DLCIs.
A management PVC is configured on the network
interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Discovery Mode
Configuration Description
NetOnly
Auto-configuration of a network DLCI only; no Port-1 or
PVC connections are configured.
No Port-1, PVC connection, or management DLCI is
configured.
Disable
No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration
takes place.
The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually.
NOTE:
If the default setting (1MPort or 1PPort) is not the setting required for your
application, change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the
network cable or editing discovered option settings. Otherwise, the
FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCIs as soon as it powers up.
If this occurs, you can recover by deleting the discovered DLCIs. If only a local
management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been
configured, simply select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save
the change.
The default discovery mode, depending on model, is 1MPort or 1PPort.
When 1MPort mode is active, the unit creates for each DLCI discovered on the
network a multiplexed network interface DLCI (which contains two EDLCIs: one for
Port-1 data and the other for management), a standard Port-1 DLCI (with the same
number as the network interface DLCI), and a Management PVC, then
cross-connects them. When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status
information (with provisioned DLCI numbers) is next received from the network,
the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area.
When 1PPort mode is active, the unit uses the Network DLCI values obtained from
the Network LMI status response message to automatically configure for each
DLCI a corresponding DLCI for Port 1 having the same numeric value as the
Network DLCI, and automatically cross connects them. The DLCIs created on the
network side are IP Enabled (not standard or multiplexed) DLCIs. In addition,
payload management is configured for the network DLCI and assigned the Node
IP Address.
Configuration options set by selecting a discovery mode can be manually
modified, refined, or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus. No
previously discovered and configured DLCIs or cross-connections will be removed
unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled (see Automatically
according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting. Selecting or
changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks.
NOTE:
When auto-configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI, but a standard DLCI is
needed, change the DLCI to standard from the network DLCI Records screen:
Configuration→ Network→ DLCI Records
4-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved, the Saving will
cause Auto-Configuration to update and Restart. Are you sure?
prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.
If Yes (y) is entered, the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections?
prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.
— If Yes is entered, all multiplexed DLCIs and PVC Connections are deleted,
except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary
destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS
Management Link.
— If No is entered, previously discovered and auto-configured option settings
will not be removed, but configuration updates due to LMI response
messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting.
If No (n) is entered, or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt,
no Auto-Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI
response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting.
Automatically Removing a Circuit
Using the automatic circuit removal feature, which comes enabled, network DLCIs
and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit’s configuration when the
network service provider no longer supports them. Automatic deletion is based
upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link.
When this feature is set to:
Enable – The following will be automatically removed from the unit’s
configuration:
— Unsupported network DLCIs and PVC connections that include
multiplexed network DLCIs.
— Standard network DLCIs that are Payload Managed or IP Enabled.
— Unsupported standard network DLCIs that are not configured as the
primary destination in a management PVC.
— Non-management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCIs
are included.
— DLCIs not included in three consecutive LMI full status response
messages.
— LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI.
All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they
revert to their default settings.
A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down,
or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link.
Disable – Unused network DLCIs, PVC connections, and management PVCs
must be manually removed.
If the model has ISDN backup capability, ISDN Link Profiles associated with
the deleted records and alternate destinations will be deleted, as well.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up Dial Backup
When configuring units with ISDN backup capability, the following guidelines
apply:
Central site configuration guidelines:
— Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface.
— If a BRI DBM, change the Automatic Backup Configuration to
Multi_Site_Backup. (A PRI DBM is already configured for multisite
backup.)
— Modify the Link Profile(s) that Automatic Backup Configuration created to
add a phone number.
Remote site configuration guidelines:
— Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface.
— If a PRI DBM, change the Automatic Backup Configuration to
Single_Site_Backup. (A BRI DBM is already configured for single-site
backup.)
— Modify the HQ_Site Link Profile that Automatic Backup Configuration
created to add a phone number.
— Set the criteria by which automatic backup will take place.
Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface
Procedure
1. Configure the DBM interface.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ Physical
2. Enable the interface, and enter the Service Profile IDs (SPIDs) and local
phone numbers.
3. Save the configuration.
PRI DBM Physical Interface Options, for configuration information.
4-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration
The Automatic Backup Configuration feature is used to automatically create
alternate DLCI records and PVC connections on the ISDN DBM (backup) interface
for current or newly discovered PVC Connections and Management PVCs.
This feature is already set up, with Single_Site_Backup as the default for units with
a BRI DBM and Multi_Site_Backup for units with a PRI DBM. If the unit at the
central site has a BRI DBM, change the Automatic Backup Configuration to
Multi_Site_Backup, if necessary.
Main Menu→ Auto-Configuration→ Automatic Backup Configuration
If you select . . .
Then . . .
Single_Site_Backup
Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a
single ISDN Link Profile to backup all network PVC
Connections and Management PVCs over the primary
destination ISDN link.
(default for a BRI DBM)
(Used at remote sites since
only one ISDN link to the
central-site is needed.)
Initially, PVCs with alternate destinations are configured on
the first ISDN Link Profile using the same DLCI number as
the network DLCI being backed up. However, primary
destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface are
automatically updated to use a different DLCI number for
the alternate destination DLCI, derived from the first SLV
message received on the each network DLCI.
Multi_Site_Backup
Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a
separate ISDN Link Profile to backup each network PVC
Connection and Management PVC over the ISDN interface.
(default for a PRI DBM)
(Used at central sites since
multiple ISDN links are
needed, one for each
remote-site.)
Initially, all DLCIs are configured on the ISDN links using
the same DLCI number as the network DLCI being backed
up. However, primary destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM
interface are automatically updated to use a different DLCI
number for the alternate destination DLCI, derived from the
first SLV message received on the each network DLCI.
Automatically created alternate destination Link Profiles
appear as Bkupnnnn, nnnn being the DLCI number (e.g.,
Bkup200 would be configured for network DLCI 200).
Disabled
No automatic configuration takes place on the DBM
interface and no alternate destinations are created for
PVCs.
NOTE:
Changes must be saved to take effect.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
When the Automatic Backup Configuration setting is changed, the following
prompts appear. No is the default for these prompts.
The following prompt
When the . . .
appears . . .
If you select . . .
Automatic Backup
Configuration setting Auto-Configuration
was changed, and
Saving will cause
No – No Auto-Configuration
updates are performed and
updates due to LMI response
messages are performed
according to the previously
saved setting.
to update and
Restart. Are you
sure?
Save was selected
Yes – The Delete All
DLCIs and PVC
Connections?prompt
appears.
Response to the
Delete All DLCIs Alternate
and PVC
Connections?
prompt was No, and
Delete All
No – No previously configured
DLCIs or PVC connections are
removed or changed, and
newly discovered DLCIs will be
configured according to the
new discovery mode and
Destinations from
PVC Connections?
Automatic Backup
Configuration was
disabled
automatic backup setting.
Yes – All multiplexed DLCIs,
ISDN Link Profiles (except for
the first one), and PVC
connections are deleted,
except for management PVCs
with the user data port as the
primary destination and
management PVCs designated
as the TS Management Link.
If an alternate destination has
been configured on a retained
Management PVC, the
alternate destination will be
deleted but the primary
destination will be retained.
Response to the
Delete All DLCIs Destinations to
and PVC
Connections?
prompt was No, and
Add Alternate
Yes – DLCI records are
configured on the ISDN link(s)
and Alternate Destination
information is added to current
PVC connections and
Current PVC
Connections?
management PVCs.
Automatic Backup
Configuration was set
to
Single_Site_Backup
or Multi_Site_Backup
No – No previously configured
PVC connections are changed,
and newly discovered DLCIs
will be configured according to
the new discovery mode and
automatic backup setting.
4-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
The following prompt
appears . . .
When the . . .
If you select . . .
Response to the
Remove Alternate
Destinations
from PVCs and
delete unused
DLCI Records?
prompt was Yes, and
—
No – No previously configured
DLCIs, ISDN Link Profiles, or
PVC Connections are removed
or changed, but updates due to
LMI responses will be
performed using the new
setting.
Automatic Backup
Configuration was
disabled
Yes – All Alternate Destination
information will be removed
from PVC Connections and
Management PVCs, and all
DLCIs and ISDN Link Profiles
(except for the first one) used
exclusively as Alternate
Destinations are deleted.
Response to the
Remove Alternate Destinations to
Destinations
from PVCs and
delete unused
DLCI Records?
prompt was Yes, and
Add Alternate
No – No previously configured
PVC Connections are removed
or changed, but updates due to
LMI responses will be
performed using the new
setting.
Current PVC
Connections?
Yes – Alternate Destination
information is configured for
current DLCIs, ISDN Link
Profiles, PVC Connections and
Management PVCs on the
ISDN DBM interface, except for
the Management PVC
Automatic Backup
Configuration was set
to
Single_Site_Backup
or Multi_Site_Backup
designated as the TS Access
Management Link.
NOTE:
When DLCIs, PVC connections, and management PVCs for the first ISDN
Link Profile have been configured manually, it is recommended that specific
discovered DLCIs, PVC connections, and management PVCs be deleted
manually via the Configuration menus. Otherwise, the manual configurations
will be deleted along with the automatically configured ones.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Modifying ISDN Link Profiles
Once an ISDN Link Profile is configured using the Automatic Backup Configuration
feature, phone numbers and Calling IDs need to be entered. FrameSaver units
with ISDN backup capability can originate or answer calls, as needed, so both
phone numbers and Calling IDs are needed.
Procedure
1. Select Link Profiles, then Modify.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ Link Profiles
2. Add a name and phone number to the ISDN Link Profile(s) created by
Automatic Backup Configuration.
— Name for the destination entered (e.g., Tampa). The default setting is
HQ_Site for the first ISDN Link Profile.
— Phone numbers entered:
For Originating a Backup Call
For Answering a Backup Call
Outbound and Alternate Outbound
phone numbers
Inbound Calling ID1 and ID2
These are the phone numbers of units
from which calls will be accepted.
Valid characters can include:
Numbers (0–9)
Valid characters can include:
Special characters * and #
Spaces
Numbers (0–9)
Parentheses ( )
NOTES:
Remember to include local dial-out numbers (i.e., 9, then the number).
For every originating (outbound) phone number entered, an answering
(inbound) phone number must be entered at the far end, and vice versa.
— Maximum Link Rate (Kbps) set to the appropriate speed, if necessary.
— Caller Identification Method set to Proprietary if call validation is not
required. The setting must be the same at both ends of the circuit.
— An Alternate Outbound Phone Number should a call using the primary
Outbound Phone Number be unsuccessful, if desired.
3. Save the configuration.
4-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers
You can specify when auto backup is allowed to occur. If backup is restricted and a
backup is active when the allowed time for backups is over, then the backup is
terminated and the data is returned to the primary data path regardless of the
primary path’s condition.
You can restrict auto backup to occur only:
On certain days of the week
At certain times of the day
The following additional features can be configured:
Delays can be configured to control how long the unit will wait before initiating
backup when a DLCI is declared down, and how long it will wait to restore
service once the DLCI is declared operational again.
A threshold can be set to determine how many times a primary destination
DLCI can transition between Active and Inactive before the unit initiates
backup.
Procedure
To set the criteria and backup timers for automatic backup:
1. Enable Auto Backup.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Auto-Backup Criteria
When a failure occurs, the unit automatically enables the Alternate Link and
traffic is rerouted over the backup (alternate) interface.
2. Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared down before backup is
initiated (DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay).
3. Set the threshold for transitions of the DLCI’s status before backup is initiated
(DLCI Down Backup Activation Transmission Threshold).
4. Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared operation before backup
is ended (Backup Restoration Delay).
5. Specify When Auto Backup Allowed – Always or Restrict. If Restrict is
selected, specify the days and hours of the week during which automatic
backup can take place.
6. Save the configuration.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps
The ISDN DBM interface can be specified as an interface that monitors and
generates SNMP traps:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communications→
SNMP Traps
The configuration options for doing this include:
Link Trap Interfaces
DLCI Traps on Interfaces
ISDN Dial Control Traps
When DBM is selected, trap messages are generated for linkUp and linkDown
events on DLCIs and frame relay links for the originating DBM interface only. For
peer-to-peer backup, backing up to a neighboring node like a regional node, dial
control traps can be sent to trap manager(s).
information.
Assigning DLCIs to a Backup Group
DLCIs can be assigned to a Backup Group to reduce backup charges when
redundant PVCs have been configured. This feature prevents backup as long as
any DLCI in the group is operational.
Backup is not initiated as long as one DLCI in the group is operational.
Backup is terminated as soon as one DLCI in the group becomes operational.
4-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
PVC Backup Over the Network Interface
Generally, backup can be performed on the network interface’s frame relay link
using a backup PVC, as well on an ISDN link; the unit does not have to have the
ISDN DBM feature.
In this case, create a DLCI Record on the network interface that will be used for
backup, then modify the PVC Connections or Management PVCs to add the
alternate destination.
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation
Using this special feature, you can set up two FrameSaver units that are
connected back-to-back without frame relay switches between them, as in a test
bench setup using a crossover cable.
Changing Operating Mode
When setting up back-to-back operation:
One unit must be configured for Standard operation, which is the setting for
normal operation.
The other unit must be configured for Back-to-Back operation so it presents
the network side of the UNI (user-network interface).
Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed.
Procedure
To set up back-to-back operation:
1. On the unit to be configured for Back-to-Back operation, manually configure
DLCIs; DLCIs should be configured before connecting the two units.
2. Access the Change Operating Mode screen.
Main Menu→ Control→ Change Operating Mode
3. Select Back-to-Back Operation, and respond Yes to the Are you sure?
prompt.
4. Save the change.
Procedure
To return the unit to normal operation:
1. Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard
Operation.
2. Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change. The units can be
reconnected to a standard frame relay network.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuration Option Tables
Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order, even
though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the
unit.
The following configuration option tables are included:
DSX-1-to-Network Time Slots/Cross Connections)
4-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the Overall System
The System menu options are explained in the following sections:
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System (CSU/DSUs)
Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the
Main Menu→ Configuration→ System → Frame Relay and LMI
frame relay options.
Table 4-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (1 of 4)
LMI Behavior
Possible Settings: Independent,
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1,
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-2,
Net1-FR1_Follows_Rtr-S0,
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1,
Port-2_Follows_Net1-FR1,
Rtr-S0_Follows_Net1-FR1,
All_Ports_Follow_Net1-FR1,
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1,
Port-2_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1,
Rtr-S0_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1,
Default Setting: Independent
Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to
another, determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state. Sometimes
referred to as LMI pass-through.
Display Conditions – Port-n options are available on CSU/DSUs and Rtr-S0 options are
available on the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router.
NOTE: LMI Behavior cannot be changed while Auto Backup is enabled. A warning
message appears at the bottom of the screen if auto backup is enabled. First, disable
Auto Backup, and then change LMI Behavior.
Independent – Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of
one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface. Provides LMI Spoofing.
This is the recommended setting when backup is configured, and for Network Service
Providers (NSPs).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (2 of 4)
LMI Behavior (continued)
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on
Port-1 goes down, disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads. When
LMI on Port-1 comes back up, the network interface is reenabled. The LMI state on the
network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port-1. That is, the network interface’s
LMI follows Port-1’s LMI. Used at central sites, this setting is useful when the remote site
router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant
central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure. Not
recommended for NSPs.
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-2 – Reacts like the Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1 selection, but for
Port-2 instead.
Rtr-S0_Follows_Port-1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Rtr-S0
goes down, disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads. When LMI
on Rtr-S0 comes back up, the network interface is reenabled. The LMI state on the
network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Rtr-S0. That is, the network interface’s
LMI follows Rtr-S0’s LMI.
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network
interface goes down, disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads. When LMI on the
network interface comes back up, Port-1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted.
The LMI state on Port-1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface. That is,
Port-1’s LMI follows the network interface’s LMI. This setting is useful if the router
connected to Port-1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected.
Port-2_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Reacts like the Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1 selection, but for
Port-2 instead.
Rtr-S0_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on Rtr-S0 when LMI on the network
interface goes down, disabling Rtr-S0. When LMI on the network interface comes back up,
Rtr-S0 is reenabled. The LMI state on Rtr-S0 has no effect on the LMI state on the
network interface. That is, Rtr-S0’s LMI follows the network interface’s LMI.
All_Ports_Follow_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on all user data ports when LMI on the
network interface goes down, disabling all ports and deasserting their control leads.
Allows LMI to come back up and reenables the ports when LMI comes up on the network.
That is, LMI on each port follows the network interface’s LMI. The state of LMI on the port
will not affect the state of LMI on the network interface.
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when
LMI on Port-1 goes down (or LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network interface goes
down), and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface.
That is, the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other. Use this setting when
backup is through the router instead of the unit. It is not recommended since it makes fault
isolation more difficult.
Port-2_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Reacts like the
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 selection, but for Port-2 instead. The state of LMI on
the network interface will not affect the state of LMI on Port-1.
Rtr-S0_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when
LMI on Rtr-S0 goes down (or LMI down on Rtr-S0 when LMI on the network interface
goes down), and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other
interface. That is, the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other.
4-22
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (3 of 4)
LMI Error Event (N2)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 3
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can occur
on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network sides of a
UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.
LMI Clearing Event (N3)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 1
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free messages
that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user and network
sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255
Default Setting: 6
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry polling
cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated. Applies
to the user side of a UNI only.
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before
a full status enquiry is initiated.
LMI Heartbeat (T1)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 10
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between the
initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user side
of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry
messages in increments of 5.
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 15
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between the
receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the network
side of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages
in increments of 5.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (4 of 4)
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 20
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.
4-24
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Class of Service Definitions
Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu to display or change the
Class of Service definitions to be used with latency, availability, and throughput
measurements of IP traffic on IP Enabled circuits.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ System → Class of Service Definitions
The Class of Service Definitions screen appears.
Procedure
To create a new Class of Service definition:
2. To automatically create Class of Service names and associate them with code
points according to RFCs 2474, 2497, and 2498, select RfcCodePoints. The
following settings are established:
Field
Setting After RfcCodePoints Selected
Class of Service Name
1 – NewCtrl
2 – Expd Fwd
3 – AFClass4
4 – AFClass3
5 – AFClass2
6 – AFClass1
7 – Default
Measure Latency & Availability
1 – N
2 – Y
3 – Y
4 – Y
5 – Y
6 – Y
7 – Y
Code Points
1 (NetwCtrl) – 110000, 111000
2 (Expd Fwd) – 101110
3 (AFClass4) – 100010, 100100, 100110
4 (AFClass3) – 011010, 011100, 011110
5 (AFClass2) – 010010, 010100, 010110
6 (AFClass1) – 001010, 001100, 001110
7 (Default)
– 000000
4. Type a name of up to 8 characters into one of the Name fields next to IDs 1–6.
5. To unassign all code points by inserting blank names, select ClrAllCodePoints.
To assign all Code Points to a Class of Service name of Default, select
DefaultCodePoints.
6. Select PgDn or PgUp. The Code Point Assignment screen appears.
7. For any Code Point you want to assign to the name, type the name you
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
8. Select Save, then select PgDn or PgUp. The Class of Service Definitions page
reappears. In the Code Points Assigned column next to your selected name
there is now a Y for Yes.
9. If latency and availability should be measured for the selected name, change
the N in the Measure Latency & Availability column to Y.
10. Select Save.
To configure these options, Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to
Frame Relay.
Table 4-2. Class of Service Definitions
Class of Svc Name
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry
Default Setting:
For IDs 2–7: blank
For ID 1: Default
Specifies a name to identify a Class of Service definition.
ASCII Text Entry – Enter a unique name for the definition (maximum length 8 characters).
Measure Latency & Availability
Possible Settings: N, Y
Default Setting:
For IDs 2–7: N
For ID 1: Y
Determines whether latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID.
Display Conditions – This option is set to N and is read-only until the class of service is
defined and code points are assigned to it.
N – Latency and availability are not measured for this Class of Service ID.
Y – Latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID.
Code Points Assigned
Possible Settings: Y, N
Default Setting:
For IDs 2–7: N
For ID 1: Y
This read-only field shows whether a Code Point has been assigned to this Class of
Service ID on the Code Point Definitions screen.
N – No Code Point is assigned to this ID.
Y – At least one Code Point is assigned to this ID.
4-26
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Code Point Definitions
Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu, then PgDn or PgUp, to
display or change the Code Point definitions for a Class of Service ID. See
Table 4-3. Code Point Definitions
Code Pnt
Possible Settings: 000000–111111
Default Setting: None.
This read-only field shows the possible Code Points. Code Points are described in
RFC 2474.
ID
Possible Settings: 1–7
Default Setting: 1
This read-only field shows the ID associated with the Name field. If you change a name in
a Name field on this screen and select Save, the ID changes to match the name.
Name
Possible Settings: ASCII Text
Default Setting: Default
The Name field specifies the Class of Service to which you want to assign the Code Point.
ASCII Text – Specifies one of the Class of Service Names entered on the Class of
Service Definitions screen.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Service Level Verification Options
Main Menu→ Configuration→ System→ Service Level Verification
Table 4-4. Service Level Verification Options (1 of 3)
SLV Sample Interval (secs)
10 – 3600
Possible Settings:
60
Default Setting:
Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices. Inband
communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency, as well as transmission
success and other SLV information.
10 – 3600
– Sets the SLV Sample Interval (secs) in seconds.
SLV Synchronization Role
Tributary, Controller, None
Available Settings:
Tributary
Default Setting:
Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data
collection and storage between FrameSaver SLV and/or FLEX devices.
Tributary
– Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and
provides network-based synchronization information to other devices in the network.
Controller
– Uses its own internal time-of-day clock and provides synchronization
information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock.
NOTE: Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV
synchronization controller.
None
– Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out. This
setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable, or when a
single unit connects multiple networks or network segments.
SLV Type
Standard, COS 1–COS 7
Available Settings:
Default Setting:
Standard
COS 1
If SLV Feature is enabled:
If SLV Feature is disabled:
Determines the type of SLV measurements to which these other SLV options apply:
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold
SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold
SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold
SLV Packet Size
Standard
– The options selected apply to standard FrameSaver SLV measurements,
utlizing an EDLCI for FrameSaver-to-FrameSaver communication. This option is not
available if the SLV Feature is disabed.
COS 1–COS 7
– The options selected apply to this Class of Service. Different settings
may be saved for each Class of Service.
4-28
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-4. Service Level Verification Options (2 of 3)
SLV Delivery Ratio
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios (FDR/DDR)
between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled. To use this capability, both ends of all PVCs
must be FrameSaver SLV devices. If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s,
they must be running software version 1.2 or higher.
Display Conditions – This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard.
Enable – An extra byte for FDR/DDR statistics collection is included with each frame,
which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the
network.
Disable – Extra byte is not included.
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout
Available Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to
determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units.
NOTE: This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far-end unit
with hardware bypass capability.
Display Conditions – This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard.
Enable – After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded,
causing the DLCI’s status to turn Inactive, an alarm and SNMP trap are generated, and a
Health and Status message created.
Disable – Missed SLV packets are monitored, but the DLCI is not declared down.
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20
Default Setting: 3
Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected
before a DLCI Inactive status is declared.
1–20 – Sets the limit for these error events.
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the
DLCI Inactive status is cleared.
1 – 20 – Sets the limit for the clearing event.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-4. Service Level Verification Options (3 of 3)
SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold (ms)
Available Settings: 50, 51, 52, . . . 10000
Default Setting: 10000
Specifies the number of milliseconds that must be exceeded before an SLV Latency
Threshold alarm event is declared and backup, if configured, is initiated for a DLCI.
If SLV Type is Standard, the latency applies to a multiplexed DLCI.
If SLV Type is a Class of Service (COS 1 – COS 7), the latency applies to the COS on an
IP Enabled path.
50–10000 – Sets the limit for these error events.
SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20
Default Setting: 2
Specifies the number of consecutive SLV latency measurements below the error threshold
that must be received before the error status is cleared.
1 – 20 – Sets the limit for the clearing event.
SLV Packet Size (bytes)
Available Settings: 64 – 2048
Default Setting: 64
Sets the size of packets, in bytes, that will be used for SLV communications. SLV packets
are used to track latency and other SLV-related variables.
When the packet size is changed, a new round trip and average latency calculation must
be performed, so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics
screen until a new sampling interval has occurred.
64 – 2048 – Sets the packet size for SLV communications.
4-30
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring General System Options
Select General from the System menu to configure the general system
Main Menu→ Configuration→ System→ General
Table 4-5. General System Options (1 of 3)
Test Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they
are terminated automatically.
Enable – All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout. This setting is recommended
when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in-band data stream. If the
FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface
providing the management access, control can be regained after the timeout expires,
terminating the test.
Disable – Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated.
Test Duration (min)
Possible Settings: 1 – 120
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the maximum duration of the tests.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable.
1 – 120 – Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes (inclusive).
Primary Clock Source
Possible Settings: Net1, DSX, Internal, DBM
Default Setting: Net1
Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit. The source selected provides all
of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces.
Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to
the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting.
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Internal can be
selected for both options. All other selections must have different settings (e.g., if
Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1).
Net1 – The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface.
DSX – The primary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX-1 interface. This setting only
Internal – The primary clock is the internal clock.
DBM – The primary clock is derived from the DBM. This selection only appears if the DBM
is installed and enabled.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-5. General System Options (2 of 3)
Secondary Clock Source
Possible Settings: Net1, DSX, Internal, DBM
Default Setting: Internal
Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails. The source
selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the
clocks for all of the external interfaces.
The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is
stable for 10 seconds. If the secondary clock source fails, the clock source will switch to
internal. The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source
returns and is stable for 10 seconds.
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Internal can be
selected for both options. All other selections must have different settings (e.g., if
Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1).
Net1 – The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface.
DSX – The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX-1 interface. This setting
only appears if the DSX-1 interface is enabled.
Internal – The secondary clock is the internal clock.
DBM – The secondary clock is derived from the DBM. This selection only appears if the
DBM is installed and enabled.
4-32
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-5. General System Options (3 of 3)
System Alarm Relay
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether an alarm condition for the unit will activate the system alarm relay. The
alarm relay is deactivated when the condition causing the alarm is corrected. If more than
one alarm condition is present, the alarm relay remains active until all alarm conditions
are cleared.
You can also deactivate an alarm via the System Alarm Relay Cut-Off selection from the
Control menu; however, the alarm itself is not cleared. When another alarm condition is
detected, the alarm is reactivated again, requiring another manual deactivation of the
alarm relay.
Display Conditions – This option only appears for a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II installed
in the 9000 Series Access Carrier.
Alarm conditions are:
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) received at the Network, DSX-1, or PRI interface
Continuous Loss of Signal (LOS) condition at the Network, DSX-1, or PRI interface
CTS Down
DBM Download Required
DBM BRI Card Failed
Device Fail
DLCI Down
DTR Down
Ethernet Link Down
Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at the Network or PRI interface
Internal Modem Failed
ISDN Network Failure
LMI Down
Network Communication Link Down
Out of Frame (OOF) at Network, DSX-1, or PRI
Primary or Secondary Clock Failure
Power Supply/Fan Failure
RTS Down
Self-Test Failure
SLV Latency Exceeded
SLV Timeout
Suboptimal (Maximum) Link Rate Cannot be Achieved
Two Level-1 Users Accessing Device
Yellow Alarm Signal on the Network, DSX-1, or PRI interface
Enable – Activates alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition
occurs.
Disable – Does not activate the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Physical Interfaces
Characteristics for physical interfaces are explained in the following sections:
Configuring the Network Interface
When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface, select
Options).
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Network→ Physical
Table 4-6. Network Physical Interface Options (1 of 4)
Line Framing Format
Possible Settings: D4, ESF
Default Setting: ESF
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network
interface.
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.
NOTE: This setting is not recommended by network carriers. False yellow alarms may
occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle, or when there is
light traffic when other settings are selected. ESF format does not create this problem.
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe framing format.
Line Coding Format
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS
Default Setting: B8ZS
Specifies the line coding format for the network interface.
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) line coding format.
4-34
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-6. Network Physical Interface Options (2 of 4)
Line Build Out (LBO)
Possible Settings: 0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5
Default Setting: 0.0
Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network.
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5 – Specifies line build out in dB.
Bit Stuffing
Possible Settings: 62411, Disable
Default Setting: 62411
Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data
transmitted to the network.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set to
B8ZS.
62411 – Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of
ones falls below 12.5%. This setting complies with AT&T TR 62411, but is not
recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic.
Disable – Disables bit stuffing. Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network.
Transmit Timing
Possible Settings: System, Interface
Default Setting: System
Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from
the currently selected interface.
Interface – Transmit timing is derived from this interface.
NOTE: When Interface is configured, the clock must be synchronized to the system
clock source.
Network Initiated LLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback (LLB) to be controlled by the
receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the network.
Enable – LLB is controlled by LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands. Receiving a
LLB-Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback (provided an
LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit’s current state). Receiving an LLB-Release
command terminates the LLB.
Disable – The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or
AT&T TR 62411.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-6. Network Physical Interface Options (3 of 4)
Network Initiated PLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback (PLB) to be controlled by the
receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the network.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – PLB is controlled by PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands. Receiving a
PLB-Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback (provided a PLB
can be performed in the unit’s current state). Receiving a PLB-Release command
terminates the PLB.
Disable – The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or
AT&T TR 54016.
Network Initiated DCLB
Possible Settings: Disable, V.54_&_ANSI
Default Setting: V.54_&_ANSI
Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback (DCLB V.54 Loop 2) to
be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB-actuate or DCLB-release sequence (either V.54 or
FT1-ANSI compliant) from the network on the DS0s used for the network frame relay link.
When enabled and a DCLB-activate sequence is received, the unit initiates a DCLB on
the network interface. When a DCLB-release sequence is received, the DCLB is stopped.
Disable – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences are ignored.
V.54_&_ANSI – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either V.54
or ANSI T1.403, Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and
termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link. The actuate and release
sequences do not need to match (for example, a DCLB started with a V.54 actuate
sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence).
ANSI Performance Report Messages
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether ANSI T1.403 compliance performance report messages (PRMs) are
generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – Generates and sends PRMs.
Disable – Does not generate and send PRMs.
4-36
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-6. Network Physical Interface Options (4 of 4)
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
Possible Settings: 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Default Setting: 10E-4
Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared. The
excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total
number of bits received over a set period of time.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
10E-4 – Declares an EER if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second
period. Clears when fewer than 1,536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time
period.
10E-5 – Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second
-4
period or a 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected
within the same time period.
10E-6 – Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second
-5
-4
period or a 10 or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-7 – Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period
-6
-5
-4
or a 10 , or 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-8 – Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute
-7
-6
-5
-4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6
errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-9 – Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than
5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period.
Circuit Identifier
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry, Clear
Default Setting: blank
Identifies the transmission vendor’s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting.
ASCII Text Entry – Edit or display circuit identifier information (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Removes the circuit identifier information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring a User Data Port (CSU/DSUs)
Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to display or change the physical
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Data Ports→ Physical
Table 4-7. Data Port Physical Interface Options (1 of 5)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the data port is being used and can be configured.
Enable – The port is active, and can be used to transmit and receive data.
Disable – The port is not active. When the port is disabled, the following will occur:
No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
LED for the port will be held in an Off state.
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key also acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled.
Port Use
Possible Settings: Frame Relay, Synchronous Data
Default Setting:
Frame Relay when the port supports frame relay.
Synchronous Data when the port only supports synchronous data.
Determines how the data port will be used.
Display Conditions – This option only appears for user data on Port-2.
Frame Relay – The port is configured for frame relay traffic. Frame relay links, DLCis, and
PVC connections can be configured on this port.
Synchronous Data – The port is configured for standard TDM data, and can be
cross-connected to a time slot on a T1 interface.
No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
The LED for the port will be held in an Off state.
Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port are cleared.
4-38
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Physical Interface Options (2 of 5)
Max Port Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 1536, 2048
Default Setting: 1536
Specifies the maximum clock rate for a user data port. The data rate for this port is limited
to the rate specified by this option so that the maximum rate supported by an attached
DTE is not exceeded.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Port Use is set to Frame Relay
and, if the unit has multiple data ports, the selected port is Port-2.
1536 – The maximum port rate for the port is 1536 Kbps.
2048 – The maximum port rate for the port is 2048 Kbps.
Port Base Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: Nx64, Nx56
Default Setting: Nx64
Specifies the base rate for the data port, which is a multiple (from 1 to 24) of the base rate
specified by this option. N is a number from 1 to 24.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Synchronous
Data. This option does not appear for a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II.
Nx64 – The base rate for the port is 64 Kbps.
Nx56 – The base rate for the port is 56 Kbps.
Invert Transmit Clock
Possible Settings: Auto, Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Auto
Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB
(ITU 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (DCE Source) TXC is phase inverted with
respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data (TD).
Auto – The port checks the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port. If necessary,
the port automatically phase inverts the clock with respect to the transmitted data.
Enable – Phase inverts the TXC clock. Use this setting when long cable lengths between
the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors.
Disable – Does not phase invert the TXC clock.
Transmit Clock Source
Possible Settings: Internal, External
Default Setting: Internal
Determines whether the DTE’s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its
internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE.
NOTE: Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to
abort any physical port tests, including any DTE-initiated loopback tests.
Internal – The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB (ITU 114) – Transmit
Signal Element Timing (TXC) (DCE source) for timing the incoming data.
External – The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data, and the FrameSaver unit
uses the interchange circuit DA (ITU 113) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (XTXC) (DTE
source) for timing the incoming data.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Physical Interface Options (3 of 5)
Monitor RTS (Control)
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send (RTS) circuits on the user data port
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE. When
this condition is detected, CTS is deasserted, LMI is declared down, and no further
transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.
Enable – Interchange circuit CA (ITU 105) – RTS is monitored to determine when valid
data communication is possible with the DTE.
Disable – RTS is not monitored. RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.
Monitor DTR
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready (DTR) circuit on the user data port will be
used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE. When this
condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no further transfer
of frame relay data can occur on this interface.
Enable – Interchange circuit CD (ITU 108/1/2) – DTR is monitored to determine whether
data should be transmitted to the DTE.
Disable – DTR is not monitored. DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.
4-40
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Physical Interface Options (4 of 5)
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks
Possible Settings:
When Port-1 or Port Use is set to Frame Relay: Disable, Local
When Port-2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data: Disable, DTPLB, DCLB, Both
Default Setting: Disable
Possible Settings: Local, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
When Port-1 or Port Use is set to Frame Relay:
Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the data terminal
equipment attached to the port’s interchange lead LL (ITU 141), as specified by V.54.
Disable – The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback.
Local – The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback.
When Port-2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data:
Allows local Data Terminal Loopbacks (DTPLBs) and remote Data Channel Loopbacks
(DCLBs) to be controlled by the DTE connected to this port.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X.21.
Disable – The DTE attached to the port cannot control Local Data Terminal Loopbacks
(DTPLBs) and remote Data Channel Loopbacks (DCLBs).
DTPLB – The DTE attached to the port controls DTPLBs via circuit LL – CCITT 141, as
specified by V.54. The port remains in loopback as long as the circuit stays on.
DCLB – The DTE attached to the port controls DCLBs via circuit RL – CCITT 140, as
specified by V.54. The far-end equipment must support inband V.54 loopbacks.
Both – The DTE attached to the port controls both local DTPLBs and remote DCLBs.
Invert Transmit and Receive Data
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether transmitted and received data for the synchronous data port is logically
inverted before being transmitted or after being received from the network. Use this
configuration option for applications where data is being transported using HDLC protocol,
whereby inverting the data ensures that the ones density requirements for the network are
met.
Display Conditions – This option only appears for Port-2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II,
when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data.
Enable – Inverts the transmitted and received data for the port.
Disable – Does not invert the transmitted and received data for the port.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Physical Interface Options (5 of 5)
Action on Network Yellow Alarm
Possible Settings: None, Halt
Default Setting: Halt
Specifies the action to take on the synchronous data port when a yellow alarm is received
on the network interface. (A yellow alarm indicates a problem with the signal being
transmitted to the network.)
Display Conditions – This option only appears for Port-2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II,
when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data.
None – No action taken when a yellow alarm is received.
Halt – Halts the transmission of data received on the synchronous data port and all ones
are sent on circuit BB (ITU 104) – Receive Data (RD) and circuit CB (ITU 106) –
Clear-to-Send (CTS) is deasserted to the port when a yellow alarm is received.
Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback
Possible Settings: Disable, V.54, ANSI_FT1, V.54_&_ANSI
Default Setting: Disable
Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback (V.54 Loop 2) to be
controlled by the receipt of a DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequence (either V.54, or
FT1 [ANSI] compliant sequences) from the network or far end unit. When this
configuration is enabled (V.54, FT1, or Both), receiving a DCLB-actuate sequence on a
particular port causes the unit to initiate a DCLB on that port (provided that a DCLB can
be performed based on the current state of the port and unit). Receiving a DCLB-release
sequence terminates the DCLB.
Display Conditions – This option only appears for Port-2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II,
when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data.
Disable – Ignores the DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release for the port.
V.54 – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the V.54 standard
for “inter-DCE signaling for point-to-point circuits” are recognized and will control the
initiation and termination of a DCLB (V.54 Loop 2) for the port.
ANSI_FT1 – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the
ANSI.403, Annex B standard for “in-band signaling for fractional T1 (FT1) channel
loopbacks” are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the
port.
V.54_&_ANSI – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the
ANSI or V.54 standard are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a
DCLB for the port.
4-42
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the DSX-1 Interface
Select DSX-1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a
Main Menu→ Configuration→ DSX-1
Table 4-8. DSX-1 Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting:Disable
Specifies whether the DSX-1 interface selected is available for use.
Enable – The interface is available.
Disable – The interface is not available for use. If there are time slots assigned to the
DSX-1 interface when you attempt to disable it, the message This action will
clear all DSX-1 Cross Connections. Are You Sure? Noappears. If you
select:
No – The operation is cancelled.
Yes – The following occurs:
All existing DSX-1 interface cross-connect assignments are cleared.
Alarms or traps associated with the DSX-1 interface are not generated.
LEDs associated with the DSX-1 interface are held in an “off’’ state.
Line Framing Format
Possible Settings: D4, ESF
Default Setting: ESF
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX-1 interface.
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe (ESF) framing format.
Line Coding Format
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS
Default Setting: B8ZS
Specifies the line coding format for the DSX-1 interface.
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) line coding format.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-8. DSX-1 Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)
Line Equalization
Possible Settings: 0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655
Default Setting: 0–133
Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet.
0–133 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.
133–266 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.
266–399 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.
399–533 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.
533–655 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.
Send All Ones on DSX-1 Failure
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the
DSX-1 (LOS, continuous OOF, or AIS).
Enable – Sends all ones on the DS0 channels allocated to the DSX-1 interface in the
event of an LOS, AIS, or continuous OOS condition on the DSX-1 interface.
Disable – No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX-1 interface. The data received
is passed through the network interface channels unchanged.
4-44
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface
For models with ISDN backup capability, select Physical from the ISDN menu to
configure the physical characteristics for DBM Interface.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ Physical
Table 4-9. ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use.
Enable – The ISDN interface is enabled.
Disable – The ISDN interface cannot be configured, nor can it transmit or receive data.
No PVC connections or frame relay DLCIs will be deleted. Disabling the ISDN interface
results in the following:
All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated.
Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed.
Service Profile ID (SPID) 1 or 2
Possible Settings: 3 – 20 digits
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the SPID number assigned by the ISDN service provider for Bearer channel 1
(B1) and Bearer channel 2 (B2). SPID numbers are used by the switch to identify which
ISDN services the DBM can access. All blanks is a valid setting.
3 – 20 digits – You can enter a SPID number, or you can leave blanks. If a nondigit/
numeric is entered, an Invalid Character (x)message appears at the bottom of
the screen. If fewer than three digits/numerics are entered, an Invalid – SPID must
be at least 3 digitsmessage appears at the bottom of the screen.
Clear – Clears the SPID field so it can be reentered.
Local Phone Number 1 or 2
Possible Settings: 10 digits
Default Setting: Clear
Provides the telephone number associated with Bearer channel 1 (B1) and 2 (B2). All
blanks is a valid setting.
10 digits – Enter the telephone number, up to 10 digits. If a nondigit/numeric is entered,
an Invalid Character (x)message appears at the bottom of the screen.
Clear – Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-10. ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options (1 of 3)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use.
Enable – The ISDN interface is enabled.
Disable – The ISDN interface cannot be configured, nor can it transmit or receive data.
No PVC connections or frame relay DLCIs will be deleted. Disabling the ISDN interface
results in the following:
All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated.
Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed.
LEDs associated with this interface are held in an “off" state. Specifically, the
DSX/PRI LEDs are held off if they represent the PRI status.
Switch Type
Possible Settings: NI-2, ATT_4ESS, ATT_5ESS
Default Setting: NI-2
Specifies type of ISDN switch provided by the server.
NI-2 – The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the National ISDN-2
switching standard.
ATT_4ESS – The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the
ATT 4ESS switching standard.
ATT_5ESS – The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the
ATT 5ESS switching standard.
Local Phone Number
Possible Settings: 10 digits
Default Setting: Clear
Provides the telephone number associated with all Bearer channels. All blanks is a valid
setting.
10 digits – Where you enter the telephone number, up to 10 digits. If a nondigit/numeric is
entered, an Invalid Character (x)message appears at the bottom of the screen.
Clear – Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered.
Line Framing Format
Possible Settings: D4, ESF
Default Setting: ESF
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the ISDN interface.
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.
NOTE: This setting is not recommended by network carriers. False yellow alarms may
occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle, or when there is
light traffic when other settings are selected. ESF format does not create this problem.
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe framing format.
4-46
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-10. ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options (2 of 3)
Line Build Out (LBO)
Possible Settings: 0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5
Default Setting: 0.0
Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the ISDN.
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5 – Specifies line build out in dB.
Network Initiated LLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback (LLB) to be controlled by the
receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the ISDN.
Enable – LLB is controlled by LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands. Receiving a
LLB-Actuate command causes the system to enter a line loopback (provided an LLB can
be performed in the system’s current state). Receiving an LLB-Release command
terminates the LLB.
Disable – The system ignores the LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or
AT&T TR 62411.
Network Initiated PLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback (PLB) to be controlled by the
receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the ISDN.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – PLB is controlled by PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands. Receiving a
PLB-Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback (provided a PLB
can be performed in the system’s current state). Receiving a PLB-Release command
terminates the PLB.
Disable – The system ignores the PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or
AT&T TR 54016.
ANSI Performance Report Messages
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether ANSI T1.403 compliance performance report messages (PRMs) are
generated and sent to the ISDN over the ESF facility data link every second.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – Generates and sends PRMs.
Disable – Does not generate and send PRMs.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-10. ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options (3 of 3)
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
Possible Settings: 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Default Setting: 10E-4
Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared. The
excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total
number of bits received over a set period of time.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
10E-4 – Declares an EER if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second
period. Clears when fewer than 1,536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time
period.
10E-5 – Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second
- 4
period or a 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected
within the same time period.
10E-6 – Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second
- 5
- 4
period or a 10 or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-7 – Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period
- 6
- 5
- 4
or a 10 , or 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-8 – Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute
-7
- 6
- 5
- 4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6
errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-9 – Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute
- 8
-7
- 6
- 5
- 4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than
5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period.
Circuit Identifier
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry, Clear
Default Setting: blank
Identifies the transmission vendor’s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting.
ASCII Text Entry – Assigns a name to identify the circuit (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Removes the circuit identifier information.
4-48
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles
For models with ISDN backup capability, select ISDN Link Profiles from the ISDN
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ ISDN Link Profiles
Table 4-11. ISDN Link Profile Options (1 of 3)
Link Name
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry, HQ_Site
Default Setting: HQ_Site for first link; blank for all others
Assigns the name to the ISDN link profile. It is generally the backup destination for a frame
relay link. Each profile must have a unique link name. If the link name field is blank, the
link profile will be deleted. Use ASCII text, 8 characters maximum.
ASCII Text Entry – Assigns a name to identify the ISDN link (maximum 255 characters).
NOTE: To prevent confusion, do not use the following link names: Network, Net1-FR1,
Port-1, or Port-2. These names will be treated as nonunique and the Link Name Not
Uniquemessage appears and you must enter another name.
HQ_Site – The link name configured in the remote site unit (originating a backup call) for
the central site unit (answering a backup call). One link has a default value of HQ_Site to
allow for Automatic Backup Configuration.
Link Status
Possible Settings: Auto, Disable
Default Setting: Auto
Determines whether the ISDN frame relay link is in or out of service.
Auto – The link is configured to be in service when needed. Packets will be transmitted
and received on the interface, and the LMI for a PVC connection will become active when
the link is required. If this profile is configured as the alternate link and the primary link or
DLCI fails, the unit dials the Outbound Phone Number, or the Alternate Outbound Phone
Number if the first call was unsuccessful. The unit also answers calls from Inbound Call
IDs associated with this link. This link profile becomes active when:
This profile is configured as the alternate link and there is a failure of a primary link
or DLCI.
Source or Primary Destination DLCIs are configured on this link.
When the primary link recovers, the call is automatically disconnected.
Disable – The frame relay link is out of service. No data will be transmitted or received on
the interface. If there is are any active calls when disabled, the calls are ended and no
calls will be answered or originated using this profile.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-11. ISDN Link Profile Options (2 of 3)
Outbound Phone Number
Possible Settings: 0 – 9, *, #, space, _ , –, (, or )
Default Setting: none
Specifies the primary phone number to call (the ISDN Called Party Identifier) for the Link
Profile. Up to 18 valid characters can be entered. Each Outbound Phone Number must be
unique. If not, the Outbound Phone Number is Not Uniquemessage appears and
you must enter another phone number.
NOTE: For every originating (outbound) phone number entered, an answering
(inbound) phone number must be entered at the far end, and vice versa.
Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed.
Inbound Calling ID 1 or 2
Possible Settings: 0 – 9
Default Setting: none
Specifies the local phone number of a remote device from which that the unit will accept
calls (the ISDN Calling Party Identifier). Up to 18 digits can be entered. Each Inbound
Calling ID must be unique. If not, the Inbound Calling ID n is Not Unique
message appears and you must enter another phone number.
For remote devices with a PRI DBM, only one Inbound Calling ID is required. Inbound
Calling ID 2 is provided to identify incoming calls from a second phone number assigned
to a remote device with a BRI DBM.
NOTES:
– Inbound Calling ID 2 is only useful when multiple local phone numbers are
programmed at the originating site (e.g., a 2B+D BRI location).
– For every originating (outbound) phone number entered, an answering (inbound)
phone number must be entered at the far end, and vice versa.
Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed.
0 – 9 – Specifies the numbers in the remote device’s local phone number.
Maximum Link Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings:
For a BRI DBM: 64, 128
For a PRI DBM: 64 – 1472
Default Setting: 64
Specifies the maximum rate that will be attempted for the frame relay link when it is
activated. The actual rate achieved on the link depends upon the number of successful
calls placed or answered, and the negotiated rate on each call.
NOTE: This option takes effect as soon as a change is saved. If the rate is increased,
additional calls will be placed. If the rate is decreased, calls will be dropped. For extra
calls to be successful, the Maximum Link Rate must be increased at the originating
device before it is increased at the answering device.
64 – An individual frame relay link is formed and a single call is placed using a B-channel
when the link is activated.
128 . . . 1472 – A constituent link is configured for each multiple of 64 Kbps in the
specified bandwidth. This bundle of constituent links will function as a single frame relay
multilink. When the multilink aggregate link is activated, calls will be placed or answered
on as many constituent links as possible based upon available B-channels.
4-50
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-11. ISDN Link Profile Options (3 of 3)
Caller Identification Method
Possible Settings: Caller ID, Proprietary
Default Setting: Caller ID
Specifies the method used to identify callers.
NOTE: The Caller Identification Method setting must be the same at both ends of the
circuit.
Caller ID – Incoming calls will only be answered and the frame relay link on this Link
Profile will only be activated when the Caller ID received from the switch matches one of
the configured Inbound Calling IDs.
Proprietary – Incoming calls will always be answered, even when no Caller ID is provided
by the switch, provided the following conditions are met:
Link Status is set to Auto (the default).
At least one ISDN Link Profile is enabled.
When using the Proprietary method, the unit queries the originating unit for its Local
Phone Number. If the returned phone number matches one of the configured Inbound
Calling IDs, the call is accepted. If the queried unit does not respond with its phone
number within five seconds, the unit drops the call.
Alternate Outbound Phone Number
Possible Settings: 0 – 9, *, #, space, _ , –, (, or )
Default Setting: none
Specifies an alternate phone number to call (the ISDN Called Party Identifier) when a call
using the primary Outbound Phone Number was unsuccessful. Up to 18 valid characters
can be entered. Each Outbound Phone Number must be unique. If not, the Alt
Outbound Phone Number is Not Uniquemessage appears and you must enter
another phone number.
NOTE: For every originating (alternate outbound) phone number entered, an
answering (inbound) phone number must be entered at the far end, and vice versa.
Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed.
Assigning Time Slots/Cross Connections
The Time Slot Assignment/Cross Connect feature provides an easy method of
assigning time slots for frame relay data and creating cross-connections to the
synchronous data interface. The system allows you to assign DS0s on the T1
network interface and between the user data port and network interface in order to
share the T1 network.
You can also clear cross-connection assignments for the system, or for a selected
slot or interface.
NOTE:
Although it is not required, it is suggested that you progress through each
screen in order, from top to bottom.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface
Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic, configure the
Network physical and Frame Relay options (if needed), then allow Time Slot
Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay.
If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the network interface, or if Time Slot
Discovery is not currently active, you can manually assign time slots on the
network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network
Assignments screen. This screen is read-only when Time Slot Discovery is set to
Enable for the network interface.
Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example
main/config/tslot_assign/frame_relay
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT
Time Slot Discovery: Disable
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N07
N08
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
N09
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
Available Available FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Save
PgDn
PgUp
ClearAll
DSXAssign
Value
Meaning
Time Slot
Discovery
Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should be
discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI
failure. This option allows additional time slots to be added without
manually reconfiguring the device.
Ntt
This field represents time slot tt of the selected network interface.
Assigned
The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame
relay, so it is unavailable. Assigned time slots cannot be modified
from this screen.
Available
The time slot is currently unassigned.
FrameRly1
The time slot is assigned to frame relay service, link 1.
For easy movement between screens, select the DSXAssign function key to go
directly to the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen.
4-52
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Time Slot Assignment Rule:
Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a Frame Relay Link 1
assignment.
Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Time Slot Assignment →
Frame Relay Network Assignments
The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears. This screen contains
a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the network
interface.
2. Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery.
— When enabled, the unit examines all time slots not cross-connected to
other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network
for frame relay traffic. These time slots are set to FrameRly1. This is the
factory default.
— When disabled, time slot assignments must be manually configured.
3. If Time Slot Discovery is disabled, assign network time slots for use by frame
relay service, link 1, by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field.
4. Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned.
5. Save the configuration.
Assigning DSX-1 Time Slots to the Network Interface
DSX-1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation, where you specify individual
time slots. The DSX-1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX-1 time slots to the
Value
Ntt
Meaning
It represents time slot tt of the selected network interface.
Assigned
The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX-1
time slot, so it is unavailable. Assigned time slots cannot be modified
from this screen.
Available
DSX-1/tt
The time slot is currently unassigned.
Slot tt of the DSX-1 interface is assigned to the network interface
time slot identified right above it (Ntt).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
DSX-1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example (Page 1)
main/config/tslot_assign/dsx
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
5/26/1999 23:32
DSX-1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS
Page 1 of 2
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N07
N08
DSX-1/01 DSX-1/02 DSX-1/03 DSX-1/04 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned
N09
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
DSX-1/09 DSX-1/01 Available Available Available Available Available Available
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll
MainMenu
FrAssign
Exit
Page 2 of 2 is for defining signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each
For easy movement between screens, select the FrAssign function key to go
directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen.
Time Slot Assignment Rules:
Valid Network time slots are either Available or contain a DSX-1 time slot
assignment.
Valid DSX-1 time slots are those that are unassigned, including the currently
assigned time slot.
Order of display is as follows:
— Available is the first selection.
— Then, from the lowest DSX-1 interface to the highest DSX-1 interface.
— Then the lowest available time slot number to the highest available time
slot number.
For example, if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned
time slot Ntt, pressing the Spacebar causes this field’s values to cycle through
all valid DSX-1 time slots, starting with Ds-p/yy, assuming it is unassigned. If
Ds-p/tt is already assigned, the next valid time slot in the order described
above is displayed.
4-54
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration→ Time Slot Assignment→ DSX-to-Network Assignments
The DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen appears. This screen contains a
matrix of the current cross-connect status of all time slots on the network
interface.
2. Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited (underlined). Use the
spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment.
3. Repeat Step 2 until all desired time slots are assigned.
4. Save the configuration.
DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning (Page 2)
The second page of the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen allows you to
define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the
DSX-1 interface. You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being
passed within a given DS0, and the value of the signaling bits that will be
transmitted for that DS0 to the other cross-connected T1 network interface if a
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) occurs on a T1 network interface.
DSX-1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example (Page 2)
main/config/tslot_assign/dsx
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
DSX-1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS
SIGNALING AND TRUNK CONDITIONING
Page 2 of 2
Network 1 Side
DSX-1 Side
Network 1 Side
DSX-1 Side
Net1/01 E&M-busy - DSX-1/01 E&M-busy
Net1/03 E&M-busy - DSX-1/03 E&M-busy
Net1/02 E&M-busy
Net1/04 E&M-busy
Net1/10 None
- DSX-1/01 E&M-busy
- DSX-1/04 E&M-busy
- DSX-1/10 None
Net1/09 None
- DSX-1/09 None
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll VocAssign FrAssign
For easy movement between screens, select the FrAssign function key to go
directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen or the DSXAssign
function key to go to the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Only those DSX-1-to-Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this
page, from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order, by network and time
slot.
When a CGA condition (LOS, OOF, or AIS) is declared for a T1 interface, the
signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DS0 are forced to
idle for two seconds (except for user-defined patterns which are transmitted
immediately). This drops any call in progress. The signaling bits are then forced to
the selected state (Busy or Idle), and remain in this state until the CGA condition
clears. At this point, the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which
formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface.
NOTE:
Trunk conditioning will only occur on DS0s that are cross-connected to
another T1 interface. All other DS0s remain unaffected by trunk conditioning.
Values, in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX-1 side.
Although you can choose any value for the DSX-1 side, the default value displayed
is based on a typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network
side value. Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below. If you change the
Network side value, the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default
value.
Table 4-12. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (1 of 3)
Network Side Meanings
DSX-1 Side
None
No signaling used on this DS0. Use this setting if
None
there is no voice signaling information being passed
on this DS0 (clear channel).
RBS (default)
Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DS0, but no
trunk conditioning. Signaling bits will be passed to the
T1 interface to which this DS0 is cross-connected
when this T1 interface is not in CGA, but the signaling
bits will be all ones when CGA is present.
RBS
The following values configure the cross-connect for RBS, as well as perform the
trunk conditioning. Although ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described,
only AB bits are transmitted when the cross-connected T1 network interface is
using D4 framing.
4-56
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-12. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (2 of 3)
Network Side Meanings
DSX-1 Side
E&M-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected E&M idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an E&M interface (ABCD = 0000).
E&M-busy
FXOg-idle
FXOg-busy
FXOl-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected E&M busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an E&M interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSg-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXO Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSg-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXO Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSl-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXO Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
FXOl-busy
FXSg-idle
FXSg-busy
FXSl-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSl-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXO Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOg-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXS Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOg-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXS Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOl-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXS Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
FXSl-busy
FXOD-idle
FXOD-busy
FXSD-idle
FXSD-busy
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOl-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXS Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSD-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXODN interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSD-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXODN interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOD-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
an FXSDN interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOD-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an FXSDN interface (ABCD = 1111).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-12. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (3 of 3)
Network Side Meanings
DSX-1 Side
PLAR3idle
PLAR3busy
PLAR4idle
PLAR4busy
DPO-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR3idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
a PLAR D3 interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR3busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an PLAR D3 interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR4idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
a PLAR D4 interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR4busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for an PLAR D4 interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPT-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
a DPO interface (ABCD = 0000).
DPO-busy
DPT-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPT-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for a DPO interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPO-idle
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for
a DPT interface (ABCD = 0000).
DPT-busy
USER-xxxx
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPO-busy
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state
for a DPT interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected USER-xxxx*
T1 interface during a CGA represent a user-defined
pattern of ABCD = xxxx.
* xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX-1 sides.
4-58
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX-1 Time Slots
For a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II, which has two data ports, another assignment
screen is available. Use the Sync Data Port Assignment screen to view the status
of:
All DS0 assignments on the Network interface
All DS0 assignments on the DSX-1 interface
Then, you can a assign synchronous data port to:
Network interface time slots
DSX-1 interface time slots
Synchronous Data Port Assignment Screen Example
main/config/tslot_assign/sync_data/net
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
SYNC DATA PORT ASSIGNMENT
Assign To: Net1
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N07
N08
Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port-2
Port-1
Assigned
N09
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port-2
Port-1
Available
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Save
ClearAll
DSXAssign
FrAssign
Value
Meaning
Assign To
Specifies either Net1 (network) or DSX1-1 (DSX-1) time slots.
Ntt
Dtt
This field represents time slot tt of the network interface.
This field represents time slot tt of the DSX-1 interface.
Assigned
The time slot is already assigned to a network or DSX-1 time slot.
Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen.
Available
Port-2
The time slot is currently unassigned.
For a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II, synchronous data Port-2 is assigned
to the time slot.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
For easy movement between screens, select the FrAssign function key to go
directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen or the DSXAssign
function key to go to the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen.
Time Slot Assignment Rules:
To assign a synchronous data port to network or DSX-1 time slots, Port-2’s
If the DSX-1 interface is disabled, only Net1 is available for synchronous data
Procedure
1. Select one of the following menu selection sequences:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Time Slot Assignment →
Sync Data Port Assignments or
Main Menu→ Easy Install→ Time Slot Assignment Screen
2. Select an interface in the Assign To field. A matrix of the current cross-connect
status of all time slots on the selected interface appears.
3. Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited (underlined). Use the
spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment.
4. Repeat Step 3 until the synchronous data port is assigned to all desired time
slots.
5. Save the configuration.
Clearing Assignments
Clearing assignments sets all time slots to Unassgn (unassigned).
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Time Slot Assignment→ Clear Assignments
4-60
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface
Select Frame Relay from the interface’s menu to display or change the Frame
Options).
Main Menu→ Configuration→ [Network/Data Ports] → Frame Relay
information.
Table 4-13. Interface Frame Relay Options (1 of 3)
LMI Protocol
Possible Settings: Initialize_From_Net1FR1,
Initialize_From_Interface,
Auto_On_LMI_Fail,
Standard,
Annex-A,
Annex-D
Default Setting:
For a user data port link: Initialize_From_Interface
For a network link: Auto_On_LMI_Fail
Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery
source for the LMI protocol.
Initialize_From_Net1FR1 – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be
configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame
relay link (Net1FR1). LMI Protocol is set to None internally, but once a protocol has
become active or is set on the primary Network link, the protocol will be set to the same
value on this link (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D). The protocol will not be updated based
on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially.
Display Conditions – This option value only appears for a user data port.
Initialize_From_Interface – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be
configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE
device. Once a protocol has become active, the protocol will be set to the protocol
discovered (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D) on the frame relay link. The protocol will not
be updated after being initially discovered. Frame relay links on user data ports discover
the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls. Frame relay links on the
network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and
“listening” for correct poll response messages.
Auto_On_LMI_Fail – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to
match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device
whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs. This option is available for frame relay links on
the Port and network interfaces. Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI
protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices. Frame relay links on the network
interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and
“listening” for correct poll response messages.
Standard – Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard
LMI.
Annex-A – Supports LMI as specified by Q.933, Annex A.
Annex-D – Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1.617, Annex D.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-13. Interface Frame Relay Options (2 of 3)
Traffic Policing
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether or not CIR (Committed Information Rate) and EIR (Excess
Information Rate) will be enforced by the unit on frames being sent on network frame relay
links.
Enable – CIR and EIR are enforced.
Frames that exceed CIR will be marked Discard Eligible (DE). These frames are
counted in the Above CIR but within EIRcategory until this category is full.
Once full, additional frames are counted as being in the Within CIRcategory.
Frames in excess of EIR will be discarded.
For CSU/DSUs only, DE frames received from the external router are credited as
frames transmitted above CIR. They are credited as frames transmitted between
CIR and EIR until that count reaches its limit, at which point they are counted as
frames transmitted above EIR.
Disable – CIR and EIR are not enforced.
LMI Parameters
Possible Settings: System, Custom
Default Setting: System
Allows you to use the system LMI options, or to set specific LMI options for this interface.
Options).
Custom – Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters.
Frame Relay DS0s Base Rate
Possible Settings: Nx64, Nx56
Default Setting: Nx64
Selects the base rate for the DS0s allocated to frame relay on the network interface.
Display Conditions – This option only appears on the network interface of the
FrameSaver SLV 9128, not the 9128-II.
Nx64 – The base rate is 64 Kbps.
Nx56 – The base rate is 56 Kbps.
LMI Error Event (N2)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 3
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can occur
on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network sides of a
UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.
4-62
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-13. Interface Frame Relay Options (3 of 3)
LMI Clearing Event (N3)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 1
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free messages
that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user and network
sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255
Default Setting: 6
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry polling
cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated. Applies
to the user side of a UNI only.
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before
a full status enquiry is initiated.
LMI Heartbeat (T1)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 10
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between the
initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user side
of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry
messages in increments of 5.
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 15
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between the
receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the network
side of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages
in increments of 5.
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 20
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Manually Configuring DLCI Records
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their
Main Menu → Configuration → [Network/Data Port/ISDN/Virtual Router Ports]
→ DLCI Records
Available paths to DLCI Records Options depend on the FrameSaver model:
Data Port is available only on CSU/DSUs
ISDN is available only when the FrameSaver unit has an ISDN DBM installed
Virtual Router Ports is available only on the FrameSaver SLV Router
Typically, DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management
PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit; the unit automatically configures
non-management DLCI Records and PVC Connections.
Table 4-14. DLCI Record Options (1 of 4)
DLCI Number
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record. The parameter determines which
DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface. DLCI
numbers range from 0to1023. However, the numbers 0 – 15 and 1008 – 1023 are
reserved. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range
(16–1007). If the DLCI number is part of a connection, this field is read-only.
NOTES:
– If a DLCI number is not entered, the DLCI record is not created.
– The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface.
– Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort
any active frame relay tests.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).
4-64
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-14. DLCI Record Options (2 of 4)
DLCI Type
Possible Settings: Standard, Multiplexed, IP Enabled
Default Setting:
For user data port DLCIs: Standard
For network interface DLCIs: Multiplexed
Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed. This field is read-only when the
selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is
Standard.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for a user data port or a virtual router
port, and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management
Link.
Standard – Supports standard DLCIs as specified by the Frame Relay Standards. Use
this setting when a non-FrameSaver unit is at the other end.
Multiplexed – Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI. Allows a
single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCIs as long as these
connections are between the same two endpoints (proprietary). Do not select Multiplexed
unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection.
IP Enabled – Enables connection to one or more endpoints through a Layer 3 network. A
Payload Management PVC is created as well as the IP Enabled DLCI.
CIR (bps)
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000
Default Setting: 0
Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry
without discarding frames; the CIR in bits per second. Entry of an invalid rate causes the
error message Value Out of Range (0 –x), where x = the maximum line rate
available on the port.
0 – 1536000 – Specifies the network-committed data rate.
Tc
Possible Settings: 1 – 65535
Default Setting: Read Only
Displays the DLCI’s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval (Tc) in
milliseconds. This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst
Size Bc (Bits) and CIR (bps) options.
Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits)
Possible Settings: CIR, Other
Default Setting: CIR
Specifies whether the DLCI’s committed burst size will follow the CIR, or whether it will be
entered independently. This value is the maximum amount of data that the service
provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval (Tc).
CIR – Uses the value in the CIR (bps) option as the committed burst size (Bc). The Bc and
excess burst size (Be) options are updated when a CIR update is received from the
network switch.
Other – Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI. When Other is
selected, the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained, as well.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-14. DLCI Record Options (3 of 4)
Bc
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000
Default Setting: 0
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s committed burst size.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to
Other.
0 – 1536000 – Specifies the DLCI’s committed burst size.
Excess Burst Size (Bits)
Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the
CIR without discarding frames.
Be
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000
Default Setting: 1536000
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s excess burst size.
0 – 1536000 – Specifies the DLCI’s excess burst size.
DLCI Priority
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High
Default Setting: High
Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device (also
known as quality of service). All data on Port 1 is cut-through, as long as there is no
higher-priority data queued from another user port. The DLCI priority set for an interface
applies to data coming into that interface. For example, the priority set for DLCIs on Port 1
applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment (such as a router).
NOTE: For units with multiple user data ports, since pipelining occurs on Port-1, it is
recommended that higher priority data be connected to Port-1 .
Display Conditions – This option is not available for the network interface or, if the
model has ISDN backup capability, an ISDN DBM interface.
Low – Data configured for the DLCI has low priority.
Medium – Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.
High – Data configured for the DLCI has high priority.
Outbound Management Priority
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High
Default Setting: Medium
Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this
DLCI to the network.
Display Conditions – This option is not available on a user data port or a virtual router
port.
Low – Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority.
Medium – Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.
High – Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority.
4-66
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-14. DLCI Record Options (4 of 4)
Backup Group
Possible Settings: A, B, C, . . . Z, None
Default Setting: None
Assigns DLCIs to a backup group so backup does not take place unless all DLCIs in the
group are no longer operational or latency has been exceeded. Backup is terminated
when one DLCI in the group is operational again. This feature reduces backup charges
when redundant PVCs have been configured.
Display Conditions – This option is not available on a user data port, a virtual router
port, or an ISDN DBM interface.
A – Z – Specifies the designation for this group of DLCIs. Only DLCIs in a PVC will be
considered part of a Backup Group.
None – No Backup Groups have been set up.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring PVC Connections
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and
their DLCI Records. PVC Connections can also be created manually (see
Main Menu→ Configuration→ PVC Connections
From this screen, you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting
the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens.
Quick removal of unused DLCIs (and ISDN Link Profiles, except for HQ_Site, if the
model has an ISDN DBM installed) included in an existing PVC Connection is also
available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the
Remove otherwise unused components associated with the
deleted PVC?prompt.
Table 4-15. PVC Connection Options (1 of 4)
Source Link
Possible Settings: Port-n, ISDN Link Name, Net1-FR1, Rtr-S0
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection; the from end of a from-to
link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that
have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or
management link. For example, if Port-1 has no DLCIs defined, Port-1 would not appear
as a valid setting.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection.
ISDN Link Name – For units with ISDN backup capability, specifies the ISDN link of the
DBM as the source link. This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame
relay link.
Port-n – For CSU/DSUs, specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used
in the connection.
Rtr-S0 – For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router, specifies that the frame relay link on the
virtual router port be used in the connection.
Clear All – Clears all Link and DLCI settings, and suppresses EDLCIs.
Source DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be defined and
cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at least
one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.
NOTE: Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.
4-68
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-15. PVC Connection Options (2 of 4)
Source EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a frame relay
interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a
multiplexed DLCI record number.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.
Primary Destination Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, ISDN Link Name, Rtr-S0
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link; the to end of a
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces
that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or
management link. For example, if the network interface has no DLCIs defined, Net1-FR1
would not appear as a valid setting.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface as the destination link.
ISDN Link Name – For units with ISDN backup capability, specifies the ISDN link of the
DBM as the destination of the connection. This can be any nonnull link name configured
on an ISDN frame relay link.
Rtr-S0 – For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router, specifies the virtual router port as the
destination link.
Primary Destination DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be
defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.
NOTES:
– Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no
value.
– When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup
the group of DLCIs appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the
Management PVCs Options screen.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-15. PVC Connection Options (3 of 4)
Primary Destination EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a
frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a
connection.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI
contains a multiplexed DLCI record number. For a DLCI that is:
– IP Enabled, IP appears in this field
– Payload Managed (but not IP Enabled), PM appears in this field
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.
Alternate Destination Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, ISDN Link Name
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link; the to end of a
from-to link that is used for backup when the primary destination link or DLCI is out of
service. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that
have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or
management link. For example, if ISDN Link Name has no DLCIs defined, the ISDN link
name would not appear as a valid setting.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface as the destination link.
ISDN Link Name – Specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the
connection. This can be any non-null link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on
an installed DBM.
Clear Alternate – Clears the Alternate Destination Link and Alternate Destination DLCI
settings, and suppresses Alternate Destination EDLCI.
Alternate Destination DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the alternate destination Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) for a frame relay
interface used for backup. The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC
connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be
unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when the Alternate Destination Link
contains no value.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.
4-70
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-15. PVC Connection Options (4 of 4)
Alternate Destination EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for
a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a
backup connection.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Alternate Destination DLCI
contains a multiplexed DLCI record number.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the IP Path List
Select IP Path List (Static) from the Configuration Edit/Display menu to display or
change the list of static path IP addresses explicitly defined in the unit.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ IP Path List (Static)
The IP Path List (Static) screen appears, showing any existing static paths. Paths
discovered as SLV packets are received from other FrameSaver units are not
shown. To view the entire current IP Path List, use the IP Path Connection Status
Procedure
To add a static path:
1. Select New. The following prompt appears:
Enter IP Address (press ESC to abort): ___.___.___.___ FWD: No
2. Enter the IP address of a static path and select a forwarding option of No or
Yes using the spacebar.
3. Press enter. Select Save.
Table 4-16. IP Path List
IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.001 – 126.255.255.255, 128.000.000.000 –
223.255.255.255
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the address of a FrameSaver or other device at the other end of a path.
000.000.000.001 – 126.255.255.255, 128.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Specifies the
address of a device.
FWD
Possible Settings: No, Yes
Default Setting: No
Determines whether this path list item is sent to all other addresses in the list that
represent FrameSaver devices.
No – The IP address associated with this path list item is not distributed.
Yes – The IP address associated with this path list entry is distributed to devices in the list.
4-72
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Node IP Information
Select Node IP to display, add, or change the information necessary to support
deploying units to remote sites, minimally configure the Node IP Address and
Subnet Mask.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→ Node IP
This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting (TS) Management
Access Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their
networks. This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link.
Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations. No
alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer.
TS_Access_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models, but the link can
be enabled at any time. Any valid network Management PVC created on a
standard DLCI can be used. When enabled, a troubleshooting link can be
accessed any time the service provider requests access. An assigned security
level can also control access.
When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link, the link
is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen
with the Note: This PVC has been designated as the TS Access
Management Linkmessage.
NOTE:
The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set
up (e.g., 980).
Table 4-17. Node IP Options (1 of 3)
Node IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound to
a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.
Node Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since the subnet mask is not
bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is all zeros,
the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address:
Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
4-74
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-17. Node IP Options (2 of 3)
Default IP Destination
Possible Settings: None, Modem, COM, Ethernet, PVCname
Default Setting: None
Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route.
Examples:
If the default IP network is connected to the communications port, select COM.
If the default IP network is connected to a far-end device over the management PVC
named London for the remote device located in the London office, select the PVC
NOTE: If the link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled
or down, the unrouteable data will be discarded. Make sure that the link selected is
operational, and if that link goes down, change the default destination.
CAUTION: Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet
route configured at a remote end where the NMS, router, LAN adapter, terminal server,
etc. is connected. Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will
cause temporary routing loops, which will last 16 iterations times the retry count.
None – No default network destination is specified. Unrouteable data will be discarded.
This is the recommended setting.
Modem – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the modem port. Only
appears when the modem port Use option is set to Net Link.
COM – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port. Only appears
Ethernet – For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II or 9128-II, specifies that the default
destination is connected to the Ethernet port. Only appears when the Ethernet port’s
Interface Status option is enabled. When selected, the Default Gateway Address must
PVCname – Specifies a name for the management PVC. Only appears when a
management PVC name is defined for the node. For example, when the network is
connected to a remote device located in the London office, London can be specified as
the PVC name, which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in
London. London would appear as one of the available selections.
TS Access Management Link
Available Settings: None, PVCname
Default Setting: None
Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service
providers.
If the setting is changed from the management PVC name to None, the Delete the
Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record?prompt appears.
If you select:
No – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None.
Yes – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None, and the link
and its DLCI will be deleted.
None – Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link.
PVCname – Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC.
Display Conditions – This selection only appears when a dedicated management PVC
has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to
Standard.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-17. Node IP Options (3 of 3)
TS Management Link Access Level
Available Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP
session when the service provider is using the TS Access Management Link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when:
Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay.
TS Access Management Link is set to a PVC name.
NOTES:
– Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the
Session Access Level, Login Required, or FTP Login Required option settings (see
– Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session, Inactivity
Timeout, Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings.
Level-1 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to
view unit information, change configuration options, and run tests. This is the highest
access level allowed. Use this setting when downloading files.
Level-2 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to
view unit information and run tests only; they cannot change configuration options.
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view
unit information only; they cannot change configuration options or run tests.
TS Management SNMP Validation
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed for this
management link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when:
Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay.
TS Access Management Link is set to a PVC name.
Enable – Validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed on SNMP traffic.
Disable – No validation of community strings and IP addresses is performed.
4-76
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Management PVCs
Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or
DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management
additional information.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Management PVCs
Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs.
When you select New, the configuration option field is blank.
When you select Modify, the values displayed for all fields are based on the
PVC ID number that you specified.
These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a
additional information).
From this screen, you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting
the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens.
Select the Delete function key, a Management PVC ID#, and respond Yes to the
Remove otherwise unused components associated with the
deleted PVC?prompt for quick removal of unused DLCIs. If the Management
PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination, a Default IP
Destination, or a TS Access Management Link, an ... Are You Sure?prompt is
displayed to warn you.
A payload management circuit is identified by PMin the EDLCI field of the
Management PVCs Options screen. If a payload management management
circuit is deleted, the associated PVC remains standard, even if was a multiplexed
PVC (automatically converted to standard) when it the management circuit was
created.
If an existing PVC with an associated payload managed management circuit is
deleted, then the payload management circuit is also deleted.
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (1 of 6)
Name
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens (e.g., Tampa
for Tampa, Florida).
ASCII Text Entry – Enter a unique name for the management PVC (maximum length
8 characters).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (2 of 6)
Payload Managed
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the PVC is payload managed.
Display Conditions – This is a read-only field set to Enabled if the PVC is IP Enabled.
Enable – The network PVC created will be monitored for the presence of IP frames
containing the IP address specified in the Intf IP Address field. When such a frame is
identified, it is extracted from the data stream and sent to the management stack.
Disable – A normal management PVC is created using the specified DLCI or EDLCI.
Intf IP Address
Possible Settings: Node-IP-Address, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
Default Setting: Node-IP-Address
Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC, providing
connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network.
Node-IP-Address – Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address (see
Special (001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255) – Allows you to display/edit an IP address
for the unit’s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the
node’s IP address.
Intf Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: Node-Subnet-Mask, Calculate, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
Default Setting: Node-Subnet-Mask
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is
providing connectivity to an external IP network (through frame relay) that requires a
specific subnet mask for the interface.
Node-Subnet-Mask – Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node-Subnet Mask
Calculate – Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class
of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or
Class C: 255.255.255.000). Cannot be displayed or edited.
Special (000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255) – Allows you to edit/display the subnet
mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface. A text
field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit’s management PVC.
Set DE
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether frames (packets) sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible
(DE) bit set. This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during
periods of network congestion. This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower
priority than customer data.
Enable – Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC.
Disable – Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC. This is the
recommended setting, particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service.
4-78
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (3 of 6)
Primary Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, Port-n, Rtr-S0, ISDN Link Name, Clear
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC. The interface
selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI with EDLCI) defined, which is not part of a
PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC.
Display Conditions – The Port-1 setting does not appear if the PVC is IP Enabled or
Payload Managed is enabled.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the network interface as the source link for the connection.
Port-n – Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the destination link for the
connection.
Rtr-S0 – For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router, specifies that the vertual router port be
used in the connection.
ISDN Link Name – For units with ISDN backup capability, specifies the ISDN link on the
DBM to be used in the connection. This can be any nonnull link name configured on an
ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM.
Clear – Clears the link and the DLCI field, and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was
multiplexed.
Primary DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface
is selected.
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part of
a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed DLCIs, at
least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.
NOTES:
– DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.
– Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI.
– When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup
the group of DLCIs appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the
Management PVCs Options screen.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (4 of 6)
Primary EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is
selected. EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCIs that are unique
to those DLCIs.
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI. Use 0
to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the primary
EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management data, with
slightly less line overhead.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a
multiplexed DLCI, if the PVC is IP Enabled, or if Payload Managed is enabled.
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).
Primary Link RIP
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out
Default Setting:
For multiplexed DLCIs: Proprietary
For nonmultiplexed DLCIs: Standard_out
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if the PVC is IP Enabled or Payload
Managed is enabled.
None – Does not use a routing protocol.
Proprietary – Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing
information between FrameSaver units. A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of
the link. This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCIs
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing
information only about FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices in the network. This is the
factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCIs.
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the
FrameSaver unit for the management interface (e.g., Cisco: config-t, router
4-80
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (5 of 6)
Alternate Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, Port-n, ISDN Link Name, Clear
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC as the alternate link.
The interface selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI with EDLCI) defined, which
is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available, and
does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface as the frame relay link.
Port-n – Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the alternate destination
link for the connection.
ISDN Link Name – For units with ISDN backup capability, specifies the ISDN link of the
DBM to be used in the connection. This can be any nonnull link name configured on an
ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM.
Clear – Clears the link and the DLCI field, and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was
multiplexed.
Alternate DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the alternate DLCI number to be used for the management PVC after the frame
relay interface is selected.
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part of
a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed DLCIs, at
least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled. The
DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.
NOTE: Clearing Link also clears the DLCI.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).
Alternate EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the alternate EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed
DLCI is selected for the frame relay link. EDLCIs identify individual connections within
multiplexed DLCIs that are unique to those DLCIs.
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI. Use 0
to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the primary
EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management data, with
slightly less line overhead.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available and
the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI. This option does not appear if
Payload Managed is enabled.
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses the EDLCI
field.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Management PVC Options (6 of 6)
Encapsulation
Possible Settings: Routed
Default Setting: Routed
This read-only field specifies that the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490/RFC 2427
routed Network Level Protocol IDentifier (NLPID) encapsulation, and not SubNetwork
Access Protocol (SNAP) encapsulation.
Display Conditions – This option appears only if the PVC is IP Enabled or Payload
Managed is enabled.
Routed – IP encapsulation is routed NLPID.
4-82
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring General SNMP Management
Select General SNMP Management to add, change, or delete the information
needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→ General
SNMP Management
You must have Level-1 access to display or configure these options.
Table 4-19. General SNMP Management Options (1 of 2)
SNMP Management
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an
SNMP-compatible NMS.
Enable – Can be managed as an SNMP agent.
Disable – Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent. The FrameSaver unit will not respond
to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps.
Community Name 1
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Public in ASCII text field
Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver
unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager
whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 1 (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Clears Community Name 1.
Name 1 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read/Write
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).
Community Name 2
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 2 (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Clears Community Name 2.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-19. General SNMP Management Options (2 of 2)
Name 2 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support
Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP (File Transport Protocol)
session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security
applicable to the session. Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time (see
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Telnet and FTP Session
When a TS Access Management Link has been set up and activated, the following
options have no effect upon the PVC:
Telnet Login Required
Session Access Level
FTP Login Required
4-84
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-20. Telnet and FTP Session Options (1 of 2)
Telnet Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet
client on an interconnected IP network.
Enable – Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client.
Disable – Does not allow Telnet sessions.
Telnet Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) are required to access
the menu-driven user interface via a Telnet session. If required, the login used is the same
login used for an menu-driven user interface session. This option does not affect the TS
Access Management Link.
Enable – Requires a login to access a Telnet session.
Disable – Does not require a login.
Session Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu-driven user
interface via a Telnet session. If a login is required for the session, the effective access
level is also determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the
effective access level is determined by this option. This option does not affect the TS
Access Management Link.
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the
session or the user. For example, if the assigned Session Access Level is Level-2, but
the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access is allowed for the session.
Level-1 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information, change configuration options, and run tests.
This is the highest access level allowed.
CAUTION: Before changing the session access level to Level-2 or 3, make sure that
the COM port’s Port Access Level is set to Level-1 and that at least one Login ID is set
to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this occurs, you must reset the unit to the
factory defaults and begin the configuration process again. A reset is required if the
Level-2 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information and run tests only; they cannot change
configuration options.
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information only; they cannot change configuration options
or run tests.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-20. Telnet and FTP Session Options (2 of 2)
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard
inactivity.
Enable – Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires.
Disable – Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 10
Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled.
1 – 60 – Up to an hour can be set.
FTP Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP (file transfer protocol)
client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session. This option must be
enabled when downloading files.
Enable – Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client.
Disable – Does not allow FTP sessions.
FTP Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session. If required,
the login used is the same login used for a menu-driven user interface session. This
option does not affect the TS Access Management Link.
Enable – User is prompted for a login ID and password.
Disable – No login is required for an FTP session.
FTP Max Transfer Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 1 – 1536
Default Setting: 1536
Sets the maximum receive (or send) rate of file transfer to the system via management
PVCs. This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using
selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation. Using this option, new
software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings, or at
a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed. Based upon
TCP flow control, the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting.
1 – 1536 – Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum
management speed.
4-86
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring SNMP NMS Security
Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to
display, add, or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→ SNMP
NMS Security
A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by
IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP.
Table 4-21. SNMP NMS Security Options (1 of 2)
NMS IP Validation
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to access the node. Only allows access when the
sending manager’s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen.
Enable – Performs security checks.
Disable – Does not perform security checks.
Number of Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP
messages to the FrameSaver unit. An IP address must be configured for each
management system allowed to send messages. Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP
Address configuration option.
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers.
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP
messages to the unit. If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its
IP address cannot be matched here, access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is
generated. If a match is found, the type of access (read-only or read/write) is determined
by the corresponding Access Type.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the NMS IP address.
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-21. SNMP NMS Security Options (2 of 2)
Access Type
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is
performed.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command) to the MIB objects. This includes
all objects specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set commands) to the MIB
objects. However, access for all read-only objects is specified as read-only.
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out
Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→ SNMP
Traps
format standards and special trap features, including RMON-specific traps, and
the default settings that will generate RMON-specific SNMP traps.
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (1 of 6)
SNMP Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently
configured SNMP trap manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages.
Disable – Does not send trap messages.
Number of Trap Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 6
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap
messages from the FrameSaver unit. An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS
n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages.
1 – 6 – Specifies the number of trap managers (inclusive).
4-88
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (2 of 6)
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) to receive SNMP traps.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap
manager.
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.
Initial Route Destination
Possible Settings: AutoRoute, Modem, COM, Ethernet, PVCname
Default Setting: AutoRoute
Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager. When proprietary RIP
is active, only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as
the initial destination. All other units can use the default setting.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
AutoRoute – Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for
sending traps to the specified Trap Manager, or the Default IP Destination when no route
Modem – Uses the Modem port. This selection only appears if the Modem Port Use
COM – Uses the COM port. This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net
Ethernet – For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II or 9128-II, uses the Ethernet port. Only
PVCname – Uses the defined management linkname (the name given the Management
PVC). This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the
node.
General Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Warm, AuthFail, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and/or authenticationFailure
events are sent to the currently configured trap manager(s). An authenticationFailure trap
indicates that the unit is the addressee of an SNMP protocol message, or an incoming
ISDN call is not properly authenticated.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for these events.
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events only.
AuthFail – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only.
Both – Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (3 of 6)
Enterprise Specific Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently
configured trap manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
Link Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Up, Down, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured
trap manager(s). A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the
interfaces. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is
active.
Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interfaces configuration options to
specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages.
Disable – Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages.
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events only.
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events only.
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events.
Link Traps Interfaces
Possible Settings: Network, DSX-1, T1s, Ports, DBM, All
Default Setting: All
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific trap
messages. These traps are not supported on the COM port or Modem port.
Network – Generates these trap messages on the network interface only.
DSX-1 – For applicable T1 FrameSaver units, generates these trap messages on the
DSX-1 interface only.
T1s – For applicable T1 FrameSaver units, generates these trap messages for linkUp,
linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and DSX-1 interfaces.
Ports – Generates these trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific
events on a user data port only.
DBM – For units with an ISDN DBM installed, generates these trap messages for linkUp,
linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific events on the DBM only.
All – Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all
interfaces, except for the COM port or modem port, that are applicable to the FrameSaver
model.
4-90
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (4 of 6)
DLCI Traps on Interfaces – Interface Selection Field
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, DBM, All, None
Default Setting: All
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual
DLCIs. These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces.
Network – Generates these trap messages on DLCIs for the network interface only.
Ports – Generates these trap messages for DLCIs on a user data port only.
DBM – For units with an ISDN DBM installed, generates trap messages on DLCIs for the
DBM only.
All – Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces.
None – No DLCI trap messages are generated.
DLCI Traps on Interfaces – Filter Selection Field
Possible Settings: Normal, Filter
Default Setting: Normal
Controls whether the traps on the interfaces specified in the DLCI Traps on Interfaces
configuration option are sent regardless of their cause.
Normal – Generates trap messages specified by DLCI Traps on Interfaces regardless of
cause.
Filter – Prevents traps from being generated for the interfaces specified by DLCI Traps on
Interfaces if their cause is the loss of the interface connection or LMI.
RMON Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap
manager(s). RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups
of RMON1 when a selected variable’s configured threshold is exceeded.
Enable – Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.
Disable – Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.
ISDN Dial Control Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether dialCtlPeerCallSetup and dialCtlPeerCallInformation events send trap
messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager(s). Use this feature when
peer-to-peer (nearest neighbor) calling is desired.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when an ISDN DBM is installed.
Enable – Sends trap messages.
Disable – Does not send trap messages.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (5 of 6)
Trap Dial-Out
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically. If the call cannot be
completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable, the SNMP trap message is held
(queued) until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory.
NOTE: When the modem port is configured as a network communication link, up to 10
SNMP trap messages are held at the port.
Enable – Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu’s Modem
Call Directories, Directory Number A (Alarm).
Disable – Automatic calls will not be initiated. Traps sent to the modem are held until a
dial-in connection is established.
Trap Disconnect
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the internal modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has
been sent. This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a
result of sending the SNMP trap message.
Enable – Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message(s).
Disable – Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually
or by the remote modem. This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more
information after receiving an SNMP trap.
Call Retry
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether an incomplete call (busy, no answer, etc.) is retried when an SNMP trap
message is sent to the modem port.
If an Alternate Dial-Out Directory is specified, the alarm directory’s telephone number is
called first. If the call cannot be completed, then the alternate directory’s telephone
number is called (see the Control menu’s Modem Call Directories).
Enable – Attempts to retry the call, up to one time per SNMP trap message, with a delay
between the retry. The delay is specified by the Dial-Out Delay Time (Min) configuration
option.
Disable – Does not retry an incomplete call.
Dial-Out Delay TIme (Min)
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 5
Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent;
the wait between call attempts (see the Call Retry option).
1 – 10 – Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts.
4-92
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-22. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (6 of 6)
Alternate Dial-Out Directory
Possible Settings: None, 1 – 5
Default Setting: None
Specifies whether an incomplete call (busy, or no answer, etc.) resulting from an attempt
to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number. Up to
5 alternate call directories can be set up, but only one at a time can be used.
When Call Retry is enabled, the alarm directory’s telephone number is called first. If the
call cannot be completed after one additional try, then the specified alternate directory’s
telephone number is called.
None – Does not dial-out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers.
1 – 5 – Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot
be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory (Directory Number A in
the Control menu’s Modem Call Directories), inclusive.
Latency Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a Latency Threshold Alarm causes the generation of a Latency
Threshold Exceeded Trap.
Enable – Sends trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events.
IP SLV Availability Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a Path Unavailability condition causes the generation of an IP SLV
Availability Trap.
Enable – Sends trap messages for Path Unavailability events.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for Path Unavailability events.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring Ethernet Management
For the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II or 9128-II, select Ethernet Management from the
Management and Communication menu, or Ethernet Management Options
Screen from the Easy Install screen, to configure the Ethernet port (see
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Ethernet Management
Main Menu→ Easy Install→ Ethernet Management Options Screen
Table 4-23. Ethernet Management Options (1 of 2)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the Ethernet port is being used and can be configured.
Enable – The port is active. It can receive Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 MAC frames and
transmit Version 2 MAC frames only. When the Ethernet port is enabled, the Would you
like to set the Node's IP Destination to Ethernet?prompt is displayed.
automatically changed to Ethernet, so the Ethernet port’s Default Gateway Address
is used for packets that do not have a route. This is required when the NMS is on a
different subnet than the unit.
If you select No, the COM port or a PVC will be used for packets without a route.
Disable – The port is not active. When the port is disabled, the following will occur:
No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
All port uses that refer to the Ethernet port, like the Default IP Destination and Initial
IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address needed to access the Ethernet port.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the port, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the IP address with zeros.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the
Ethernet port.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Set the Ethernet port’s subnet mask. The range for
each byte is 000 to 255.
Clear – Fills the subnet mask associated with the IP address with zeros.
4-94
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-23. Ethernet Management Options (2 of 2)
Default Gateway Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address for the port’s default gateway. It is used for packets that do not
have a route.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the port, which can be
viewed or edited (i.e., a router on the LAN).
Clear – Fills the default gateway’s IP address with zeros.
Proxy ARP
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit will use the Proxy ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) technique, acting as the gateway to other FrameSaver devices in its
management network when there is an ARP request for a device not on the Ethernet.
Enable – Proxy ARP is enabled on the port so the FrameSaver unit will act as an agent for
or gateway to other units in its management network. Using this technique, the
FrameSaver unit returns its own MAC (Media Access Control) address in response to
ARP requests when it recognizes that the destination IP address is in its subnet, but the
device sending the ARP request is in another network. Packets sent to the FrameSaver
unit’s gateway address are forwarded to the appropriate device.
Disable – The Proxy ARP technique will not be used by the unit; it will not act as an agent
for other devices in its network.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the Communication Port
Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Communication Port
Table 4-24. Communication Port Options (1 of 5)
Port Use
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link, Modem PassThru
Default Setting: Terminal
Assigns a specific use to the COM port.
and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination is forced to None.
Terminal – The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.
Net Link – The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP
device port. You cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature
is enabled. When you try, the Cannot change Port Use – Modem PassThru is
enabledmessage is displayed.
Modem PassThru – Available to the FrameSaver SLV 9626 only, the COM port is
connected to the router’s auxiliary (AUX) or console port so the router can be accessed
via a dial-up connection to the unit. When this feature is active, a logical connection
between the unit’s modem and COM ports is made, and data received over the modem
port is transmitted out the COM port to the router’s AUX or console port. When an escape
sequence (minus, minus, minus, with a minimum of 50 ms between each) is detected, the
FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation.
Data Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Default Setting: 19.2
Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second.
9.6 – 115.2 Kbps – Sets the communication port speed.
Character Length
Possible Settings: 7, 8
Default Setting: 8
Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character.
NOTE: Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net
Link.
7 – Sets the character length to seven bits.
8 – Sets the character length to eight bits. Use this setting if using the COM port as the
network communication link.
4-96
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-24. Communication Port Options (2 of 5)
Parity
Possible Settings: None, Even, Odd
Default Setting: None
Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port. A parity
bit is added to the data to make the “1” bits of each character add up to either an odd or
even number. Each character of transmitted data is approved as error-free if the “1” bits
add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option.
None – Provides no parity.
Even – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even.
Odd – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd.
Stop Bits
Possible Settings: 1, 2
Default Setting: 1
Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port.
1 – Provides one stop bit.
2 – Provides two stop bits.
Ignore Control Leads
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether DTR is used.
Display Conditions – This option does not apply to the FrameSaver SLV Router.
Disable – Treats control leads as standard operation.
DTR – Ignores DTR. This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices.
Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in order
to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.
Disable – Does not requires a login.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-24. Communication Port Options (3 of 5)
Port Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the
COM port. If a login is required for the port, the effective access level is determined by the
user’s access level. When a login is not required, the effective access level is determined
by this option.
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port
or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2, but the User
Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access will be permitted for the port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, and
perform device testing.
CAUTION: Before changing the communication port’s access level to Level-2 or 3,
make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the Modem Port’s Port Access
Level is set top Level-1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access
will be lost. If this occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the
configuration process again.
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information.
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and
display status and configuration screens only.
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity (no
keyboard activity).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is
disconnected.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes (inclusive).
4-98
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-24. Communication Port Options (4 of 5)
IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port. Only in effect when
the COM port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net
Link).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the COM port, which you
can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When the
IP Address is all zeros, the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been
configured.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the COM port is
configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When
the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based
upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or
Class C: 255.255.255.000.
RIP
Possible Settings: None, Standard_out
Default Setting: None
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management data between devices.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
None – No routing is used.
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing
information about other FrameSaver units in the network. Standard RIP messages
received on this link are ignored.
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the
COM port, configured as the management interface (e.g., Cisco: config-t, router
RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1, ctl-z WR).
To create this management interface, make sure that Node or COM port IP Information
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-24. Communication Port Options (5 of 5)
Link Protocol
Possible Settings: PPP, SLIP
Default Setting: PPP
Specifies the link-layer protocol to be used. Only in effect when the COM port is
configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
PPP – Point-to-Point Protocol.
SLIP – Serial-Line Internet Protocol.
Configuring the Modem Port
Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to configure
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Modem Port
Table 4-25. Modem Port Options (1 of 4)
Port Use
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link
Default Setting: Terminal
Assigns a specific use to the modem port.
and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination is forced to None.
Terminal – The modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.
Net Link – The modem port is a network communications link to the IP network. You
cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled. When
you try, the Cannot change Port Use – Modem PassThru is enabledmessage
information about Modem PassThru operation.
Dial-In Access
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Controls whether external devices can dial-in to the system through the internal modem.
This allows dial-in access by a remote terminal when Port Use is set to Terminal. When
Port Use is set to Net Link, Dial-In Access must be set to Enable to allow an external NMS
to dial in to the device.
Enable – Dial-in access is allowed. Incoming calls are answered.
Disable – Dial-in access is not allowed. Incoming calls are not answered. You cannot
disable Dial-In Access when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled. When you try, the
Cannot change Dial-In Access when Modem PassThru is enabledmessage
information about Modem PassThru operation.
4-100
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-25. Modem Port Options (2 of 4)
Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in order
to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.
Disable – Does not require a login.
Port Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the
modem port.
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port
or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2, but the User
Access Level is Level-3, then only Level-3 access will be permitted for the modem port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, save, and
perform device testing. If Login Required is set to Enable, the effective access level is
determined by the user’s access level. Otherwise, the access level is 1.
CAUTION: Before changing the modem port’s access level to Level-2 or 3, make sure
that either Telnet Session Access Level or the communications port’s Port Access
Level is set to Level-1 and at least one Login ID are set to Level-1. Otherwise, access
will be lost. If this occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the
configuration process again.
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information. If Login Required
is set to Enable, the effective access level is 2 for User ID access levels of 1 or 2. User IDs
set to access Level-3 have only Level-3 access.
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can only display
and monitor status and configuration screens. If Login Required is set to Enable, the
effective access level is 3 for all user IDs.
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity (no
keyboard activity).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Disconnects the user session after the specified time of inactivity.
Disable – Does not disconnect the user session.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-25. Modem Port Options (3 of 4)
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 10
Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when:
Port Use is set to Terminal.
Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable.
1 – 60 – Sets the number of minutes allowed before the modem disconnects.
IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the system via the modem port. This option is
only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the modem port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros (i.e.,
000.000.000.000). When the IP Address is all zeros, the modem port uses the Node IP
Address if one has been configured.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the system. This option is only in effect when
the modem port is configured as a network communication link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the modem port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When
the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based
upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or
Class C: 255.255.255.000.
Link Protocol
Possible Settings: PPP, SLIP
Default Setting: PPP
Specifies the link-layer protocol to be used. This option is only in effect when the modem
port is configured as a network communication link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
PPP – Point-to-Point Protocol.
SLIP – Serial-Line Internet Protocol.
4-102
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-25. Modem Port Options (4 of 4)
Alternate IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port. If this configuration option is not
configured (i.e., it is zero), the modem port’s primary IP address is used when the
alternate telephone directory is used for dial-out traps.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the modem’s alternate IP address, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the alternate IP address for the modem port and fills the address with
zeros.
Alternate Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the
modem port is configured as a network communication link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the modem port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the modem port and fills the address with zeros. When
the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based
upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or
Class C: 255.255.255.000.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup
For units with an ISDN DBM, follow this menu selection sequence to specify
whether and when automatic backup is allowed, and to configure timers that will
Options).
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Auto Backup Criteria
Table 4-26. Auto Backup Criteria Options (1 of 2)
Auto Backup
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether backup for the access unit is automatically performed when the
primary physical link or LMI, or a DLCI on a PVC connection fails, or when latency is
exceeded.
When enabled, the access unit automatically enables the Alternate Link configuration
option, and establishes an alternate DLCI and EDLCI, rerouting traffic over the backup
and alternate EDLCI.)
NOTE: Auto Backup cannot be enabled unless LMI Behavior is set to Independent
Enable – Reroutes traffic over the backup (alternate) interface.
Disable – Does not reroute traffic over the backup interface.
DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay (sec)
Possible Settings: 0 – 3600
Default Setting: 0
Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait once a DLCI is declared down before it
initiates backup. A DLCI is declared down when the DLCI changes to Inactive status in an
LMI response, or when there is an LMI or physical link failure. When a delay is configured,
the unit is more tolerant of network glitches, or repeated short outages, before going into
backup, minimizing bouncing between network and backup services.
0 – 3600 – Specifies the amount of time for the delay.
DLCI Down Backup Activation Transition Threshold
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 1
Specifies how many times a primary destination DLCI transitions up or down during the
DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay period before the unit initiates backup, provided the
DLCI is active when the delay period ends.
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of transitions allowed between Active and Inactive status.
Backup Restoration Delay (sec)
Possible Settings: 0 – 3600
Default Setting: 0
Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait after all backup alarm conditions have
cleared for a primary destination DLCI before the backup connection is terminated.
0 – 3600 – Specifies the amount of time for the delay.
4-104
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
Table 4-26. Auto Backup Criteria Options (2 of 2)
When Auto Backup Allowed
Possible Settings: Always, Restrict
Default Setting: Always
Determines when backup for the access unit is allowed to occur.
Always – No restrictions on backup.
Restrict – Backup is restricted to the day and time selected in the following configuration
options. Use this selection when the importance of the data that you are backing up is
day/time dependent.
Backup Allowed: Day From nn:nn
Possible Settings: 00:00 – 23:00, None
Default Setting: 00:00
Specifies the time that Auto Backup can begin for a selected day of the week in
increments of 1 hour. Day is Monday through Sunday.
00:00 – 23:00 – Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will start for this particular day.
None – Auto Backup cannot occur on this day.
Backup Allowed: Day To nn:nn
Possible Settings: 00:00 – 24:00
Default Setting: 24:00
Specifies the time that Auto Backup must end occurring for the selected day of the week in
increments of 1 hour.
Display Conditions – This option only appears if a start time was specified.
00:00 – 24:00 – Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will stop for this particular day.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configuration Options
4-106
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
FrameSaver SLV Router Overview
The FrameSaver SLV Router supports locally attached hosts or subnets and
various customer premises distribution networks that contain IP forwarding
devices or routers. The router is shipped as an 802.1d bridge, and it can be
configured to simultaneously support IP routing and bridging of all non-IP
protocols. The router maintains two routing tables to keep customer data and
management data separate.
The router supports Internet Protocol (IP), specified in RFC 791, and Internet
Control Message Protocol (ICMP), as specified in RFCs 792 and 950 (with
exceptions). It acts as a router or gateway as defined in RFC 791.
The router has two interfaces:
Network Interface
Frame relay packets are transported over the T1 line using this interface.
Ethernet
This is a 10/100BaseT interface that automatically negotiates the rate. If all
attached Ethernet devices support 100BaseT, the router defaults to 100BaseT.
Otherwise, the router operates at 10BaseT. The interface has a unique MAC
address.
— In router mode, the router accepts on the Ethernet interface only those
frames with its own MAC address or a broadcast or multicast MAC
address.
— In bridge mode, the router accepts all frames and forwards only ones for
which the destination MAC address does not match an entry in the bridge
table. This is the default setting.
NOTES:
— The configuration examples included in this chapter cover some common
configurations, providing only a few of the possible scenarios.
— IP addresses used in the examples are for illustrative purposes only; they
are not intended to be used when configuring your local network.
— Command syntax will vary based on your network setup.
— Configuration commands require an access level of Administrator-Config,
and changes need to be saved when being configured to take effect.
For additional information, refer to:
the supported MIBs and RFCs.
commands and complete syntax.
command default settings and abbreviated command line syntax.
5-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
IP Routing
The router uses destination-based routing. IP routing tables are maintained for
both the customer data and management data domains to specify how IP
datagrams are forwarded. The router can support up to 32 entries in the data IP
routing table, and up to 300 entries for the management IP routing table. When an
IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface, an entry is automatically
created in the IP routing table.
Address Resolution Protocol
The router supports Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), as specified in RFC 826.
The router provides for 256 ARP table entries. The timeout for completed and
uncompleted ARP table entries is configurable.
The Command Line Interface provides the ability to:
Create up to 64 static ARP table entries to be retained across power cycles.
Display the ARP table.
Delete ARP table entries.
Display and delete automatically added static ARP table entries by the DHCP
server and relay functions. Refer to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Proxy ARP
The router supports Proxy ARP. Proxy ARP responses are based on the contents
of the IP routing table for management traffic. The IP routing table for management
traffic must have an entry for every host that is reachable on the Ethernet interface,
including hosts for which the router will not forward packets because of IP filters.
If an ARP request is received on one interface for an IP address that is reachable
on the other interface, the router will respond with its own MAC address. Proxy
ARP is enabled via the user interface. Refer to Configuring Ethernet Management
Proxy ARP and NAPT cannot be enabled at the same time.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Interface Configuration
The following examples require that IP addresses have been assigned to the
Ethernet and Serial interfaces, and that a passthrough PVC connection exists to
Rtr-S0. Optionally you might also disable bridging.
In the following example, the Serial 0 sub-interface is shown as x. The valid range
is 0–4,294,967,295.
Procedure
To set up the router’s interfaces:
1. If a Net1-FR1 DLCI does not exist:
— Create one using the Network Circuit Records screen, then select
CreatePVC.
— When the Create PVC using DLCI Number?prompt appears, select
a DLCI and press Enter.
— When the Create Pass-Thru PVC Connection to:?prompt
appears, enter Rtr-S0.
— Save the configuration.
2. From the Main Menu screen, press Ctrl-a then Shift-r to access the router’s
Command Line Interface. Set the IP addresses of the interfaces.
The following example commands:
— Set the Ethernet interface address to 10.1.3.1
— Set the Serial 0.x interface to 172.20.95.2
— Disable bridging for both interfaces
— Specify that messages for all IP addresses should be routed to the
upstream router at 172.20.95.1
en
config t
int e 0
ip address 10.1.3.1 255.255.255.0
no bridge-group 1
int se 0.x
ip address 172.20.95.2 255.255.255.0
no bridge group 1
exit
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.20.95.1
save
exit
5-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Network Address Translation
Network Address Translation (NAT) is used when a private network’s internal IP
addresses cannot be used outside the private network. IP addresses may be
restricted for privacy reasons, or they may not be valid public IP addresses.
The router provides NAT as described in RFC 1631, The IP Network Address
Translator (NAT). NAT allows hosts in a private (local) network to transparently
access the external (public or global) network by using a block of public addresses.
Static mapping enables access to selected local hosts from the outside using
these external IP addresses.
Traditional NAT and Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) are supported.
When both NAT and NAPT are enabled, one-to-one NAT mapping is performed by
translating a range of assigned public IP addresses to a similar-sized pool of
private addresses, followed by many-to-one NAPT bindings. Up to 254 IP
addresses can be allocated for NAT usage.
IP Options Processing
The NAT and NAPT functions handle and process the IP datagrams with options
set as described below. No command is available to set IP options.
The router does not process (and drops) any IP datagrams with the following IP
options:
Loose source and record route (type 131)
Strict source and record route (type 133)
Security (type 130)
Stream ID (type 136)
The router does process IP datagrams with the following IP options, but does not
provide its IP address or timestamp information in the response message:
Record route (type 7)
Timestamp (type 68)
Applications Supported by NAT
The router supports the following applications and protocols:
FTP
HTTP
Ping
RealPlayer
Telnet
TFTP
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
NAT Configuration Example
NAT Example
Server
10.1.1.1
Public IP
Addresses
10.1.3.1
Public
Network
FrameSaver SLV
Router
02-17297
In this NAT example:
NAT is used for one-to-one mapping of addresses.
The Ethernet interface is in the private address space and the network
interface is in public address space. With NAT enabled, a single global PVC is
used to access the public network.
When using NAT, the network interface must be numbered because the
Ethernet interface is configured within the private address space.
The next hop router (default gateway) for the clients is the Ethernet IP address
of the router, 10.1.3.1.
There are four private IP addresses configured on the Ethernet side of the
router with NAT static mappings to four public IP addresses.
NAT Mapping Public IP Addresses
192.128.22.28
Private IP Addresses
10.1.3.2
192.128.22.29
10.1.3.3
192.128.22.30
10.1.3.4
192.128.22.31
10.1.3.5
5-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Procedure
To set up NAT:
1. From the Main Menu screen, press Ctrl-a then Shift-r to access the router’s
Command Line Interface. Enter the following commands:
en
config t
ip nat inside source static 10.1.3.2 192.128.22.28
ip nat inside source static 10.1.3.3 192.128.22.29
ip nat inside source static 10.1.3.4 192.128.22.30
ip nat inside source static 10.1.3.5 192.128.22.31
2. Enable NAT on interfaces with the following commands (where x is the number
configured for the sub-interface):
interface ethernet 0
ip nat inside
interface serial 0.x
ip nat outside
3. Save the configuration and exit the CLI:
save
exit
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Network Address Port Translation
Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) allows multiple clients in a local network
to simultaneously access remote networks using a single IP address. This benefits
telecommuters and SOHO (Small Office/Home Office) users that have multiple
clients in an office running TCP/UDP applications. NAPT is sometimes referred to
as PAT (Port Address Translation).
NAPT provides a many-to-one mapping and uses one public address to interface
numerous private users to an external network. All hosts on the global side view all
hosts on the local side as one Internet host. The local hosts continue to use their
corporate or private addresses. When the hosts are communicating with each
other, the translation is based on the IP address and the IP port numbers used by
TCP/IP applications. Only TCP/UDP applications can access the public network.
NAPT Configuration Example
NAPT Example
Ethernet
Private
Network
Public IP
Address
10.1.3.1
Public
Network
FrameSaver SLV
Router
02-17298
In this NAPT example the router is configured for NAPT using:
A single public IP address. Multiple public addresses can be used.
A public network. NAPT can also be used between private networks.
An access list. A pool can also be used, instead or in addition.
NAPT Mapping Public IP Address
172.20.95.2:zzzz
Private IP Addresses
10.1.3.2:zzzz
172.20.95.2:yyyy
10.1.3.3:yyyy
172.20.95.2:xxxx
10.1.3.4:xxxx
5-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Procedure
To set up NAPT:
1. From the Main Menu screen, press Ctrl-a then Shift-r to access the router’s
Command Line Interface.
2. Set up an access list. The following command specifies a list that includes
addresses 10.1.3.1 through 10.1.3.254:
access-list 1 permit 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255
3. Enable NAPT. The following command specifies that inside address
translation is performed on the addresses in Access List 1, and the outside
address is the address of the Serial interface 0, sub-interface x:
ip nat inside source list 1 interface se 0.x overload
4. Specify which interface uses inside (private) and which uses outside (public)
IP addresses:
int ethernet 0
ip nat inside
int serial 0.x
ip nat outside
5. Save the configuration and exit the CLI:
save
exit
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
NAT and NAPT Configuration Example
The router can be configured for NAT and NAPT simultaneously.
NAT and NAPT Example
Server
10.1.1.1
Public IP
Addresses
10.1.3.1
Public
Network
FrameSaver SLV
02-17299
Router
In this NAT and NAPT example:
Multiple workstations in the private address space can use NAPT, and the
server in the private address space can use NAT.
The server may need NAT to send more than TCP/UDP traffic, or
accommodate multiple types of inbound traffic types.
For example, a Web server that uses FTP for maintenance needs access from
the public address side for HTTP and FTP using NAT.
Procedure
To configure the router for both NAPT and NAT:
2. Set up a static address for any host not using NAPT:
ip nat inside source static 10.1.1.1 155.22.17.1
5-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server
The router provides a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server
feature as specified in RFC 2131, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, and
RFC 2132, DHCP Option and BOOTP Vendor Extensions. DHCP is the protocol
used for automatic IP address assignment.
DHCP setup considerations:
The range of IP addresses to be used by the DHCP server must be
configured. The maximum number of clients is 253.
The DHCP server is not activated until one IP address and subnet mask are
assigned to the Ethernet interface.
DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time.
When the DHCP IP address range is changed, all binding entries,
automatically added routes, and ARP table entries for the clients configured
with the old address range are removed.
When the DHCP Server is enabled, there can be only one IP address
configured for the Ethernet interface.
The IP address for the next hop router provided to the hosts in the DHCP reply
must be configured.
The minimum and maximum lease time settings can be configured.
The subnet mask can be configured along with the IP address range
(optional).
The DHCP server domain name can be configured (optional).
The Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address can be configured (optional).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example
NAT with DHCP Server
FrameSaver SLV Router
Private IP
Address
Ethernet
Private
Network
Public
Network
DHCP
Pool
NAT
Public IP
Addresses
02-17300
In this DHCP Server with NAT example:
The clients are using dynamic IP address assignment and use the Ethernet
interface of the router as the next hop router (default gateway).
The DHCP server assigns private IP addresses which are converted to public
IP addresses by NAT.
The network interface must be numbered.
The router is configured as the DHCP server giving the private IP addresses
to the clients.
The Ethernet interface is in private address space. NAT is used for one-to-one
mapping of addresses.
Public IP Addresses for NAT
192.128.22.1
Private IP Addresses
10.1.3.2
192.128.22.2
10.1.3.3
. . .
. . .
192.128.22.nnn
10.1.3.nnn
The command line syntax for this example, where x is the number configured for
the sub-interface, is:
ip nat pool public 192.128.22.1 netmask 255.255.255.0
access-list 1 permit 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
ip nat inside source list 1 pool public
interface ethernet 0
ip nat inside
interface serial 0.x
ip nat outside
5-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example
DHCP Server at Remote Site
Customer Premises – Remote Site
DHCP
Server
LAN
DSL
DHCP
Clients
Network
FrameSaver SLV
Router
02-17301
In this DHCP Server at the remote site example:
The DHCP clients send IP address requests to the specified DHCP server.
The router is the DHCP server and provides IP addresses to DHCP clients on
the local Ethernet segment.
This example creates a pool of 254 reusable IP addresses.
The command line syntax for this example is:
ip dhcp pool pool17
network 155.1.3.0 255.255.255.0
default-router 155.1.3.254
DHCP Relay Agent
The router provides the capability of serving as a DHCP Relay Agent, as specified
in RFC 2131, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router provides the
capability to enable and disable the DHCP Relay Agent and to configure the IP
address of the DHCP server to which the DHCP requests are to be sent.
The DHCP server assigns an IP address to the end-user system. When DHCP
Relay is enabled, it is possible to limit the number of DHCP clients. The router’s IP
Routing table and ARP table are automatically updated. The DHCP relay agent in
the router should be used when there is a DHCP server at the customer’s
headquarters or central site.
DHCP relay agent setup considerations include the following:
DHCP server IP address must be configured.
DHCP relay must be enabled; i.e., both the server address and the interface
closest to the server are configured.
The number of DHCP clients is limited to 1–253.
DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time.
NAT and DHCP relay cannot be enabled at the same time.
With DHCP relay enabled, the router sends the DHCP request to the DHCP
server.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Router Security
The router offers security via the following:
Filtering can be enabled or disabled for inbound and/or outbound traffic:
— Ethertype
— ICMP Message Type, Code
— IP Protocol Type: TCP, UDP, or ICMP
— TCP/UDP Ports
— IP Source/Destination IP Address
Always enabled:
— Land Bug Prevention
— Smurf Attack Prevention
IP Router Filtering
Router filtering does not apply when the router is in bridge-only mode. By default,
filtering is disabled on the router. Filtering provides security advantages on LANs
by restricting traffic on the network. A filter consists of a set of rules applied to a
specific interface to indicate whether a packet received or sent on that interface is
forwarded or discarded.
Filters are configured in general router configuration mode, then applied to the
Ethernet or frame relay network interface. Filters are applied to traffic in either the
transmit or receive direction on that interface.
There is one filter access list per interface, per direction, with a maximum of
33 rules per list. For IP filters, all rules with a source host IP address are applied
first; all rules with a destination host IP address are applied next. The remaining
filters are applied in the order in which they were configured.
Bridge Filtering
Bridge filtering does not apply when the router is in router-only mode. When
bridging is enabled, separate ethertype filters are applied to the Ethernet and
frame relay interfaces. They are applied to traffic in either the transmit or receive
direction on that interface, with one filter access list per interface, per direction.
There is a maximum of 16 rules per list. Each rule in the access list allows the user
to filter a single ethertype or range of ethertypes.
MAC frames can be filtered based on the:
SNAP Ethernet field in the 802.2 and 802.3 header.
Protocol type field in the DIX Ethernet header.
For ethertype filters, the rules are applied in the order in which they were
configured.
5-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
IP Filtering
When NAT is enabled and the IP filters are active, filtering is done on the Ethernet
port: upstream first, then downstream.
Upstream: From the client to the server
Downstream: From the server to the client
Land Bug Prevention
The router drops all packets received on a network PVC interface or the Ethernet
interface when the Source IP address is the same as the Destination IP address.
Smurf Attack Prevention
The router ignores requests to send an ICMP echo reply to the broadcast address
and ICMP echo requests with a destination of the broadcast address.
Provisioning the Router Interface
The FrameSaver SLV Router defaults to bridge mode. Routing without bridging,
and simultaneous routing and bridging, are also options.
Use the bridge command from the router’s CLI to configure the bridge and routing
attributes. Also, enter an Ethernet IP address and a DHCP IP address.
command line syntax and information about CLI commands. For a list of default
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configuring the FrameSaver SLV Router
Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation
The CLI is available via a Telnet session or a direct connection over the router’s
COM port to a VT100-compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation
program. You access the CLI through the router’s menu-driven user interface.
From the Main Menu, press Shift-r to access the CLI.
Verify the required terminal settings:
Data rate is set to 19.2 Kbps (19200 bps).
Character length is set to 8.
Parity is set to None.
Stop bits is set to 1.
Flow control is set to Off or None.
Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI
Use the show configuration command to output command strings needed to
restore the current running configuration.
Output from the show configuration command can be captured to a text file using
most terminal emulation programs. Once the text file is captured, the router can be
placed in configuration mode. The text file can then be fed back to configure the
router.
5-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Limiting Access
The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces:
Asynchronous terminal
Telnet
FTP
SNMP
Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time; that is, you can
have two simultaneous Telnet sessions, or one Telnet session and one active
asynchronous terminal session, or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal
sessions.
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access
Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface can be
limited by:
Requiring a login.
Assigning an access level to the port or interface.
An asynchronous terminal can be connected to the unit’s COM (communications)
port or its modem port.
6-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Procedure
To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface:
1. Select the appropriate port options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Communication Port
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Modem Port
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE: User ID and password combinations must
Limit the effective access level Port Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.
to Level-3 or Level-2
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access level, a
user cannot operate at a level higher than the
access level specified for the port (e.g., if a user has
a Level-1 login and Level-2 port access has been
set, the Level-1 user can only operate as a Level-2
user).
If you are going to allow Level-1 users to configure
the unit, keep the access at Level-1.
NOTE:
3. Save your changes.
If connecting an asynchronous terminal to the unit’s:
port.
additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Limiting Dial-In Access via the Modem Port
The modem port is already configured for dial-in and asynchronous terminal
access; these are the default settings.
To limit dial-in access via the modem port, disable the Dial-In Access configuration
option.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Modem Port
information about modem port options.
6-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Controlling ISDN Access
FrameSaver units with the built-in DBM limit access through the following methods:
ISDN Call Security
The FrameSaver unit uses the Caller Identification Method to screen calls and
avoid accidental or intentional disruption of network traffic. The answering DBM
only accepts calls with valid calling number identifiers or phone numbers.
When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to
Caller ID, the DBM takes advantage of ISDN services for network backup and
Calling Number Identification Service (CNIS) to provide backup security. ISDN
assures the integrity of calling party identifiers. The DBM uses the calling party
identifier to identify the calling unit and switches PVC connections as specified by
the user. No additional security is required.
When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to
Proprietary, the DBM queries the originating unit for its Local Phone Number to
identify the calling unit. If the returned number is in one of the unit’s Inbound
Calling IDs, the call is accepted. If not, or if the queried unit does not respond
within five seconds, the unit drops the call.
Disabling ISDN Access
Procedure
To disable ISDN access:
1. Select the ISDN Physical options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ Physical
2. Set Interface Status to Disable.
3. Save your change.
more information about ISDN BRI or PRI DBM configuration options.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access
The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or
FTP session. Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a
service provider’s troubleshooting (TS) management link.
Limiting Telnet Access
Telnet access can be limited by:
Disabling Telnet access completely.
Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Access
Management Link.
Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions.
Disabling TS Access Management Link access.
To limit Telnet access via a service provider’s troubleshooting management link,
Procedure
To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Access Management
Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Telnet Session to Disable.
Disable Telnet access
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE:
User ID and password combinations must
Assign an access level
Session Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.
NOTE:
Regardless of a user’s login access level, a
user cannot operate at a level higher than the
access level specified for the Telnet session (e.g., if
a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2 telnet access
has been set, the Level-1 user can only operate as
a Level-2 user).
If you are going to allow users to configure the unit,
keep the access at Level-1.
3. Save your changes.
6-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Limiting FTP Access
FTP access can be limited by:
Disabling FTP access completely.
Requiring a user ID and password to login.
Limiting FTP bandwidth.
Procedure
To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Access Management Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
FTP Session to Disable.
Disable FTP
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE:
User ID and password combinations must
If you want to allow users to configure the unit or
perform file transfers, including downloads, keep
the access at Level-1.
Level-1 access is required to download software to
the unit, or to upload or download configuration
files. Level-3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV
historical information.
Limit bandwidth for FTP
FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the
network line speed, typically less than or equal to
the CIR.
This method is not recommended if SLV reports are
desired since FTP is required to generate the
reports.
3. Save your changes.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link
Procedure
To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Access Management
Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Disable Telnet Session and/or FTP Session, as appropriate.
3. Return to the Management and Communication menu, and select Node IP.
4. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Disable access via the TS
Access Management Link
TS Access Management Link to None.
Assign an access level to the
TS Access Management Link
TS Access Management Link’s Access Level to
Level-2 or Level-3.
NOTE:
Regardless of a user’s login access level, a
user cannot operate at a level higher than the
access level specified for the session (e.g., if a user
has a Level-1 login and Level-2 telnet access has
been set, the Level-1 user can only operate as a
Level-2 user).
If you are going to allow users to configure the unit,
keep the access at Level-1.
5. Save your changes.
configuration options.
6-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Controlling SNMP Access
The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1, which provides limited security
through the use of community names. There are three methods for limiting SNMP
access:
Disabling SNMP access.
Assigning SNMP community names and the access type.
Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit.
Disabling SNMP Access
When the SNMP access is disabled, the FrameSaver unit will not respond to
SNMP messages.
Procedure
To disable SNMP access:
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
General SNMP Management
2. Disable the SNMP Management option.
3. Save your change.
options.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an
SNMP manager. SNMP manager access can be limited by:
Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the
FrameSaver unit’s Management Information Base (MIB).
Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name.
Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB, the
community name must be supplied.
Procedure
To assign SNMP community names and access types:
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
General SNMP Management
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Assign SNMP community
names
Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a
community name text, up to 255 characters in length.
Assign the type of access
allowed for the SNMP
community names
Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read or
Read/Write.
3. Save your changes.
options.
6-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses
An additional level of security is provided by:
Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit.
Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management
systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit.
Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address
validation is performed.
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that
determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to communicate with the unit.
Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
General SNMP Management → SNMP Management: Enable
Procedure
To limit SNMP access through IP addresses:
1. Select the SNMP NMS Security options:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→ SNMP
NMS Security
2. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Enable IP address checking
NMS IP Validation to Enable.
Specify the number (between 1 and 10) of
SNMP management systems that are
authorized to send SNMP messages to the
FrameSaver unit
Number of Managers to the desired
number.
Specify the IP address(es) that identifies the NMS n IP Address to the appropriate
SNMP manager(s) authorized to send
SNMP messages to the unit
IP address.
Specify the access allowed for an authorized Access Level to Read or Read/Write.
NMS when IP address validates is
performed
3. Save your changes.
more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Creating a Login
A login is required if security is enabled. Security is enabled by the configuration
options Login Required for the communication port, modem port, and Telnet Login
Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session.
Up to six login ID/password combinations can be created using ASCII text, and
each login must have a specified access level. Logins must be unique and they are
case-sensitive.
Procedure
To create a login record:
1. Select Administer Logins.
Main Menu→ Control→ Administer Logins
2. Select New, and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
In the field . . .
Login ID
Enter the . . .
ID of 1 to 10 characters.
Password from 1 to 10 characters.
Password
Re-enter password
Password again to verify that you entered the correct
password into the device.
Access Level
Access level: 1, 2, or 3.
Level-1 – User can add, change, and display
configuration options, save, and perform device
testing.
Level-2 – User can monitor and perform
diagnostics, display status and configuration option
information.
Level-3 – User can only monitor and display status
and configuration screens.
CAUTION:
Make sure at least one login is set up for
Level-1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out.
NOTE:
3. Save your changes.
When Save is complete, the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field, ready
for another entry.
more information about security configuration options.
6-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Modifying a Login
Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one.
Deleting a Login
Procedure
To delete a login record:
1. Select Administer Logins.
Main Menu→ Control→ Administer Logins
2. Page through login pages/records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until
the login to be deleted is displayed.
3. Select Delete.
4. Save your deletion.
When the deletion is complete, the number of login pages/records reflects
one less record, and the record before the deleted record reappears.
Example:
Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Controlling Router CLI Access
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router can be managed from an NMS using SNMP,
or from the router’s command line interface (CLI). There are two methods to
access the command line interface:
Local access at the router through the COM port, or
Access via a Telnet session.
Telnet access defaults to Administrator level. If the current login is at the
Operator level, only Operator level access is available for the session. Telnet
access is always enabled.
The router accepts one CLI login session at a time and is configured at the factory
without a default login ID and password. To provide login security to the system,
configure a login ID and password.
When a local console connection is first established, a login prompt appears. If the
Device Name field has been configured via the Control menu
(Control Menu→ System Information), the login prompt displays the device name.
For example, a device name of Largo is shown as:
Largo>
Access Levels (Command Modes)
There is one login ID and several levels of privileges for the router’s CLI. Your user
account can be configured with one user name and different passwords for:
Operator. The Operator has read-only access to display device information
with no modification permission and limited access to diagnostic functions.
With a device name of Largo, the prompt appears as Largo>.
Administrator. The Administrator has several levels of access to the router’s
CLI. The # sign in the following prompts indicates Administrator access level.
Display Prompt with Device Name of Largo Administrator Access Levels
Largo #>
Standard (same as Operator)
Configuration
Largo(config) #
Largo(config-if) #
Largo(config-subif) #
Largo(config-dhcp) #
Configuration Interface
Configuration Sub-Interface
Configuration DHCP Pool
access level details for each command line entry.
6-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
Changing Access Levels
The Operator and Administrator have the same Login ID with different passwords
for their access level. To determine the level of access for a session, refer to
After accessing the router’s CLI:
You can access the Administrator access level by entering:
enable
The router’s defaults to no password required. To require a password to
access the Administrator access level, enter:
enable password password
Once saved, the router responds with a prompt to enter a password for
Administrator access. This command is in effect until no enable password
[ password ] is entered and saved.
You can end the current Administrator access level by entering:
exit
This command results in ending the current Administrator access level
session. Exit may need to be entered several times to reach Operator level
and/or end the session.
You can end the Administrator access level by entering:
end
This command results in ending the Administrator access level session and
returning immediately to Operator level.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Security and Logins
6-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
7-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Displaying System Information
Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver
unit. This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement
units and/or making firmware upgrades.
Main Menu→ Status→ Identity
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
System Name
Domain name for this SNMP-managed node (up to 255
ASCII characters).
System Contact
System Location
NAM
Contact person for this SNMP-managed node.
Physical location for this SNMP-managed node.
NAM Type
Type of unit installed, referred to as a network access
module, or NAM (i.e., T1 FR NAM). This card type is
supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object.
Hardware Revision
Unit’s hardware version. Format nnnn-nnx consists of a
4-digit number, followed by two digits and one alphabetic
character.
Current Software Revision
Software version currently being used by the unit. Format
nn.nn.nn consists of a 6-digit number that represents the
major and minor revision levels.
Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit,
but has not yet been implemented. Format is the same as
for the Current Software Revision.
In Progressindicates that the flash memory is
currently being downloaded.
Invalidindicates that no download has occurred or
the download was not successful
Serial Number
Unit’s 7-character serial number.
Ethernet MAC Address
Media Access Control (MAC) address assigned to the
Ethernet port during manufacturing.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
ISDN DBM
Card Type
The type of dial backup module installed, ISDN-BRI or
ISDN-PRI, if applicable.
If an unsupported DBM is installed, Unsupport
displays.
If the DBM has failed, Faileddisplays.
Software Revision
Software version currently being used by the FrameSaver
unit’s DBM. Format nn.nn.nn consists of a 6-digit number
that represents the major and minor revision levels.
For an ISDN-PRI DBM, Nonedisplays because the DBM
does not have loaded software; it runs from the NAM’s
software.
Hardware Revision
FrameSaver DBM’s hardware version. Format nnnn-nnx
consists of a 4-digit number, followed by 2 digits and
1 alphabetic character.
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads
FrameSaver SLV faceplates include LEDs (light-emitting diodes) that provide
status on the unit and its interfaces. These faceplates are shown in the following
sections.
The Display LEDs and Control Leads feature allows you to monitor a remote unit; it
is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems. The Display LEDs and
Control Leads screen shows the appropriate interfaces for the unit, with the
appropriate status highlighted.
7-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-A1 unit’s faceplate includes LEDs (light-emitting
diodes) that provide status on the FrameSaver unit, its network interface, DSX-1
interface, and DTE interface.
9126
T®M
FrameSaver SLV
NETWORK
DSX
PORT
00-16182-01
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-A2-201’s faceplate includes LEDs that provide status
on the FrameSaver unit, its network interface, DSX-1 interface, and DTE interface.
9126
T®M
FrameSaver SLV
NETWORK
DSX
PORT
02-17142a
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-II’s and FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router’s faceplates
include LEDs that provide status on the FrameSaver unit, its backup mode, its
network interface, DSX-1 interface, and DTE interface. The PORT LED refers to
the user data port on the CSU/DSU, and the Ethernet port on the router.
9126
T®M
FrameSaver SLV
NETWORK
DSX
PORT
02-17142
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen:
Main Menu → Status → Display LEDs and Control Leads
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9126
main/status/leds
Device Name: Node A
9126
5/26/2000 23:32
DISPLAY LEDS & Control Leads
T1 FR NAM
GENERAL
OK
NETWORK 1
Sig
DSX-1
Sig
Port-1
OK
Alarm
Test
OOF
Alm
OOF
Alm
TXD
RXD
Backup
LMI OK
DTR
RTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router
main/status/leds
9126-IIRSLV
Device Name: Node A
08/23/2002 11:59
DISPLAY LEDS & Control Leads
T1 FR NAM
GENERAL
OK
NETWORK 1
Sig
DSX-1
Sig
Ethernet
OK
Alarm
Test
OOF
Alm
OOF
Alm
Backup
LMI OK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions. LED and control lead
descriptions are in the sections that follow.
7-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II LEDs and Control Leads
The FrameSaver SLV 9128-II faceplate includes 12 LEDs (light-emitting diodes)
that provide status on the FrameSaver unit, its network interface, DSX/PRI, and
DTE interface. The FrameSaver SLV 9128-II, with an Ethernet port, faceplate is
shown below.
9128
T®M
FrameSaver SLV
NETWORK
DSX/PRI
PORT
00-16833
To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen:
Main Menu → Status → Display LEDs and Control Leads
The following example shows the screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II with an
ISDN PRI DBM installed.
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II
main/status/leds
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
5/26/2000 23:32
DISPLAY LEDS & Control Leads
T1 FR NAM
GENERAL
OK
NETWORK 1
Sig
DSX-1
Sig
Port-1
OK
Port-2
OK
Alarm
Test
OOF
Alm
OOF
Alm
TXD
RXD
TXD
RXD
Backup
FR Mode
LMI OK
DTR
DTR
RTS
RTS
ISDN PRI
Sig
OOF
Alm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions. LED and control lead
descriptions are in the sections that follow.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
LED Descriptions
LED (Routers Only) for Ethernet interface LED information.
Table 7-1. General Status LEDs (1 of 2)
Label
Indiction
Color
What It Means
1
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – FrameSaver unit has power and it is
operational.
OFF – FrameSaver unit is in a power-on
self-test, or there is a failure.
ALM
Operational
Alarm (Fail)
Red
ON – FrameSaver unit has just been reset, or an
error or fault has been detected.
Error/fault/alarm conditions:
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
CTS Down
DBM BRI Card Failure
DBM Download Failed
DLCI Down
DTR Down
Ethernet Link Down
Exceeded Error Rate (EER)
Internal Modem Failed
ISDN Network Failed
LMI Down
Loss of Signal (LOS)
Network Communication Link Down
Out of Frame (OOF)
Power Supply/Fan Failure
Primary or Secondary Clock Failed
Self-Test Failed
SLV Latency Exceeded
SLV Timeout
Suboptimal Link Rate
Two Level-1 Users Accessing Device
Yellow Alarm Signal
1
When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed, if the OK LED comes on then goes off during
power recycling, the ISDN BRI DBM may have failed.
2
On the Display LEDs & Control Leads screen for the Model 9128-II only, FR Mode
is On or Off. When On (highlighted), the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode.
7-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-1. General Status LEDs (2 of 2)
Label
Indiction
Color
What It Means
ALM
Operational
Alarm (Fail)
Red
ON – FrameSaver unit has just been reset, or an
error or fault has been detected.
(cont'd)
Alarms appear on the System and Test Status
Messages, for additional information.
OFF – No failures have been detected.
TST
BKP
Test Mode
Backup
Yellow
Yellow
ON – Loopback or test pattern is in progress,
initiated locally, remotely, or from the network.
OFF – No tests are active.
ON – FrameSaver unit is in Backup mode; that
is, the backup link has been established, and
backup is in progress through the specified
Alternate Destination Link.
OFF – FrameSaver unit is not in Backup mode.
Blinking ON and OFF – Alternate Destination
Link is being established, but no data has been
passed.
FR
Mode
Frame Relay
Mode
Multi-
Yellow – LMI is down on the FrameSaver
2
colored SLV 9128-II.
(Model
9128-II
only)
Green – LMI is up on the FrameSaver
SLV 9128-II.
1
When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed, if the OK LED comes on then goes off during
power recycling, the ISDN BRI DBM may have failed.
2
On the Display LEDs & Control Leads screen for the Model 9128-II only, FR Mode
is On or Off. When On (highlighted), the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-2. Network, DSX, or PRI Interface LEDs
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
SIG
Signal
Green
ON – A recoverable signal is present on the
Network/DSX/PRI interface.
OFF – The signal cannot be recovered from the
Network/DSX/PRI interface. An LOS condition
exists.
OOF
ALM
Out of Frame
Alarm
Yellow
Yellow
ON – At least one OOF was detected during the
sampling period.
OFF – No OOFs were detected during the
sampling period.
ON – An alarm condition is present on the
network/DSX/PRI interface.
Current alarm conditions:
Loss of Signal (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LOF)
Out of Frame (OOF)
Excessive Error Rate (EER)
Yellow Alarm Signal
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
OFF – No alarm condition is present on the
Network/DSX/PRI interface.
Table 7-3. User Data Port LED (CSU/DSUs Only)
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
1
OK
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The interchange circuits for the port are in
the correct state to transmit and receive data.
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is
disabled, or if the port is configured to monitor
DTR and/or RTS and the lead(s) is not asserted.
1
The FrameSaver SLV 9128-II only has one OK LED even though it has two user
data ports. If either port is enabled and active, the LED is on. If both ports are
enabled and one of the ports is inactive, the LED is off.
Table 7-4. Ethernet Port LED (Routers Only)
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The Ethernet port is transmitting and
receiving.
OFF – The port is idle.
7-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Control Lead Descriptions
data port OK control lead. The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are
the same.
In addition to these LEDs, additional control leads can be monitored through the
Display LEDs and Control Leads screen. These indicators show the current state
of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted; that is, in
Table 7-5. Additional Control Leads
Label
Indication
What It Means
Network Interface
LMI OK
LMI Operational Status
LMI is operating successfully on the first frame
relay link on the network interface.
User Data Port
TXD
RXD
DTR
Transmit Data
Data is being sent to the far-end device.
Receive Data
Data is being received from the far-end device.
Data Terminal Ready
Shows the current state of the DTR control lead.
This indicator should always be on.
RTS
Request to Send
Shows the current state of the RTS control lead.
This indicator should always be on.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Device Messages
These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens. All
device messages are listed in alphabetical order.
Table 7-6. Device Messages (1 of 6)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Access level is n,
Read-only.
User’s access level is 2 or
3; user is not authorized to
change configurations.
No action needed.
Already Active
Test selected is already
running.
Allow test to continue.
Select another test.
Stop the test.
Blank Entries
Removed
New had been selected
from the Administer Logins
screen, no entry was made,
then Save was selected.
No action needed.
Reenter the Login ID,
Password, and Access Level.
Cannot Delete Trap
Manager
Delete was selected from
the Management PVCs
Options screen, but the
PVC had been defined as a
trap destination.
No action needed, or configure
another path for traps and try
again.
Cannot Save – no
Level 1 Login IDs
Security was being set up,
but all the logins were
assigned either Level-2 or
Level-3 access.
Set up at least one login with
Access Level-1 so the unit can be
configured.
Command Complete
Configuration has been
saved or all tests have been
aborted.
No action needed.
Wait and try again.
Connection Refused
Two menu-driven user
interface sessions are
already in use when a
Telnet session was
attempted.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
Destination Not
Unique
Destination entered is
already being used.
Enter another destination
indicator.
DLCI in connection.
User tried to delete a DLCI
No action needed, or
Delete connection first that was part of a
connection.
Delete the connection, then
delete the DLCI.
DLCI Number Already The DLCI number entered
Enter another DLCI number.
No action is needed.
Exists
on the DLCI Record Entry
screen has already been
created so is not unique.
DLCI Number
Reserved
User tried to designate a
special troubleshooting
DLCI.
7-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-6. Device Messages (2 of 6)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Duplicate DLCI
Number
DLCI number entered is not No action needed; previous
unique for the frame relay
link.
contents of the DLCI number field
is restored.
File Transfer Complete A file transfer was
Switch to the newly downloaded
software.
performed successfully.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
File Transfer Failed –
Invalid file
A file transfer was
attempted, but it was not
successful.
Try again, making sure you
type the filename correctly.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
Exit the FTP session, or
download another file.
Invalid – Already
Active
A test was already in
progress when it was
selected.
No action needed.
Invalid Character (x)
A non-valid printable ASCII Reenter information using valid
character has been
entered.
characters.
Invalid date: must be
mm/dd/yyyy
A non-valid date was
entered on the System
Information screen.
Reenter the date in the
month/day/4-digit year format.
Invalid date and/or
time
A non-valid date or time
was entered on the System month/day/4-digit year format
Reenter the date in the
Information screen. The
date does not exist (e.g.,
February 30th).
and/or time in the
hour:minutes:seconds format.
Invalid – Link Already
Active
Start was selected for a
Test Call, but the selected
frame relay link is currently
in use.
Wait until the link is available and
try again.
Invalid – No ISDN
Channels Available
Start was selected for a
Test Call, but all supported
ISDN channels are
Wait until a channel is available
and try again.
currently in use.
Invalid – No Test Call
Stop was selected for a Test Start the Test Call again when the
Active
Call and no test call is
connection is Inactive again.
active on the selected link.
This can occur when the
test is ended because the
link is needed for an active
connection, but the PVC
Test screen has not yet
been updated to Start.
Invalid time: must be
hh:mm:ss
A non-valid system time
was entered on the System hour:minutes:seconds format.
Information screen.
Reenter the time in the
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-6. Device Messages (3 of 6)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Invalid Password
Login is required and an
incorrect password was
entered; access is denied.
Try again.
Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
Invalid Test
Combination
A conflicting loopback or
pattern test was in progress
when Start was selected to
start another test, or was
active on the same or
Wait until other test ends and
message clears.
Cancel all tests from the Test
screen (Path: main/test).
another interface when
Start was selected.
Stop the test from the same
screen the test was started
from.
Limit of six Login IDs
reached
An attempt to enter a new
login ID was made, and the
limit of six login/password
combinations has been
reached.
Delete another login/password
combination.
Reenter the new login ID.
Limit of Mgmt PVCs
reached
New was selected from the
PVC Connection Table and
the maximum number of
management PVCs has
already been created.
Do not create the management
PVC.
Delete another management
PVC, and try again.
Limit of PVC
Connections reached
New was selected from the
PVC Connection Table and
the maximum number of
PVCs has already been
created.
Do not create the PVC
connection.
Delete another PVC
connection, and try again.
Name Must be Unique Name entered for a
management PVC has
Enter another 4-character name
for the logical/management link.
been used previously.
No Destination Link
DLCIs Available
New was selected from the Configure additional DLCIs for the
PVC Connection Table, but network link and try again.
even though DLCIs are
available to form a
connection, no DLCIs are
available on the network
link, which is a suitable PVC
Destination.
No DLCIs available for New was selected from the No action needed, or configure
connection
PVC Connection Table, but more DLCIs and try again.
all configured DLCIs have
been connected.
New was selected from the Configure more network and/or
Management PVCs option
screen, but all Link/DLCI
pairs have been connected.
Port-1 Links/DLCIs pairs and try
again.
7-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-6. Device Messages (4 of 6)
Message What It Indicates
No DLCIs Available for New was selected from the Configure more network and/or
What To Do
Mgmt PVC
Management PVCs option
screen, but all configured
DLCIs have been
Port-1 DLCIs and try again.
connected.
No DLCIs Defined
DLCI Records was selected Select New and create a DLCI
from an interface’s
record.
Configuration Edit/Display
menu, and no DLCI
Records have been created
for this interface.
No more DLCIs
allowed
New or CopyFrom was
selected from an interface’s new DLCI Record.
DLCI Records configuration
Delete a DLCI, then create the
screen, and the maximum
number of DLCI Records
had already been reached.
No Primary
New or Modify was selected Configure additional DLCIs for the
Destination Link DLCIs from the PVC Connection
network link and try again.
Available
Table, but even though
If a network DLCI has been
entered as a Source DLCI:
DLCIs are available to form
a connection, no DLCIs are
available on the network
link, which is a suitable
Primary PVC Destination.
1. Change the Source DLCI to a
user data port DLCI.
2. Enter the network DLCI as the
PVC’s Primary Destination.
No Security Records
to Delete
Delete was selected from
the Administer Login
screen, and no security
records had been defined.
No action needed.
Enter a security record.
Password Matching
Error – Re-enter
Password
Password entered in the
Re-enter Password field of
the Administer Logins
screen does not match what
was entered in the
Try again.
Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
Password field.
Permission Denied
A file transfer was
attempted, but the:
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
User did not have Level
1 security.
See your system administrator
to get your security level
changed.
Wrong file was specified
when the put command
was entered.
Try again, entering the correct
file with the put command.
User attempted to
upload a program file
from the unit.
Enter the put command
instead of a get command; you
can only transfer files to the
unit, not from it.
See Upgrading System
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-6. Device Messages (5 of 6)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Please Wait
Command takes longer
than 5 seconds.
Wait until message clears.
Port Inactive
The port is disabled, or it
supports synchronous data
when a DTE Loopback was
started.
No action is needed.
No action needed.
(FrameSaver SLV
9128-II only)
Resetting Device,
Please Wait ...
Yes (or y) was entered in
the Reset COM Port usage
field of the System Paused
menu.
Save Cancelled
Changes were made on the No action is needed.
Easy Install screen, but
when it came to saving the
changes, the Esc key was
pressed or No was entered
in response to the Save
(FrameSaver SLV
9128-II only)
Changes?prompt.
Test Active
No higher priority System
and Test Status messages
exist, and a test is running.
Contact service provider if test
initiated by the network.
Wait until the test ends and
message clears.
Cancel all tests from the Test
screen (Path: main/test).
Stop the test from the same
screen the test was started
from.
User Interface Already Two Telnet sessions are
Wait and try again.
in Use
already in use when an
attempt to access the
menu-driven user interface
through the COM port is
made.
Contact one of the IP address
user and request that they log
off.
IP addresses and logins of
the users currently
accessing the interface are
also provided.
User Interface Idle
Previously active session is Log on to the FrameSaver unit.
now closed/ended, and
access via the COM port is
now available.
Session has been ended
due to timeout.
No action needed.
7-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-6. Device Messages (6 of 6)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Value Out of Range
CIR entered for the DLCI is Enter a valid CIR (0 – 64000).
a number greater than the
maximum allowed.
Excess Burst Size entered
for the DLCI is a number
greater than the maximum
allowed.
Enter a valid Excess Burst Size
(0 – 1536000).
DLCI Number entered is
less than 16 or greater
than 1007.
Enter a valid number (16 – 1007).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Status Information
Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit. The following
illustration shows the Status menu for a FrameSaver SLV 9128-II with the ISDN
DBM feature installed.
Status Menu Example
main/status
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
5/26/2000 23:32
STATUS
System and Test Status
LMI Reported DLCIs
PVC Connection Status
Timeslot Assignment Status
DBM Interface Status
IP Routing Table
Performance Statistics
Trap Event Log
Display LEDs and Control Leads
Identity
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
DBM Interface Status will not appear on the menu if the unit does not have the
optional ISDN DBM feature.
NOTE:
Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order.
7-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
System and Test Status Messages
System and test status information is selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu→ Status → System and Test Status
The following information is included on this screen:
Last System Reset Date and Time
Self-Test Results Messages
One of these self-test result messages appears in the Self-Test Results field at the
top of the System and Test Status screen.
Table 7-7. Self-Test Results Messages
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Failure xxxxxxxx
An internal failure occurred 1. Record the failure code.
(xxxxxxxx represents an
8-digit hexadecimal failure
2. Reset the unit.
code used by service
personnel).
3. Contact your service
representative.
Record the failure code
before resetting the unit;
otherwise, the error
information will be lost.
Passed
No problems were found
during power-on or reset.
No action needed.
Last System Reset Date and Time
This field indicates the last time the FrameSaver unit was reset. It appears after
the Self-Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen.
Date is in mm/dd/yyyy format (month/day/year).
Time is in mm:ss format (minutes:seconds).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Health and Status Messages
The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the
FrameSaver unit.
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (1 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
AIS at DSX-1
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the
DSX-1 interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones signal.
AIS at ISDN PRI (Active/Idle)
(ISDN PRI DBM only)
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the
ISDN PRI interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones
signal.
Only appears when a PRI dial backup module (DBM)
is installed.
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
The ISDN network is transmitting an AIS.
AIS at Network 1
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the
network interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones
signal. Possible reasons include:
Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS
(keep-alive signal).
The network is transmitting an AIS.
Auto-Configuration Active
Back-to-Back Mode Active
Auto-Configuration feature is active, which allows
automatic configuration and cross-connection of
DLCIs as they are reported by the network LMI.
The operating mode has been configured for
back-to-back operation (Main Menu→ Control →
Change Operating Mode).
The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another
FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch
between them.
This feature is useful for product demonstrations or
for a point-to-point configuration using a leased line.
Backup Active
Backup has been established and data is flowing
over the alternate DLCI.
CTS down to Port-1 Device
The user data port CTS control lead on the
FrameSaver unit is off.
DBM BRI Card Failed
(ISDN BRI DBM only)
One or more of the access unit’s integrated circuit
chips has failed to internally loop data through the
dial backup unit BRI circuit.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
7-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (2 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
DBM Download Required
(ISDN BRI DBM only)
A download attempt was interrupted and failed to
complete.
The NAM software and DBM software are
incompatible.
DCLB Active, [Interface]
DLCI nnnn Down,
A V.54 Loopback is active on the specified interface.
The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down.
1,2
frame relay link
DTE External LB Active, Port-n
DTE Init. Ext LB Active, Port-n
DTPLB Active, Port-2
A Data Terminal Loopback is running on the
specified user data port.
The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on
the specified user data port.
A Data Terminal Payload Loopback (DTPLB) is
active on the synchronous user data port.
DTR Down from Port-1 Device
The DTR control lead from the device connected to
the user data port is deasserted.
EER at ISDN PRI (Active/Idle)
(ISDN PRI DBM only)
The error rate of the received ISDN network signal
exceeds the currently configured threshold. This
condition only occurs if the network interface is
configured for ESF framing and a PRI dial backup
module (DBM) is installed.
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
This condition clears when the error rate falls below
the threshold value, which may take up to
15 minutes.
EER at Network 1
The error rate of the received network signal
exceeds the currently configured threshold. This
condition only occurs if the network interface is
configured for ESF framing.
This condition clears when the error rate falls below
the threshold value, which may take up to
15 minutes.
Ethernet Link Down
The Ethernet port is enabled, but communication
between the management system and the unit is not
currently possible on the port.
(FrameSaver SLV 9126-II or
9128-II)
Internal Modem Failed
The unit’s internal modem failed to pass the self-test.
ISDN Active
An ISDN call is active.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
3
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (3 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
ISDN Link Profile Disabled
ISDN Link Name
An ISDN backup call could not be made because the
ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled
(Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→
Link Profiles).
ISDN Link Profile Invalid,
ISDN Link Name
No phone numbers have been specified in the ISDN
link profile (specified by ISDN Link Name).
ISDN Network Failed (Active/Idle) An ISDN network failure was detected when:
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
LatExceedIP_ Address,
COSx,DLCInnnn
An IP SLV Latency Threshold has been exceeded for
the specified COS of the path. IP_Address is the IP
address of the path endpoint, COSx is the Class of
Service ID associated with the path, and nnnn is the
DLCI which contains the path.
1
Link Down Administratively, frame The specified frame relay link has been disabled by
2
relay link
the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI
Protocol on another link is in a failed state.
Link Profile Disabled,
ISDN Link Name
An ISDN backup call could not be made because the
specified link profile was disabled.
LLB Active, [Interface]
A network Line Loopback (LLB) is active on the
specified interface.
LMI Discovery in Progress, frame Local Management Interface protocol discovery is in
2
relay link
progress to determine which protocol will be used on
the specified frame relay link.
2
LMI Down, frame relay link
The Local Management Interface(s) has been
declared down for the specified frame relay link.
For an individual ISDN link, the message appears
when LMI has been declared down on the link.
For a multilink aggregate link, the message
appears when LMI has been declared down on all
constituent links of the frame relay multilink.
LOS at DSX-1
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface. Clears when the ratio of ones to
zeros received is greater than or equal to 12.5%.
Possible reasons include:
DSX-1 cable problem.
No signal being transmitted from the DTE.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
7-22
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (4 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
LOS at ISDN PRI (Active/Idle)
(ISDN PRI DBM only)
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the
ISDN PRI interface. Clears when the ratio of ones to
zeros received is greater than or equal to 12.5%.
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
Only appears when a dial backup module (DBM) is
installed. Possible reasons include:
DBM cable problem.
T1 facility problem.
LOS at Network 1
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the
network interface. Clears when the ratio of ones to
zeros received is greater than or equal to 12.5%.
Possible reasons include:
Network cable problem.
No signal is being transmitted at the far-end
FrameSaver unit.
T1 facility problem.
Monitor Pttn. Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified
DLCI on the specified frame relay link.
1,2
Monitor Pttn Active, [Interface]
A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified
interface using a selected pattern.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports that
have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
Network Com Link Down
The communication link for the COM port is down,
and the COM port is configured for Net Link.
Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test
Active
An ISDN test has been initiated by the ISDN BRI
network and it is currently active.
(ISDN BRI DBM only)
OOF at DSX-1
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface. Possible reasons include:
Incompatible framing format between the DTE
and the FrameSaver unit.
DSX-1 cabling problem.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (5 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
OOF at ISDN PRI (Active/Idle)
(ISDN PRI DBM only)
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on the
ISDN PRI interface. An OOF is declared when two
out of four frame synchronization bits are in error.
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
Possible reasons include:
Incompatible framing format between the ISDN
network and the FrameSaver unit.
ISDN network cabling problem.
ISDN network problem.
OOF at Network 1
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on the
network interface. Possible reasons include:
Incompatible framing format between the network
and the FrameSaver unit.
Network cabling problem.
T1 facility problem.
PathIP_ Address Down,
DLCInnnn
A path on the network interface is unavailable.
IP_Address is the IP address of the path endpoint,
and nnnn is the DLCI which contains the path.
1
PLB Active, [Interface]
A Payload Loopback (PLB) is active on the specified
interface.
Power Supply/Fan Alarm
The power supply output voltage has dropped below
the specified tolerance level required for the system.
Or the fan tray is not operating properly.
(9000 Series Access Carrier only)
Primary Clock Failed
A failure of the primary clock source configured for
the unit is detected and the secondary clock is
providing the timing for the unit.
This condition clears when the configured primary
clock is restored.
Primary & Secondary Clocks
Failed
A failure of the primary and secondary clock sources
configured for the unit are detected and the internal
clock is providing timing for the unit.
The clock source will not automatically switch from
internal until the primary clock source returns.
PVC Loopback Active, DLCI
nnnn, frame_relay_link
A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI on
the frame relay link.
1,2
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
7-24
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (6 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
RLB Active, [Interface]
A network Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active on the
specified interface.
Secondary Clock Failed
A failure of the secondary clock source configured for
the unit is detected and the internal clock is providing
the timing for the unit.
The clock source will not automatically switch from
internal until the primary clock source returns.
Send Pattern Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
A Send Pattern test is currently active on the
specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link.
1,2
Send Pttn Active, [Interface]
A Send Pattern test is active on the specified
interface using a selected test pattern.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports that
have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
SLV Latency Exceeded,
DLCI nnnn, frame relay link
The measured latency of SLV communication
responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is
excessive, so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable
for normal multiplexed PVC operation (DLCI Type is
set to Multiplexed).
1, 2, 3
SLV Timeout, DLCI nnnn,
frame relay link
An excessive number of SLV communication
responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit
have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI;
the DLCI is not suitable for user data.
1, 2, 3
When a hardware bypass capable device has been
detected at the other end of the PVC and this
condition occurs, only user data for EDLCI 0 will be
transmitted while this condition exists.
When an ISDN DBM is present, this message only
appears for individual and aggregate multilink frame
relay links, not constituent links of a frame relay
multilink.
Suboptimal Link Rate,
frame relay link
The specified frame relay multilink has failed to
achieve the configured Maximum Link Rate for the
link.
2
(ISDN DBM only)
This message appears for multilink aggregate frame
relay links if LMI is down on any of its constituent
links.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-8. Health and Status Messages (7 of 7)
Message
What It Indicates
Timeslot Discovery in Progress,
Network 1
Time slot discovery is currently taking place to
determine the time slots that will be used for frame
relay traffic on the network interface.
This message only appears when the Time Slot
Discovery option is enabled (Main Menu→
Configuration→ Time Slot Assignment→ Frame
Relay Network Assignments) and an LMI failure is
detected on the network interface’s frame relay link.
Two Level-1 Users Accessing
Device
Two Level 1 users are already using the menu-
driven user interface; only two sessions can be
active at one time.
Test Call Active, ISDN Link Name A test call is active on the specified frame relay link,
the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the
ISDN Link Profile.
This message would only appear for models with the
built-in DBM.
Yellow at DSX-1
A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX-1
interface. DTE has detected a LOS or OOF
condition.
Yellow at ISDN PRI (Active/Idle)
(ISDN PRI DBM only)
A yellow alarm signal is received on the ISDN
network interface.
Active – Backup call was in progress.
Idle – DBM was in Idle mode.
Indicates a possible cable problem.
Yellow at Network 1
A yellow alarm signal is received on the network
interface. Possible reasons include:
Network cable problem.
T1 facility problem.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
7-26
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Test Status Messages
These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status
screen. You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test.
start and stop them.
Table 7-9. Test Status Messages (1 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
1
DCLB Active, frame_relay_link or A Data Channel V.54 Loopback (DCLB) is active on
the specified frame relay link, or Port-2.
DCLB Active, Port-2
DTE External LB Active, Port-n
DTE Init. Ext LB Active, Port-n
DTPLB Active, Port-n
An external DTE Loopback is active on the user
data port.
An external DTE Loopback is active on the user
data port.
A Data Terminal Payload Loopback (DTPLB) is
active on the user data port.
Lamp Test Active
The Lamp Test is active, causing the LEDs on the
faceplate to flash on and off.
2
LLB Active, Interface
A network Line Loopback (LLB) is active on the
specified network, DSX-1, or ISDN PRI interface.
No Test Active
No tests are currently running.
2
PLB Active, Interface
A Payload Loopback (PLB) is active on the
specified network, DSX-1, or ISDN PRI interface.
PVC Loopback Active, DLCI nnnn, A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI for
1,3
frame_relay_link
the frame relay link.
2
RLB Active, Interface
A network Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active on
the specified network or DSX-1 interface.
2
Send Pttn Active, Interface
A Send Pattern test is active on the specified
interface.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports that
have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
1
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n for a 1-slot unit, or SsPort-n for a NAM in a multislot housing (the frame relay
link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot).
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
2
3
Interface is one of the following:
– Network 1
– DSX-1
– Port-n
– ISDN, BRI or PRI
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-9. Test Status Messages (2 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
2
Monitor Pttn Active, Interface
A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified
interface.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports that
have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test
Active
An ISDN test has been started by the ISDN BRI
network and it is currently active.
Send Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
A selected Send Pattern test is active on the
specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link.
1,3
Monitor Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
A selected Monitor Pattern test is active on the
specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link.
1,3
Test Call Active, ISDN Link Name
A test call is active on the specified frame relay link,
the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the
ISDN Link Profile.
This message would only appear for units with the
ISDN DBM feature.
1
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n for a 1-slot unit, or SsPort-n for a NAM in a multislot housing (the frame relay
link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot).
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
2
3
Interface is one of the following:
– Network 1
– DSX-1
– Port-n
– ISDN, BRI or PRI
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
7-28
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status
Network LMI-reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu→ Status→ LMI Reported DLCIs
The LMI Reported DLCIs screen displays the status and CIR (if supported by the
switch) for each DLCI, whether the DLCI is configured or not.
LMI-Reported DLCIs Status Screen Example
main/status/lmi_dlcis
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs
Page 1 of 2
DLCI
300
305
400
410
411
420
430
501
511
520
STATUS
Active
CIR (bps)
16000
DLCI
622
624
625
713
822
STATUS
Active
Active
Deleted
Active
Active
Active
CIR (bps)
32000
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Inactive
Deleted
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Inactive
Active
Active
32000
32000
32000
32000
32000
* 1002
256000
64000
* – DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu
NextLink
MainMenu
PrevLink
Exit
Refresh
PgUp
PgDn
An asterisk (*) next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the
link.
DLCIs without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit. These DLCIs pass
through the unit transparently, without being monitored and with no
demultiplexing/multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being
performed. Only DLCIs on the Net1-FR1 and Port-1 frame relay links appear on
this screen; nonconfigured DLCIs on other links are discarded.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-10. Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status
Field
Status
What It Indicates
DLCI
16 through 1007
Identifies the Local Management
Interface-reported DLCI numbers
assigned to the selected interface – the
identifying number assigned to the path
between two frame relay FrameSaver
units’ ports.
DLCI statuses are listed in ascending
order (i.e., lowest number first).
Status
LMI-reported status of the DLCI:
Active
Whether the DLCI is active (capable of
carrying data) in the frame relay
network,
Inactive
Whether it is inactive in the frame relay
network,
1
Deleted
Whether it has been deleted by the
frame relay network, or
1
New
Whether it has been created by the
frame relay network.
CIR (bps)
0–1536000
Displays the committed information rate
reported by the Stratacom switch. CIR
information only appears in this column
when LMI Protocol is set to Standard.
If blank, the switch does not support this
feature.
1
Appears for 10 seconds only, before the network changes Deletedto Inactive
and New to Active.
7-30
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
IP Path Connection Status
IP Path Connection Status is selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu→ Status→ IP Path Connection Status
The IP Path Connection Status screen displays the IP Path List, a list of devices
that can be reached by their IP addresses for Service Level Management
purposes.
The list is displayed in IP address order and includes both static addresses
entered using the IP Path List (Static) configuration screen (see Configuring the IP
are received from other FrameSaver units
This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay.
IP Path Connection Status Screen Example
main/status/path
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
03/12/2002 05:00
Net1_FR1 IP PATH CONNECTION STATUS
Page 1 of 2
DLCI: 201
Device Name IP Address
Poughkeepsie 135.026.002.001 Active
New York 135.026.002.002 InActive 135.026.002.005
Status
Discovery Source
135.026.002.005
Boston 135.026.002.003 Active
Los Angeles 135.026.002.004 Active
Chicago 135.026.002.005 Active
San Francisco 135.026.002.006 Active
Milwaukee 135.026.002.007 Active
Unknown 137.010.010.001 Active
Miami 137.010.010.002 Active
135.026.002.005
135.026.002.005
135.026.002.005
135.026.002.005
135.026.002.005
Static
Static
Orlando 137.010.010.003 Active
Static
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
NextDLCI PrevDLCI
Refresh
PgUp
PgDn
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-11. IP Path Connection Status
Field
Status
What It Indicates
DLCI
16 through 1007
The IP Enabled DLCI.
Device Name
Up to 20 ASCII
characters
The name of the device configured using
the System Information screen of the
Control branch, or Unknown if the device
is not a FrameSaver.
IP Address
Status
000.000.000.001 –
255.255.255.255
The IP address of the unit at the far end
of the path.
The status of the path:
The path is operational.
The path is not operational.
Active
Inactive
Discovery Source
The source of the path definition:
Static
The path was entered using the IP
Path List (Static) screen
000.000.000.001 –
255.255.255.255
This is the IP address of the
FrameSaver unit that provided the
path.
7-32
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
PVC Connection Status
PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu→ Status→ PVC Connection Status
The PVC Connection Status screen shows all PVC connections and management
links configured for the unit. The source and primary destination are shown, along
with an alternate destination for backup. When a primary destination DLCI was
assigned to a Backup Group, the Backup Group designation appears next to the
DLCI number. In the example below, DLCIs 502 and 504 had been assigned to
Backup Group A.
PVC Connection Status Screen Example
main/status/connections
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/13/2001 23:32
Page 1 of 2
PVC CONNECTION STATUS
Primary Destination
Source
Alternate Destination
Link DLCI EDLCI
Link
DLCI
EDLCI
Status
Link
DLCI EDLCI Status
Port-1 201
Port-2 202
Port-1 100
Port-2 204
MgmtPVCTampa
Port-2 206
Port-1 207
Port-1 208
Port-1 209
Port-1 210
Port-1 214
Net1-FR1
300
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
502A
504A
505
PM
1
4
2
5
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
3
Colorado 400
Inactive
Active
Active
Inactive Colorado 302
Inactive Tampa
Active
304
506
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
PgUp
PgDn
For units with ISDN backup capability, the DBM provides backup support through
the unit’s ISDN DBM interface. For units without ISDN backup capability, an
alternate network DLCI can be used to backup user data. For additional
information about the Alternate Destination fields, see Configuring PVC
If the No PVC Connectionsmessage appears instead of a list of PVC
connections, no PVC connections have been configured yet.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-12. PVC Connection Status (1 of 2)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Link
Identifies the cross-connection of
DLCIs configured for the unit.
Net1-FR1
Source/destination is frame relay
link 1 on Network 1
Port-1, or Port-2
User data port – Port-1, or Port-2
if a FrameSaver SLV
9128/9128-II
MgmtPVCName
16 to 1007
Virtual circuit is a management
link that terminates in the unit,
where Name is the link name
DLCI
For standard DLCIs.
Identifies an individual link/
connection embedded within a DLCI.
EDLCI
0 to 62
IP
For multiplexed DLCIs, a number
from 0 to 62 identifies an individual
link embedded within a DLCI.
PM
For IP Enabled DLCIs, IP is
displayed. For payload managed
DLCIs not IP Enabled, PM is
displayed.
7-34
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-12. PVC Connection Status (2 of 2)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Status
Identifies whether the physical
interfaces, LMIs, and DLCIs are all
enabled and active for this PVC
connection.
Active*
Inactive
The PVC is currently active.
The PVC is inactive because:
– Alarm conditions and network
and SLV communication
status indicate that data
cannot be successfully
passed.
– The unit has disabled the
interface or frame relay link
due to internal operating
conventions.
– Activation of an alternate
virtual circuit is not warranted;
that is, no alarm condition on
the primary destination link
has been detected.
Disabled
The PVC cannot be activated and
is essentially disabled as a result
of how the unit was configured.
Possible causes:
– The physical interface at one
or both ends of the PVC is/are
disabled.
– The frame relay link on one or
both ends of the PVC is/are
disabled.
Invalid
Some portion of the PVC
connection is not fully configured.
* For the circuit to be active, both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Time Slot Assignment Status
Time slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration
screen to display time slot assignments for the network channels and the DSX-1
channels.
Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments
Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DS0 assignments
for each DS0 on the network interface.
Main Menu→ Status→ Timeslot Assignment Status → Network
The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two-field entries in
three rows. Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one network
interface time slot. The top field represents the timeslot of the network interface.
The bottom field represents the cross-connect status of the associated (top field)
network time slot.
Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example
main/status/timeslot/net_display
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N07
N08
D5-1/01r D5-1/02r
D5-1/03r
S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
N09
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign
Slot 1 - T1 FR NAM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Refresh
MainMenu
Exit
7-36
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
The following information is available for network interface time slots (N01– N24).
The Cross Connect
Status Field (bottom) . . . Indicates . . .
Unassgn
FrameRly1
Port-2
The time slot is unassigned.
The time slot is assigned to the network frame relay link.
The synchronous data port (Port-2) is assigned to the
network interface time slot (01 to 24).
Ds-p/tt
The DSX-1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface
time slot (01 to 24).
Ds-p/ttr
The DSX-1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface
time slot (01 to 24), using Robbed Bit Signaling (r).
Displaying DSX-1 Time Slot Assignments
Use the DSX-1 Timeslot Assignments Status screen to display all of the DS0
assignments for each DS0 on the DSX-1 interface.
Main Menu→ Status→ Timeslot Assignment Status→ DSX-1
The DSX-1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two-field entries in
three rows. Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one DSX-1
interface time slot. The top field represents the time slot of the DSX-1 Interface.
The bottom field represents the cross-connect status of the associated (top field)
DSX-1 time slot.
DSX-1 Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example
main/status/timeslot/dsx_display
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
DSX-1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D05-1/01r D05-1/02r D05-1/03r S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
S1P01
D09
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1
D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24
Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign
Slot 1 - T1 FR NAM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Refresh
MainMenu
Exit
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
The following information is available for DSX-1 interface time slots (D01– D24):
The Cross Connect
Status Field (bottom) . . . Indicates the . . .
blank
The time slot is unassigned.
Net1/tt
Network interface 1, time slot (tt) is assigned to DSX-1 time
slot (01 to 24) using Clear Channel.
Net1/ttr
Network interface 1, time slot (tt) is assigned to DSX-1 time
slot (01 to 24) using Robbed Bit Signaling (r).
DBM Interface Status
When an ISDN DBM is installed, these interface statuses appear when DBM
Interface Status is selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu→ Status→ DBM Interface Status
DBM Interface Status Screen Example
main/status/dbm
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
DBM INTERFACE STATUS
Line Status:
Call Rejected - HQ_Site: Disabled
Link:
Colorado
Colorado-1
Active
Multilink Constituent Link:
Link Operating Mode:
Call Status:
Connected
Most Recent Cause Value:
Previous Cause Value 1:
2:
Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl-7
None
None
None
None
3:
4:
Maximum Link Rate (Kbps):
Negotiated Rate (Kbps):
ISDN Channel:
64K
64K
B1
(Configured)
Remote Call ID:
8135302000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh NextLink PrevLink ConstLinkStatus
Select the NextLink and PrevLink function keys to move forward or backward
through the frame relay link that can be selected. If the selected frame relay link is
a multilink aggregate link, select the ConstLinkStatus function key to see the
status for selected constituent links.
For a multilink aggregate link, Multilink Constituent Link appears under Link so a
specific constituent link can be selected. Otherwise, the line is blank. In addition,
the Most Recent Cause Value, Previous Cause Values, and Remote Call ID do not
appear for a multilink aggregate frame relay link.
7-38
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-13. DBM Interface Status (1 of 3)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Line Status
The overall status of the ISDN line.
Active
The ISDN line is active and no
error conditions exist.
Disabled
The ISDN interface has been
disabled.
Main Menu→ Configuration→
ISDN→ Physical
Inactive
The ISDN line is disconnected or
an ISDN network alarm condition
exists.
Invalid SPID
The switch has rejected one of
the configured SPIDs
(ISDN BRI DBM only).
Invalid Local Number
The phone number configured for
a B-channel is an invalid local
number.
Call Rejected – Invalid
ID: Caller ID
The incoming call was rejected
because the Caller ID or local
phone number received from the
switch did not match any
configured Link Profiles.
If provided by the switch, the
rejected Caller ID is displayed
after the status. Otherwise,
Invalid Call IDis displayed.
Call Rejected – No
Far-End ID
The incoming call was rejected
because no Caller ID was
received from the switch (COM
port’s Port Use option is set to
Caller ID).
No local phone number was
received from the far-end device
during the call validation process
(COM port’s Port Use option is
set to Proprietary).
Call Rejected – ISDN
Link Name: Busy
The incoming call was rejected
because the enabled ISDN Link
Name associated with the
incoming Caller1 ID or local
phone number was busy.
The ISDN Link Name associated
with the incoming call is
displayed.
1
Only appears for a constituent frame relay link.
2
If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle, the Remote Call ID, ISDN Channel, and
Negotiated Rate fields will not appear.
3
Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame
relay links.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-13. DBM Interface Status (2 of 3)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Line Status
(continued)
Call Rejected – ISDN
Link Name: Disabled
The incoming call was rejected
because the enabled ISDN Link
Name associated with the
incoming Caller1 ID or local
phone number was disabled.
The ISDN Link Name associated
with the incoming call is
displayed.
Link
ISDN Link Name
ISDN Link Name
The selected ISDN backup link for
which status will be displayed.
Multilink Constituent
Link
The selected multilink constituent
link for which status will be
displayed.
1
Link Operating Mode
The status of the ISDN DBM.
2
Disabled
The ISDN Link Profile is disabled.
2
Idle
An ISDN link is not currently
needed, so there is no ISDN
connection.
Active
The ISDN link is required for
frame relay traffic and needs an
active ISDN connection.
Call Status
The overall status of the ISDN frame
relay link.
Not Connected – Invalid
Link Profile
No calls are currently connected
on the selected link because the
ISDN Link Profile is incomplete.
Not Connected
Connected
No calls are currently connected
on the selected link.
At least one call is actively
connected and available for data
transfer on the selected ISDN
frame relay link (when the Most
Recent Cause Value is Call
Awarded and Being
Delivered In Est Chnl-7).
Connected – Incoming
Call
An incoming call has been
answered and is actively
1
connected and available for data
transfer on the selected multilink
constituent link (when the Most
Recent Cause Value is Call
Awarded and Being
Delivered In Est Chnl-7).
1
Only appears for a constituent frame relay link.
2
If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle, the Remote Call ID, ISDN Channel, and
Negotiated Rate fields will not appear.
3
Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame
relay links.
7-40
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-13. DBM Interface Status (3 of 3)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Call Status
(continued)
Connected – Outbound
Call
An outbound call has been placed
and is actively connected and
available for data transfer on the
selected multilink constituent link
(when the Most Recent Cause
Value is Call Awarded and
Being Delivered In Est
Chnl-7).
1
Most Recent Cause
Value
Various ITU cause
messages
3
Messages, for additional information.
Previous Cause
Values
3
Maximum Link Rate
(Kbps)
BRI DBM:
64K, 128K
The maximum link rate that was
configured for the selected link. This
is the maximum rate the link will
attempt to achieve when activated.
PRI DBM:
64K, 128K, . . . 1472
Negotiated Rate
(Kbps)
64K per B-channel
56K per B-channel
The negotiated rate of the
connection/link.
For a multilink aggregate frame relay
link, the negotiated rate will be the
sum of the negotiated rates on all
connected constituent links.
ISDN Channel
BRI DBM:
B1, B2
The ISDN B-channel being used for
the call on this link.
PRI DBM:
B1, B2, . . . B23
3
Remote Call ID
None
Backup has never been active on
the link.
Remote device’s ID
Remote call origination – Last
Calling ID of the remote backup
device received for the B-channel. If
the remote device initiated the call,
this is the Inbound Call ID. If this
device originated the call, this is the
Outbound Phone Number.
1
Only appears for a constituent frame relay link.
2
If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle, the Remote Call ID, ISDN Channel, and
Negotiated Rate fields will not appear.
3
Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame
relay links.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages
The following Cause Value Messages are presented in alphabetical order. The
Cause Number is also provided if you need to convert the message to its
corresponding ITU number for your service provider.
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (1 of 6)
Cause
Message
No.
What It Indicates
What To Do
Bearer Capability
Not Authorized
57
User has requested a
bearer capability that the
user is not authorized to
use.
Arrange for the desired
capability.
Bearer Capability
not Implemented
65
58
7
Device sending this cause
does not support the bearer capability.
capability (i.e., channel
Arrange for the desired
type) requested.
Bearer Capability
Presently Not
Available
Bearer capability requested Arrange for the desired
is supported by the device
generating the cause, but it
is not available at this time.
capability.
Call Awarded and
Being Delivered in
Est Chnl-7
An incoming call is being
connected to an already
established channel that is
used for similar calls.
No action is needed.
Call Rejected
21
Equipment sending the
cause does not want to
receive the call at this time.
No action is needed.
1. Retry the call.
Call Terminated by
Remote End
130
Remote DBM rejected or
terminated the call.
2. Verify that the remote
DBM’s link profile is
correct.
Call With Requested 86
Call ID Has Been
Cleared
Network has received a call No action is needed.
resume request, but the call
had been cleared after it
was suspended.
Channel Type Not
Implemented
66
6
Device sending this cause
does not support the
requested channel type.
Arrange for the desired
capability.
Channel
Channel identified for the
Arrange for the desired
Unacceptable
call is not acceptable to the capability.
receiving device.
Destination Out of
Order
27
Destination interface
Verify that the remote
DBM’s link profile is correct.
specified is not functioning
correctly so the signalling
message could not be
delivered (e.g., physical or
data-link layer failure at the
remote end, user
equipment is offline).
7-42
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (2 of 6)
Cause
No.
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Facility Rejected
29
54
88
Requested facility is not
provided by the network.
No action is needed.
Incoming Calls
Barred
Called user is not permitted Turn off network call
to accept the call.
screening.
Incompatible
Destination
Request to establish a call
has been received, but
low-layer, high-layer, or
another compatibility
Arrange for the desired
capability.
attribute (e.g., data rate)
cannot be provided.
Incorrect format of the
destination link.
Identified Channel
Does Not Exist
82
99
Channel requested for a call Make sure the network is
is not activated on the
interface.
configured for 2B service, if
a BRI DBM. Contact your
service provider to verify
that your service is
provisioned for two
B-channels.
Info Element
Nonexistent or
Nonimplemented
Device sending this cause
has received a message it
does not recognize.
1. Verify that the Inbound
Calling ID has been
defined.
This cause will not prevent
the message from being
precessed.
2. Verify that the Inbound
Calling ID is part of your
service.
Interworking,
Unspecified
127
81
Precise cause of a
message cannot be
determined because the
interworking network does
not provide causes.
No action is needed.
Invalid Call
Reference Value
Call reference used is not
currently in use on the
user-network interface.
Contact your service
representative.
Invalid Info Element 100
Contents
Device sending this cause
has received and
Contact your service
representative.
implemented an information
element, but one or more
fields in the element cannot
be processed.
Invalid Message,
Unspecified
95
28
No other cause in the
invalid message class
applies for this invalid
message event.
Contact your service
representative.
Invalid Number
Format – Incomplete
Address
Call cannot be completed
because the phone number profile, and correct the
is incorrect or incomplete. number.
Check your ISDN link
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (3 of 6)
Cause
No.
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Invalid Transit
Network Selection
91
Incorrect format of transit
network identification.
Contact your service
representative.
Mandatory
Information Element
Missing
96
Required data is missing
from a mandatory
information element.
Contact your service
representative.
Message Not
Compatible with Call
State
101
Device sending this cause
has received a message
that is not permissible while
in the call state.
Contact your service
representative.
Msg Nonexistent
98
97
An unexpected message
was received in a state
other than Null.
Retry the call.
Msg Type
Nonexistent or
Unimplemented
Device sending this cause
has received a nonexistent
or not implemented
Contact your service
representative.
message type while in the
call state.
Device sending this cause
has received a status
message that indicates an
incompatible call state.
Network Out of
Order
38
Network is not functioning
correctly, and the condition representative.
is expected to continue.
Contact your service
No Call Suspended 85
A call resume has been
issued, but no calls have
been suspended.
No action is needed.
No Circuit/Channel
Available
34
3
No circuit/channel is
currently available to handle
the call.
Wait and try again.
No Destination
Route
Network through which call Contact your service
has been routed does not
serve the destination area
or device.
representative.
None
—
26
2
No causes have been
generated.
No action is needed.
Non-selected User
Clearing
User has not been awarded No action is needed.
the incoming call.
No Route to Specify
Transit Network
The device sending or
receiving this cause does
not recognize the transit
network that the call is
being/has been routed
through.
1. Verify that the network
exists.
2. Verify that the network
serves the device
sending the cause.
7-44
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (4 of 6)
Cause
No.
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Normal Call
Clearing
16
Call is being cleared
because either the caller or
receiver has requested that
it be cleared.
No action is needed.
Normal, Unspecified 31
Remote user has sent a
release message to the
network.
No action is needed.
No other cause in the
normal class applies for this
normal event.
No User
Responding
18
Called device does not
respond to the call with an
alert or connect indication
within the prescribed period
of time.
Contact the network
provider if the cause
continues.
Internal network timers may
be a cause.
Number Changed
22
70
Called number is no longer Look in the diagnostic field
assigned.
for the new number, then
change the phone number
in your ISDN link profile.
Only Restricted
Bearer Capability
Available
An unrestricted bearer
service has been
Arrange for the desired
capability.
requested, but the device
sending the cause only
supports the restricted
version.
Outgoing Calls
Barred
52
Network is using Call
Screening.
Contact the network
provider to turn Call
Screening off.
Pre-empted
45
Call has been pre-empted.
No other cause in the
protocol error class applies representative.
for this protocol error event.
Contact the network
provider.
Protocol Error,
Unspecified
111
Contact your service
Quality of Service
Unavailable
49
Requested Quality of
Service requested cannot
be provided (e.g.,
No action is needed.
throughput cannot be
supported).
Recovery of Timer
Expired
102
Error-handling procedure
has been initiated as a
result of the expiration of a
timer.
Retry the call.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (5 of 6)
Cause
No.
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Requested Channel 44
Not Available
Circuit or channel
Allow the DBM to
requested cannot be
provided by the other side
of the interface.
automatically call using the
alternate link if Auto Backup
is enabled, or manually
select an alternate path for
the call.
Requested Facility
Not Implemented
69
50
Supplemental service
requested is not supported
by this device.
No action is needed.
Requested Facility
Not Subscribed
The supplementary service Arrange for the desired
requested cannot be
provided by the network
until user completes
arrangement with its
supporting networks.
capability.
Resource
Unavailable,
Unspecified
47
No other cause in the
resource unavailable class
applies for this resource
unavailable event.
No action is needed.
Response to
STATus ENQuiry
30
79
Status enquiry message
received, generating this
message.
No action is needed.
No action is needed.
Service/Option Not
Implemented
No other cause in the
service or option not
available class applies for
this not implemented event.
Service/Option
Unavailable,
Unspecified
63
No other cause in the
service or option not
available class applies for
this not available event.
Wait and try again.
Wait and try again.
Switching
Equipment
Congestion
42
83
Switching equipment
sending the cause is
experiencing heavy traffic.
Suspended Call
Exists, But Not Call
ID
A call resume has been
attempted, but no
suspended call exists for
this phone number.
1. Verify the number in the
Inbound Calling ID #
field for the suspended
call.
2. Reissue the Call
Resume command using
the correct number.
Temporary Failure
41
Network is not functioning
correctly, but the condition
is not expected to continue
for long.
Wait and try again.
7-46
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-14. Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages (6 of 6)
Cause
No.
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Unallocated Number
1
Destination requested
Assign the Inbound Calling
cannot be reached because ID.
the Inbound Calling ID
number is not assigned or
allocated.
User Access
Information
Discarded
43
19
Network was unable to
deliver the access
information when trying to
establish the call.
No action is needed.
User Alerting, No
Answer
During call establishment,
an alerting was received but
a connection was not.
1. Verify that the remote
device is operational and
configured to answer.
2. Retry the call.
User Busy
17
Called number cannot
receive the call.
Wait and try again.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
IP Routing Table
The IP Routing Table shows all the routes configured in the FrameSaver unit.
Main Menu→ Status→ IP Routing Table
IP Routing Table Screen Example
main/status/ip_route
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
Page 1 of 2
IP ROUTING TABLE
Gateway
Destination
Mask
Hop
Type Interface
TTL
135.001.001.000 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 FFF.FFF.FFF.FFF 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.220.000 255.255.255.00 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.221.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.220.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.222.111 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.222.113 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
Tmp PVCMgmt1001
NMS PVCMgmt1002
Loc Ethernet
Loc Modem
Loc COM
RIP Modem
RIP PVCMgmt1003
NMS PVCMgmt1004
NMS PVCMgmt1005
NMS CMgmt1006
130
130
999
999
999
30
30
2
48
21
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
PgDn
PgUp
The table is sorted by the Destination IP address, from the lowest number to the
highest. If no routes exist, the No Routesmessage appears instead of routing
information.
Table 7-15. IP Routing Table Values (1 of 2)
Column
What It Indicates
Destination
The Destination IP Address for the route: 001.000.000.000 –
223.255.255.255
Mask
The Destination Subnet Mask for the route:
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 for network routes
FFF.FFF.FFF.FFF for host routes
127 may appear as well. It is a reserved number.
Gateway
Hop
The Gateway IP Address for the route: 001.000.000.000 –
223.255.255.255
The number of hops in the route to the destination (1–15). If
16 appears, the route is in the process of being aged out.
7-48
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-15. IP Routing Table Values (2 of 2)
Column
What It Indicates
Type
The method used to add the route to the table.
RIP: The route was discovered through Routing Information
Protocol.
The route remains until its TTL (Time to Live) expires, a better
route is provided via RIP, or there is a power reset.
Loc: The route was added due to the FrameSaver unit’s local
configuration; a Default IP Address or an SNMP Manager Initial
Route Destination have been configured.
The route remains until the unit’s configuration changes.
NMS: The route was added by a Network Management System
using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).
The route remains until there is a power reset of the unit.
ICMP: The route was added because an ICMP (Internet Control
Management Protocol) redirect message was received from a
router indicating a better route to the destination. That is, a
datagram was sent to a router and the router is informing the
datagram source through an ICMP redirect message of a better
route.
Tmp: The route was added as a temporary route in order to
respond to an IP packet that was received.
The route remains until its TTL expires or there is a power reset.
Interface
Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination.
COM: Communications port
PVCname: Name of the management PVC (e.g., PVCMgmt1001)
Internal: The interface to be used for software loopbacks or internal
device functions in order to reach the destination.
TTL
The Time to Live that was set for the route, in seconds: 1 – 999. If
999 appears, the route is a permanent one.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Performance Statistics
Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a
selected interface. Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the
severity and frequency or duration of a condition.
Main Menu→ Status→ Performance Statistics
Physical and link layer statistics (Layers 1 and 2) are collected on the port. The
following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected.
Performance Statistics Menu
main/status/performance
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Service Level Verification
DLCI
Frame Relay
ESF Line
DBM Call
Ethernet
Clear All Statistics
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
DBM Call Statistics only appear when the FrameSaver unit has the ISDN DBM
feature, and Ethernet only appears for the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II or 9128-II.
7-50
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Clearing Performance Statistics
Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a
directly-connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is
Level-1. This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems.
Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature. True statistic counts
are always maintained so SLAs can be verified, and they can be viewed from an
SNMP NMS. However, since statistics can be cleared locally, the statistics viewed
via the menu-driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the
NMS.
Procedure
To clear all statistics:
Performance Statistics → Clear All Statistics
Procedure
To clear specific sets of statistics:
Use the ClrSLV&DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI
performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the
following screens:
Performance Statistics→ Service Level Verification
Performance Statistics→ DLCI
Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance
statistics.
Performance Statistics→ Frame Relay
Use the ClrNearStats or ClrFarStats function key to reset all near-end or all
far-end Extended SuperFrame (ESF) line performance statistics.
Performance Statistics→ ESF Line
Use the ClrDBMStats function key to reset the DBM call performance
statistics.
Performance Statistics→ DBM Call
Use the ClrStats function key to reset all Ethernet port performance statistics.
Performance Statistics→ Ethernet
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics
These statistics appear when Service Level Verification (SLV) is selected from the
Performance Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics→ Service Level Verification
They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCIs are multiplexed or IP
Enabled.
Information displayed on the SLV Performance Statistics screen depends on DLCI
On either screen, select PrevDLCI or NextDLCI to view statistics for the previous
or next DLCI on the link. On the IP Enabled DLCI screen, select PrevPath or
NextPath to view statistics for the previous or next path associated with the DLCI.
For standard or multiplexed DLCIs, the statistics collected by the unit depend upon
the device at the far end of the connection. If the far-end device is a FrameSaver
SLV unit, frame relay, latency, and FDR/DDR performance statistics are collected.
The Frame Relay Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered frames/offered frames;
the Data Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered octets/offered octets.
If the far-end device is a non-FrameSaver device, or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620,
only frame relay statistics are collected.
Table 7-16. SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI (1 of 3)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Far End Circuit
Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI/VCI (Virtual Path
Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier) at the other end of the
connection.
If the far-end circuit is a DLCI, the DLCI number (16–1007)
appears. If a VPI/VCI, the number is displayed as xx,yyy, xx
being the VPI number (0 –15) and yyy being the VCI number
(32–2047).
Noneappears if the unit has not communicated with the other
end.
Far End IP Addr
IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed
DLCI connection.
Noneappears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated
with the other end, or if the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured.
Dropped SLV
Responses
The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a
response from the far-end device has not been received.
* Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is
enabled.
7-52
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-16. SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI (2 of 3)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Inbound Dropped
Frames
Total number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were dropped in transit.
*
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is
32
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.
be enabled for these statistics to appear.
Above CIR*
The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the committed information rate and were
dropped in transit.
Within CIR *
The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were within the committed information rate, but were dropped
in transit.
Between CIR&EIR *
Above EIR *
The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were between the committed information rate and excess
information rate, and were dropped in transit.
The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the excess information rate and were dropped in
transit.
Inbound Dropped
Characters *
Total number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were dropped in transit.
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is
32
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.
be enabled for these statistics to appear. NAappears instead of
a statistical count if FDR/DDR (Frame Delivery Ratio/Data
Delivery Ratio) information is not being received from the
far-end device.
Above CIR *
The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the committed information rate and were
dropped in transit.
Within CIR *
The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were within the committed information rate, but were dropped
in transit.
Between CIR&EIR *
Above EIR*
The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were between the committed information rate and excess
information rate, and were dropped in transit.
The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the excess information rate and were dropped in
transit.
* Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is
enabled.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-16. SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI (3 of 3)
Statistic What It Indicates
Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI connection.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device is not
successful.
Avg RdTrip Latency
Average round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI connection.
Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling
interval and the average is computed (using packets with the
the previous 15 samples. If SLV Packet Size is changed, a new
average is not available until a new sample has been received.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device over the
last 15 samples has not been successful.
Max RdTrip Latency
Same as average (Avg RdTrip Latency), but storing the
maximum value of latency over the previous 15 samples.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device over the
last 15 samples has not been successful.
* Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is
enabled.
7-54
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
For an IP Enabled DLCI, statistics are shown for last, minimum, average, and
maximum round trips, and for dropped SLV responses, for each of the seven
classes of service.
Table 7-17. SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI (1 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Far End IPAddr
IP Address of the device at the other end of the DLCI
connection.
Noneappears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated
with the other end, or if the device at the other end of the DLCI
does not have an IP Address configured.
Path Up Time
Far End Circuit
The number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the last
transition of this DLCI from Inactive to Active.
Number of the DLCI at the other end of the connection.
Noneappears if the unit has not communicated with the other
end.
SLM Poll Type
The role played by the far-end FrameSaver in the collection of
latency and availability statistics.
Initiator – The far-end FrameSaver initiates the SLV packet
used for statistics collection.
Responder – The far-end FrameSaver returns the SLV packet
sent by the Initiator.
Far End Name
The system name configured for the far-end FrameSaver
device, obtained using its IP address. Unknownappears if the
far end device is not a FrameSaver or if no response has been
received since the last reset.
COS Type
Mismatches
The number of SLV packets received that indicate a mismatch
between the Class of Service definitions in the near-end and
far-end devices.
Far End Type
COS Name
The model type of the far-end FrameSaver device, obtained
using its IP address. Unknownappears if the far end device is
not a FrameSaver or if no response has been received since the
last reset.
The names for different Classes of Service defined using the
Class of Service Definitions screen. See Configuring Class of
COS ID
The ID numbers (1–7) of the Class of Service definitions.
Last RdTrip
Current round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI
connection.
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device is
not successful.
Min RdTrip
Minimum round trip latency measured over the last 15 samples
between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of
the DLCI connection.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device over the
last 15 samples has not been successful.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-17. SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI (2 of 2)
Statistic
Avg RdTrip
What It Indicates
Average round trip latency between the FrameSaver unit and the
device at the other end of the DLCI connection.
Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling
interval and the average is computed (using packets with the
Size is changed, a new average is not available until a new
sample has been received.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device over the
last 15 samples has not been successful.
Max RdTrip
Same as average (Avg RdTrip), but storing the maximum value
of latency over the previous 15 samples.
“--”appears if communication with the far-end device over the
last 15 samples has not been successful.
Dropped SLV
Responses
The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which no
response from the far-end device has been received.
7-56
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
DLCI Performance Statistics
These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics
menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics→ DLCI
Table 7-18. DLCI Performance Statistics (1 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
DLCI Up Since *
Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a
period of inactivity. Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive.
If the DLCI was Down, this is the time that the DLCI recovered.
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the first time the unit
discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.
DLCI Up Time *
Days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the DLCI was last
declared Active after a period of inactivity. Down is displayed if
the DLCI is inactive.
If the DLCI was Down, this is the amount of time since the DLCI
recovered.
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the amount of time since the
unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.
Total Tx Frames/
Tx Octets
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes) transmitted
for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.
Within CIR
The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were
within the committed information rate.
Between CIR&EIR
The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were
between the committed information rate and excess
information rate.
Above EIR
The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above
the excess information rate.
With DE Set
The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI
of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.
With BECN Set
The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI
of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion
notifications.
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN
indicator.
* Only appears for the network interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-18. DLCI Performance Statistics (2 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Total Rx Frames/
Rx Octets
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes) received for
the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.
Within CIR
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed
information rate.
Between CIR&EIR
Above EIR
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed
information rate and excess information rate.
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess
information rate.
With DE Set
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.
With BECN Set
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion
notifications.
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN
indicator.
With FECN Set
The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion
notifications.
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the
FECN indicator.
* Only appears for the network interface.
7-58
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI
If the selected DLCI is IP Enabled, the DLCI Performance Statistics screen has a
second page listing statistics by Class of Service. On the first DLCI Performance
Statistics page for an IP Enabled DLCI, PgUp and PgDn are shown as available
commands in the function keys area of the screen. Select PgUp or PgDn to display
the second page.
Table 7-19. Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI
Statistic
What It Indicates
Class of Svc Name
The names for different Classes of Service defined using the
Class of Service Definitions screen. See Configuring Class of
Class of Svc ID
The ID numbers (1–7) of the Class of Service definitions.
The following IP statistics are shown for:
The seven Classes of Service
Unknown COS – IP packets whose Type of Service values do not match those
defined for any Class of Service
Non-IP – Packets that were not IP Version 4
Total – The total for all packets
Tx Packets
Tx Octets
Rx Packets
Rx Octets
Rx Errors
The number of packets transmitted
The number of octets in the packets transmitted
The number of packets received
The number of octets in the packets received
The number of packets received in error
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Frame Relay Performance Statistics
The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the
Performance Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics→ Frame Relay
32
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2), then
the count starts over. The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when
multiple frame relay links have been configured.
For FrameSaver units with an ISDN DBM:
All enabled multilink aggregate links are available for selection from the Frame
Relay Performance Statistics screen. The multilink aggregate link must be enabled
if statistics are to be collected for this frame relay link. When the frame relay link is
the multilink aggregate link, statistics for its related constituent links can be viewed.
To view the statistics for a multilink constituent link, select the ConstLinkStats
function key. All enabled multilink constituent links become available for selection.
Select the desired constituent link from the Multilink Constituent Link field.
The frame relay performance statistics collected for any frame relay link are
collected for multilink frame relay links, unless the link is a multilink aggregate link.
In this case, statistics for Frame Relay LMI and Frame Relay HDLC Errors are not
collected; these statistics are available for multilink constituent links only.
Table 7-20. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (1 of 4)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Frame Relay Link
Frames Sent
The number of frames sent over the interface.
Frames Received
Characters Sent
Characters Received
FECNs Received
The number of frames received over the interface.
The number of data octets (bytes) sent over the interface.
The number of data octets (bytes) received over the interface.
The number of forward explicit congestion notifications received
over the interface.
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN
indicator.
BECNs Received
The number of backward explicit congestion notifications
received over the interface.
The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the
BECN indicator.
7-60
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-20. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (2 of 4)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Frame Relay Errors
Total Errors
The number of total frame relay errors, excluding LMI errors.
Short frames, long frames, invalid DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and
unknown errors are included in this total.
Indicates that there may be a non-frame relay device on the
other end of the link, or the units at either the far end or both
ends of the link may be configured incorrectly.
Invalid Rx Frames
Short Rx Frames
The number of invalid frames received over the Network or
Port-1 interface.
There is a non-frame relay device on the other end of the link.
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1
interface that were less than 5-octets (five 8-bit bytes) in length.
There may be a non-frame relay device on the other end of the
link.
Long Rx Frames
Invalid DLCI
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1
interface that were more than 8192-octets in length.
The device on the far end of the link may be configured
incorrectly.
The number of frames received over the interface that were
addressed to DLCIs outside the valid range; that is, a number
less than 16 or greater than 1007.
The device on the far end of the circuit may have been
configured incorrectly, or the DLCIs configured for the
FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCIs supplied by the
service provider.
Unknown DLCI
Unknown Error
The number of frames received over the interface that were
addressed to unknown DLCIs.
The DLCI may not have been configured, or it has been
configured to be Inactive.
Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either
end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly.
The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall
into one of the other statistic categories.
Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-20. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (3 of 4)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Frame Relay LMI
LMI Protocol
The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link.
Normal condition.
Status Msg Received
Total LMI Errors
The number of LMI status messages received over the interface.
Normal condition.
The number of LMI errors. Reliability errors, protocol errors,
unknown report types, unknown information elements, and
sequence errors are included in this total.
Network problems.
Number of Inactives
The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link
Inactive.
Network problems.
7-62
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Table 7-20. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (4 of 4)
Statistic What It Indicates
Frame Relay HDLC Errors
Rx Total Errors
The number of receiver errors on the interface. The following are
included in this count:
Receive invalid frames (short frames, long frames, invalid
DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and unknown errors)
Rx Total Discards
Receive errors (non-octet aligned frames, frames with CRC
errors, and Rx Overruns)
Rx Total Discards
The number of receiver discards on the interface. The following
are included in this count:
Resource errors
Rx Overruns
Frames received when the link was down
Inactive and disconnected DLCIs
Inactive destination DLCIs
Unknown EDLCIs
Rx Overruns
The number of receiver overruns (too many bits) on the
interface.
Rx Non-Octet Frames The number of non-octet frames received on the interface.
Rx CRC Errors
Tx Total Errors
The number of received CRC (cycle redundancy check) errors.
The total number of transmit errors on the interface, including
transmits discards and transmit overruns.
Tx Total Discards
Tx Underruns
The total number of transmit discards on the interface, including
underrun flushes.
The number of transmitter underruns (too few bits) on the
interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
ESF Line Performance Statistics
These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics
menu for the network interface.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics→ ESF Line
Only seven T1 network statistical intervals appear on the screen at any one time.
You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering:
Interval Number (01–96)
– or –
Time (Hours and Minutes)
NOTES:
— Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one;
Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one, etc.
— Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a
specific event occurred is known.
Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10, 13, or 16. When Enter is pressed,
the values change to the selected range.
To select intervals . . .
You must enter an interval or time on . . .
Occurring on and before a
selected interval or time
Line 10. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 6 intervals recorded before it.
Bracketing a selected
interval or time
Line 13. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals
recorded after it.
Occurring on and after a
selected interval or time
Line 16. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 6 intervals recorded after it.
7-64
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example
main/status/performance/esf
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
05/26/2000 23:32
Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Current Interval Timer
Near=123 Far = 124
ESF Error Events
Near = 15 Far = 12
---ES--
--UAS--
--SES--
--BES--
--CSS--
-LOFC--
Time
Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far
Current: 10:37
Int 01: 10:35
Int 02: 10:20
Int 03: 10:05
Int 04: 09:50
Int 05: 09:35
Int 06: 09:20
Int 07: 09:05
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Line 10
Line 13
Line 16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Worst Interval:
Near Tot(valid 96): 00010
Far Tot(valid 96): 00010
24 24
14 14
00000
00000
14 14
00000
00000
09 09
00000
00000
18 16
002
44 44
003
002
003
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats
Select: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09 ...
For the ESF line performance statistics, the following performance statistics are
kept for each 15-minute interval over the past 24-hour period. A Near set and a Far
set are kept for each statistic. The Far set is based on information kept by the unit
at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI performance
report messages are enabled in the unit.
Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes:
Near/Far Current Interval Timer – Contains the number of seconds that have
elapsed in the current 15-minute interval for the near or far information, which
can show a value up to 900 seconds.
Near/Far ESF Error Events – Maintains a count of ESF error events, as
specified by AT&T TR 54016, which counts CRC and OOF events. A
maximum of 65,535 error events can be counted. Once 65535 is reached, it
stays at that number until the network issues a reset command.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions.
Table 7-21. ESF Line Condition Performance Statistics
Statistic What It Indicates
Errored Seconds (ES) Any second with one or more ESF Error events.
Unavailable Seconds
(UAS)
Any second in which service is unavailable. Begins incrementing
at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored
seconds (SES), and stops incrementing after 10 consecutive
seconds of no SESs.
Severely Errored
Seconds (SES)
Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Out Of
Frame (OOF) events.
Bursty Errored
Seconds (BES)
Any second with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.
Controlled Slip
Seconds (CSS)
Any second with one or more controlled slips (a replication or
deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device). This is
collected for network performance statistics only.
Loss of Frame Count
(LOFC)
The number of Loss of Frame conditions.
Worst Interval
The largest number of seconds for either ES, UAS, SES, BES,
or CSS, or the greatest Loss of Frame Count (LOFC).
If more than one interval contains the same worst value, then the
oldest interval is displayed.
7-66
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
DBM Call Performance Statistics
When an ISDN DBM is installed, these statistics are available for ISDN calls and
call attempts.
You can clear these statistics by selecting the ClrDBMStats function key, or you
can clear all performance statistics for the system.
Main Menu→ Status→ Performance Statistics→ Clear All Statistics
Clearing these statistics will not affect performance statistics stored in user history
for the system. The statistics are only cleared locally.
Table 7-22. DBM Call Performance Statistics
Statistic
What It Indicates
Total Call Attempts
Total Calls Originated
Total Calls Answered
Number of call attempts made by the DBM.
Number of successful calls made by the DBM.
Number of successful calls answered by the DBM.
Total Calls Rejected (Security) Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to security.
Total Calls Rejected (Other)
Average Call Duration (mins)
Longest Call Duration (mins)
Total Call Duration (mins)
Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to reasons
other than security, like incoming voice call requests.
Average amount of time, in minutes, that successful calls
take.
Amount of time spent, in minutes, during the longest
successful call.
Sum of all successful calls in minutes.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Ethernet Performance Statistics
The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance
Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics→ Ethernet
Table 7-23. Ethernet Performance Statistics
Statistic
What It Indicates
Port Rate (Mbps)
The operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port. One of the
following may appear for this statistic:
Disconnected – The line is not connected.
10 Mbps or 100 Mbps – The Ethernet port is operating at this
rate.
Disabled – The Ethernet port has been disabled.
Duplex
The duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port. One of the
following may appear for this statistic:
Disconnected – The line is not connected.
Full – The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode
(4-wire).
Half – The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode
(2-wire).
Disabled – The Ethernet port has been disabled.
The number of successfully transmitted frames on the port.
The number of frames received on the port.
Frames Transmitted
Frames Received
Errored Frames
The number of errors detected on the port. Possible errors
include:
Internal transmit and receive errors
Transmitter and receiver overruns
Receive checksum errors
Alignment errors
Long frames
Excessive Collisions
Carrier Sense Errors
The number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive
collisions.
The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost, or was
never asserted, during frame transmissions.
Deferred
Transmissions
The number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being
busy.
7-68
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Trap Event Log
The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log. The
following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP
trap for a physical interface, and for the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These alarm
conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the Health and
Main Menu→ Status → Trap Event Log
Trap Event Log Screen Example
main/status/event_log
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
TRAP EVENT LOG
Total Trap Events: 535
Time Elapsed
Since Event
Event
0d 23:59:59 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync
Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1" exceeded threshold of 1
by 105.
2d 23:59:59 Change in Total LMI Errors on Network T1 frame relay link
“Net1-FR1" exceeded threshold of 1 by 59.
6d 23:59:59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1" up.
10d 23:59:59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1" down.
20d 23:59:59 Primary clock failed.
56d 23:59:59 Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1" LMI down.
64d 23:59:59 Network T1 frame relay link “Net1-FR1" LMI down.
122d 23:59:59 Network T1 down.
364d 23:59:59 Unit reset.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Refresh
PgUp
PgDn
Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen, the most current first. Page
down (PgDn) to view less current trap events. When no trap events have been
logged, No Events in Log.appears in the Event column.
ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Modem Operation
This section includes the following:
information.
Activating the Modem PassThru Feature
Access to the router’s VT100-compatible user interface is provided through the
FrameSaver unit’s Modem PassThru feature, also known as Router Assist. A
dial-up connection to the FrameSaver unit is used to access the router when the
operation.
Once the unit is set up to use this feature, each time access to the router is
needed, the feature is activated from the Control menu.
Main Menu→ Control→ Enable Modem PassThru to COM
When this feature is active, a logical connection between the unit’s modem and
COM ports is made, and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the
COM port to the router’s AUX or console port, and data received from the router
on the COM port is transmitted out the modem port. While Modem PassThru is
active, normal access to the FrameSaver unit through either its modem or COM
port is suspended.
When an escape sequence (minus, minus, minus, with a minimum of 50 ms
between each) is detected, the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user
interface operation.
Canceling Modem PassThru Operation
When Modem PassThru is active, but access to the FrameSaver unit’s
menu-driven user interface is needed, Modem PassThru can be cancelled from
the Control menu.
Main Menu→ Control→ Disable Modem PassThru to COM
7-70
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Manually Disconnecting the Modem
If Trap Disconnect is disabled, a modem connection remains until it is manually
disconnected. Select Disconnect Modem from the Control menu.
Main Menu→ Control→ Disconnect Modem
Respond yes to the Are you sure?prompt.
Verifying Modem Operation
Procedure
If Port Use is set to Terminal (dial-in access):
1. Dial the modem’s phone number using a remote VT100-compatible
asynchronous terminal or PC.
2. Verify that the Main Menu appears.
Procedure
If Port Use is set to Net Link (SNMP, Telnet, FTP, and trap dial-out):
1. Dial the modem’s phone number using a PC running PPP or SLIP link
protocol.
2. From the PC, run an IP Ping test to the modem interface.
If your results using either method are unsuccessful, make sure both ends of the
modem cable are properly seated and secured. Then, verify that the modem was
Options).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
ISDN DBM Operation
The following sections only apply to units with an ISDN DBM:
Forcing Backup (Disruptive)
Use this procedure to force backup when network maintenance is planned, when
equipment problems are reported, or when testing the backup path – whenever
data needs to be forced from the primary destination interface to the alternate
destination, typically from the T1 network to the ISDN.
Procedure
1. Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles are set up correctly, Auto Backup is enabled,
2. Have someone at the far end disconnect the network cable to initiate backup.
3. Verify that backup is taking place.
NOTE:
When an alarm requiring backup is received, backup can be manually
4. Have the far-end network cable reconnected to return to standard operation.
7-72
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Placing a Test Call (Nondisruptive)
Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site. This procedure will
not put the system into backup.
Procedure
1. Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles and DLCIs are set up correctly for the DBMs
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ Link Profiles
Main Menu→ Configuration→ ISDN→ DLCI Records
2. Place a Test Call from one of the devices.
Main Menu→ Test → ISDN Call/PVC Tests
— Select the link to be tested.
— Start a Test Call. The Status should be Active.
If the Result is . . .
Then . . .
Frame Relay Link Up
Frame Relay Link Down
The call was successful.
The call was not successful. Verify the configuration and
Link Status in the ISDN Link Profile.
— Select Stop to end the Test Call.
Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site. This procedure will
not put the unit into backup.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Verifying ISDN Lines
Use either of the following methods to verify operation of the ISDN lines.
Check the status of the DBM interface:
Main Menu→ Status→ DBM Interface Status
Line Status should display Active. If an invalid (Inv) status appears (e.g., Inv
SPID for an ISDN BRI DBM) in the Line Status field, verify that you entered
ISDN physical options correctly.
Check the status of the unit:
Main Menu→ Status→ System and Test Status→
Health and Status column
System Operationalshould appear.
If ISDN Network Failedappears, check that both ends of the ISDN cable
are seated properly for a good physical connection. If that does not clear the
message, verify that you entered ISDN physical option information correctly,
then contact the network service provider.
Verifying That Backup Can Take Place
As each remote site is installed, verify its backup operation by unplugging the
network cable so the system is forced into backup.
Verify the ISDN lines by checking the DBM Interface Status.
Main Menu→ Status→ DBM Interface Status
Line Status should be Active. If an invalid (Inv) status (e.g., Inv SPID) is
displayed, verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly.
Check backup setup and that data can be passed between DBMs.
Reconnect the network cable.
information.
7-74
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
FTP File Transfers
The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server over
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). A complete binary image of the
configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup. To use this feature,
the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions.
Using this feature, you can transfer configuration files to/from a FrameSaver node,
program files to a FrameSaver node, and User History data from a FrameSaver
node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC,
or through the COM port.
Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer:
You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands,
and to access the LMI packet capture data. However, you can retrieve the data
file for the user history reports regardless of access level.
You cannot put a configuration file to the factory.cfg or current.cfg files under
the system directory. Configuration files should be put to a customer file
(cust1.cfg or cust2.cfg), then loaded into the downloaded unit’s Current
Configuration via the menu-driven user interface.
You can only put a NAM program file (nam.ocd) into a FrameSaver unit. You
cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host.
Before putting a download file, you must use the bin binary command to place
the data connection in binary transfer mode.
When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS, you can only get a
uhbcfull.dat file. It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get
A data file (uhbcfull.dat or lmitrace.syc) cannot be put into a FrameSaver
node.
LMI packet capture data (lmitrace.syc) is not readable when the LMI Packet
Capture Utility is active.
FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be
downloaded in the background, using the selected bandwidth and without
interfering with normal operation. Downloads can be performed quickly, using the
full line speed, or at a slower rate over an extended period of time.
You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would
initiate an FTP to any other IP-addressable device.
NOTE:
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer
Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take
time. Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit’s
currently active configuration.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Procedure
To initiate an FTP session:
1. Start the FTP client program on your host. For example, on a UNIX host,
type ftp, followed by the FrameSaver unit’s IP address.
Security and Logins), you are prompted to enter them. If not, press Enter.
The FTP prompt appears.
The starting directory is the root directory (/). Use standard FTP commands
during the FTP session, as well as the following remote FTP commands.
Command
Definition
cd directory
Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the
specified directory.
dir [directory]
get file1 [file2]
Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory.
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.
Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to
the local directory on the host (for configuration files only).
remotehelp
[command]
Print the meaning of the command. If no argument is given, a
list of all known commands is printed.
ls [directory]
Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory’s contents. If
no directory is specified, the current one is used.
put file1 [file2]
Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the
current directory of the FrameSaver node. If file2 is not
specified, the file will be named file1 on the FrameSaver node.
get
.
recv file1 [file 2]
send file1 [file 2]
pwd
Same as a
Same as a
put
.
Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit
node.
bin
Places the FTP session in binary-transfer mode.
7-76
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Upgrading System Software
If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit’s program code, you must transfer the
upgrade of the nam.ocd file in the system memory directory using the put
command.
NOTE:
Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC,
Procedure
To download software:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.
4. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
5. Perform a put of Rxxxxxx.ocd (xxxxxx being the software release number) to
the nam.ocd file to start the upgrade.
If the message displayed is . . . Then . . .
nam.ocd: File Transfer Complete The download was successful. The file is loaded
into system memory.
nam.ocd: File Transfer Failed –
The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit.
Invalid file
A different Rxxxxxx.ocd file will need to be
downloaded. Repeat the step or end the FTP
session.
NOTE:
During the download, a series of hash marks (#) appear. When the hash
marks stop appearing, there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the
nam.ocd: File Transfer Completemessage appears. Please be
patient. Do not exit from FTP at this time.
software.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software
A separate download to update PRI DBM functionality is not necessary; a PRI
upgrade is incorporated in the unit’s program code. However, if the FrameSaver
unit has a BRI DBM, the program code must be upgraded separately.
To upgrade a FrameSaver unit’s BRI DBM program code, you must transfer the
dbmprog.ocd file in the Dial Backup Module directory using the put command.
Procedure
To perform a BRI DBM upgrade:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.
3. Type cd dbm to change to the Dial Backup Module directory.
NOTE:
If the FrameSaver unit is not equipped with a DBM or the DBM does not
contain any downloadable software, the message dbm: no such file
or directoryappears.
4. Perform a put of Rxxxxxx.ocd (xxxxxx being the software release number) to
the dbmprog.ocd file to start the upgrade.
If the message displayed is . . .
Then . . .
DBM Download Required
Errors were detected during the DBM
download.
The dbmprog.ocd file will need to be
downloaded again.
dbmprog.ocd: File Transfer Complete The download was successful.
dbmprog.ocd: File Transfer Failed
The download was not successful.
Possible cause: A bad or invalid file, or the
wrong checksum.
A different dbmprog.ocd file will need to be
downloaded for the DBM to become
operational. Repeat the step or end the FTP
session.
5. Close the FTP session.
6. Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the DBM
Software Revision.
Main Menu→ Status→ Identity
7-78
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed
To see whether a download has completed, check the Identity screen.
Main Menu→ Status→ Identity
Check Alternate Software Rev. under the NAM Identity column.
If a software revision number appears, the file transfer is complete.
If In Progressappears, the file is still being transferred.
If Invalidappears, no download has occurred or the download was not
successful.
Changing Software
Once a software upgrade is downloaded, it needs to be activated. When activated,
the unit resets, then executes the downloaded software. With this feature, you
control when the upgrade software is implemented.
Procedure
To switch to the new software:
1. Go to the Control menu, and select Select Software Release.
Main Menu→ Control→ Select Software Release
The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just
transferred are shown.
If the download failed, Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field
instead of the new release number. Repeat the procedure Upgrading System
Software if this occurs.
2. Select Switch&Reset.
3. Enter Yes to the Are you sure? prompt. The unit resets and begins
installing the newly transferred software.
4. Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current
Software Revision.
Main Menu→ Status→ Identity
NOTE:
If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit’s Identity screen
while the unit is downloading software, the In Progress... message
appears in the Alternate Software Revision field.
unit’s Identity screen.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Transferring Collected Data
SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an
NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP, which is faster than other
methods. The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP
NOTE:
Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet
data; the data files are not in user-readable format. LMI packet capture data
information).
Procedure
To retrieve data:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data
will be retrieved.
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.
4. Type cd data to change to the data directory.
If retrieving . . .
Then . . .
get
uhbcfull.dat
file.
SLV statistics
Perform a
of the
File Transfer Complete– Transfer was
successful.
File Transfer Failed– Transfer was not
successful. Try again or end the session.
LMI packet capture data 1. Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility.
Main Menu→ Control→ LMI Packet Capture Utility
LMI packet capture data is not available (readable)
when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active.
get
lmitrace.syc
file.
2. Perform a
of the
One of the following will display for the file:
– File Transfer Complete
– File Transfer Failed
– Permission Denied– The LMI Packet Capture
Utility was not readable. Stop the LMI Packet
Capture Utility and try again.
5. Close the FTP session.
SLV statistics and/or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting.
7-80
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
Turning Off the System Alarm Relay
For carrier-mounted FrameSaver units, an alarm system relay is provided by the
9000 Series Access Carrier. This relay activates a light or buzzer when an alarm
condition is detected in one of the FrameSaver units.
Once the alarm relay is connected, enabling the System Alarm Relay option
Once activated, the relay is turned off in one of the following ways:
The alarm condition that activated the relay no longer exists. The relay stays
on until all alarm conditions have been corrected.
The System Alarm Relay option can be disabled.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ System→ General
System Alarm Relay Cut-Off can be selected.
Main Menu→ Control→ System Alarm Relay Cut-Off
Instructions for information about connecting the alarm relay.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
7-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Operation and Maintenance
7-82
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Problem Indicators
The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems:
Indicators . . .
See . . .
LEDs
interface screen.
Main Menu→ Status→
Display LEDs and Control LEDs
Health and Status
Main Menu→ Status→ System and Test Status
Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu-driven
user interface screen.
Performance statistics
Maintenance, to help you determine how long a problem
has existed.
Alarm conditions that will
generate an SNMP trap
SNMP traps
Traps supported include warm-start, authentication-failure,
enterprise-specific (those specific to the unit), link-up, and
link-down.
8-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication
You can reset the unit in one of four ways:
Reset it from the Control menu.
Cycle the power.
Reset the configuration options for the COM port, or reload the factory default
settings.
Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS (see your NMS documentation).
The unit performs a self-test when it is reset.
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu
Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power-on self-test of the unit.
Procedure
To reset the unit from the Control menu:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
2. Select Reset Device and press Enter. The Are You Sure?prompt appears.
3. Type y (Yes) and press Enter. The unit reinitializes itself, performing a self-test.
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power
Disconnecting, then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit
Configuring the unit improperly could render the menu-driven user interface
inaccessible. If this occurs, connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly
connected asynchronous terminal.
Procedure
To reset COM port settings:
1. Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19.2 Kbps, using character
length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity. In addition, set Flow Control to
None.
2. Reset the unit, then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen
for other methods of resetting the unit.)
3. Tab to the desired prompt, and type y (Yes) at one of the prompts.
If selecting . . .
The following occurs . . .
Reset COM Port usage
Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous
terminal can be used.
Data Rate (Kbps), Character Length, Stop Bits, and
Parity are reset to the factory defaults.
Unit resets itself.
Reload Factory Defaults
All configuration and control settings are reset to the
Default Factory Configuration, overwriting the
current configuration.
Unit resets itself.
CAUTION
: This causes the current configuration to be
destroyed and a self-test to be performed.
If no selection is made within 30 seconds, or if No (n) is entered, the unit
resets itself and no configuration changes are made.
Once the unit resets itself, connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen
appears.
8-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature
A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service
providers isolate device problems within their networks. This feature allows Telnet
or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is
essentially transparent to customer operations. No alarms or SNMP traps are
generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer.
additional information about this feature.
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature
A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI
errors are detected. Using this utility, any enabled frame relay link on the user data
port or network interface can be selected. The utility captures any LMI packets
sent or received and writes them to a data file called lmitrace.syc in the system’s
data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network
Associates Sniffer for analysis.
The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information. See
additional information on this feature.
Procedure
To use this utility:
1. Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility. Select an enabled frame relay link.
Main Menu→ Control→ LMI Packet Capture Utility
2. Select an enabled frame relay link, or Capture Interface, either Net1-FR1
Port-1, Port-2, or an ISDN Link Name if a DBM is present.
3. Start packet capture.
While capturing data, the status is Active. Packets in Buffer indicates the
number of packets that have been captured. Up to 8000 packets can be held.
When the buffer is full, the oldest packets will be overwritten.
4. To stop the utility, press Enter. The field toggles back to Start.
5. Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the
information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for
debugging/decoding.
additional information about this feature.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface
The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log. Once the capture
buffer or trace log is full, the oldest packets are overwritten. To view the most
recently captured packets using the menu-driven user interface:
LMI Packet Capture Utility→ Display LMI Trace Log
LMI Trace Log Example
main/control/lmi_capture/display_log
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
LMI TRACE LOG
Page 1 of 3
Packets Transmitted to Net1-FR!
LMI Record #1 at 0 s
Packets Received from Net1-FR1
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023
Sequence Number Exchange
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177
LMI Record #2 at 0 s
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023
Sequence Number Exchange
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgUp PgDn
Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI
messages.
The following information is provided:
The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet (1–8000), and the
amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured.
The maximum amount of time displayed is 4,294,967 seconds (s), which is
reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded.
The type of message, either Status or Status Enquiry, from the captured
packet, and the number of bytes in the packet.
The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured
packet, and the DLCI number for the packet.
The type of information contained in the captured packet, either Sequence
Number Exchange or Full Status Report.
The send and receive (rcv) sequence numbers from the captured packet
(0–255).
On the Packets Received side of the screen, PVC status for up to ten DLCIs
can be shown. It shows the DLCI number, its active bit status, and if Standard
LMI is running, the DLCI’s CIR value.
8-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Alarms
The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap
for a physical interface, and the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These alarm
conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and
Test Status screen.
Main Menu→ Status → System and Test Status
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (1 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
AIS at DSX-1
For the DSX-1 interface, the For the DSX-1 interface, check the
attached DTE is
DTE attached to the interface.
transmitting an AIS.
AIS at Network 1
An Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS) is being received by
the interface. AIS is an
For the network interface, report
the problem to your T1 service
provider.
unframed, all ones signal.
CTS down to
Port-1 Device
The CTS control lead on the Check DTR and RTS from Port-1.
device’s interface is off.
Verify that the port is enabled.
Check DTR from the user data
port.
DBM BRI Card Failed The ISDN BRI DBM failed
to pass the self-test.
Reset the FrameSaver unit (Main
Menu→ Control→ Reset Device).
If the DBM fails again, contact
your service representative.
DLCI nnnn Down,
frame relay link
The DLCI for the specified
frame relay link is down.
Verify that the network LMI is up. If
it is, contact your network
provider, or your ISDN service
provider if an ISDN Link Name is
the link.
DTR Down from Port-1 The DTR control lead on
Examine the attached DTE and
cable connected to the system’s
port.
Device
the device connected to
Port-n is disasserted.
The DTR control lead on
the device connected to the
specified port is off. This
message applies to data
ports that act as DCEs.
Check that the port cable is
securely attached at both ends.
Check the status of the
attached equipment.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (2 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
EER at Network 1
The error rate of the
Verify that the network cable is
securely attached at the
network interface.
received network signal
exceeds the currently
configured threshold. This
condition only occurs if the
network interface is
Contact your network provider.
configured for ESF framing.
This condition clears when
the error rate falls below the
threshold value, which may
take up to 15 minutes.
Ethernet Link Down
The communication link for Check the LAN connected to the
the Ethernet port is down
and the Interface Status for
the port is enabled.
Ethernet port.
Internal Modem Failed The unit’s internal modem
Reset the FrameSaver unit (Main
failed to pass the self-test.
Menu→ Control→ Reset Device).
If the modem fails again, contact
your service representative.
ISDN Link Profile
Disabled ISDN Link
Name
An ISDN backup call could
not be made because the
ISDN link profile specified
Link Name is disabled
(Main
Enable the ISDN link profile if you
want to make a call.
Menu→ Configuration→
ISDN→ Link Profiles).
ISDN Link Profile
Invalid,
ISDN Link Name
An ISDN backup call could
not be made because the
ISDN link profile specified
(ISDN Link Name) is invalid.
Check that the phone number is
correct.
ISDN Network Failed
(Active/Idle)
An ISDN network failure
was detected when a
backup call was in progress
or the DBM was in Idle
mode.
Contact your network provider if
the problem persists.
LatExceed-
IP_Address,
COSx,DLCInnnn
An IP SLV Latency
Threshold has been
exceeded for the specified
Class Of Service of the
path.
Contact your service provider.
1
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
2
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
8-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (3 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
Link Profile Disabled,
ISDN Link Name
An ISDN backup call could
not be made because the
specified link profile was
disabled.
Change the ISDN Link Profile’s
Link Status to Auto (Main
Menu→ Configuration→
ISDN→ Link Profiles).
LMI Down, frame relay The Local Management
For the network interface:
link
Interface is down for the
specified frame relay link.
If LMI was never up, verify that
the LMI Protocol setting
reflects the LMI type being
used.
If LMI was never up:
– Verify that the proper time
slots have been configured.
– Verify that the LMI Protocol
setting reflects the LMI type
being used.
Verify that Frame Relay
Performance Statistics show
LMI frames being transmitted.
If all of the above have been
verified and the physical link is not
in Alarm, contact your network
provider.
For user data port:
Check that the DTE cable is
securely attached at both ends.
Verify that Transmit Clock
Source and Invert Transmit
Clock options are properly
configured.
Verify that Frame Relay
Performance Statistics show
LMI frames being received. If
no frames are being received:
– Check the attached device.
– Verify that the LMI Protocol
setting reflects the LMI type
being used.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (4 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
LOS at DSX-1
A Loss of Signal (LOS)
condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface. Clears
when the ratio of ones to
zeros received is greater
than or equal to 12.5%.
DSX-1 cable problem.
Check that the DSX-1 cable is
securely attached at both ends.
No signal being
transmitted from the
DTE.
Check the DTE status.
LOS at Network 1
A Loss of Signal (LOS)
condition is detected on the
network interface. Clears
when the ratio of ones to
zeros received is greater
than or equal to 12.5%.
Network cable problem.
Check that the network cable is
securely attached at both ends.
No signal is being
transmitted at the far-end
FrameSaver unit.
Check far-end FrameSaver unit
status.
T1 facility problem.
Contact your network provider.
Network Com Link
Down
The communication link for Check the router connected to the
the COM port is down and
the COM port is configured
for Net Link.
COM port.
OOF at DSX-1
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface.
Incompatible framing
format between the DTE
and the FrameSaver
unit.
Check that the framing format
for the DSX-1 (DTE) interface
is correct.
DSX-1 cabling problem.
Check that the DSX-1 cable is
securely attached at both ends.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
8-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (5 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
OOF at Network 1
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected on the
network interface.
Incompatible framing
format between the
network and the
Check that the framing format
for the network interface is
correct.
FrameSaver unit.
Network cabling
problem.
Check that the network cable is
securely attached at both ends.
T1 facility problem.
Contact your network provider.
PathIP_ Address
Down, DLCInnnn
A path on the network
interface is unavailable.
Determine why the path went
down.
1
Power Supply/Fan
Alarm
The power supply output
Check the LEDs on the power
voltage has dropped below supply and fan trays to determine
the specified tolerance level which may have failed, then
required for the system. Or replace the failed component.
one or both fan trays are not
operating properly.
Primary Clock Failed
A failure of the configured
primary clock source for the
unit was detected and the
secondary clock is
Check that the network cable is
securely attached at both ends.
Contact your network provider.
providing the timing for the
unit.
This condition clears when
the configured primary
clock is restored.
Primary & Secondary
Clocks Failed
A failure of both clock
sources configured for the
unit was detected.
This condition only applies
to T1 network and DSX-1
interfaces. It clears when
the configured primary
clock is restored.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (6 of 7)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
Secondary Clock
Failed
A failure of the configured
secondary clock source for
the unit was detected and
the internal clock is
providing the timing for the
unit.
The clock source will not
automatically switch from
internal until the primary
clock source returns.
Self-Test Failure
SLV Latency
The unit did not pass its
basic verification tests when
it was powered on or reset.
Reset the unit.
Contact your service
representative.
The measured latency of
Wait until the DLCI is declared
operational again.
Exceeded, DLCI nnnn, SLV communication
frame relay link
responses from the remote
unit on this DLCI is
If the unit has ISDN backup
capability, this condition will
initiate backup.
excessive, so the DLCI has
been declared unsuitable
for normal multiplexed PVC
operation (DLCI Type is set
to Multiplexed).
SLV Timeout, DLCI
nnnn, frame relay
link
An excessive number of
SLV communication
responses from the remote
system have been missed
on the specified multiplexed
DLCI and link.
Verify that the network LMI is
up. If it is, contact your network
service provider.
If a DBM is present and Auto
Backup is enabled, backup is
initiated automatically.
If the frame relay link is
Net1-FR1, the timeout is on
the network FrameRly1
timeslot assignment.
When a hardware bypass-
capable device has been
detected at the other end of
the PVC and this condition
occurs, only user data for
EDLCI 0 will be transmitted
as long as the condition
exists.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
8-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (7 of 7)
Alarm Condition What It Indicates
Suboptimal Link Rate, The specified frame relay
What To Do
No action required.
frame relay link
multilink has failed to
achieve the configured
Maximum Link Rate for the
link.
This message appears for
multilink aggregate frame
relay links if LMI is down on
any of its constituent links.
Two Level-1 Users
Accessing Device
Another user with Level-1
security access is currently are accessing the unit if testing or
Wait until no other Level-1 users
accessing the unit.
configuration will be performed.
Be aware that actions of the
other user may override
your test commands and
configuration changes.
Yellow at DSX-1
A yellow alarm signal is
received on the DSX-1
interface. DTE has detected
a LOS or OOF condition.
Check that the DSX-1 cable is
securely attached at both ends.
Check the status of the
attached equipment.
Yellow at Network 1
A yellow alarm signal is
received on the network
interface.
Network cable problem.
Check that your network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
T1 facility problem.
Contact your network provider.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-n. The frame relay link associated with a user data port.
– ISDN Link Name on a non-network ISDN DBM interface.
3
Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Viewing the Trap Event Log
The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log. ASCII
trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in
example and additional information.
Troubleshooting Tables
The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble-free service. However, if a
problem occurs, refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible
solutions.
Device Problems
Table 8-2. Device Problems (1 of 2)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No power, or the LEDs The power cord is not
Check that the power cord is
securely attached at both ends.
are not lit.
securely plugged into the
wall receptacle to rear panel
connection.
The wall receptacle has no
power.
Check the wall receptacle
power by plugging in some
equipment that is known to be
working.
Check the circuit breaker.
Verify that your site is not on an
energy management program.
Power-On Self-Test
fails. Only Alarm LED
is on after power-on.
The unit has detected an
internal hardware failure.
Reset the unit and try again.
Contact your service
representative.
Return the unit to the factory
Information on page A of this
document).
8-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-2. Device Problems (2 of 2)
Symptom Possible Cause
Cannot access the unit Login or password is
Solutions
Reset the unit (see Restoring
Communication with an
Improperly Configured Unit on
or the menu-driven
user interface.
incorrect, COM port is
misconfigured, or the unit is
otherwise configured so it
prevents access.
Contact your service
representative.
Failure xxxxxxxx
The unit detects an internal
software failure.
Record the 8-digit code from
the System and Test Status
screen.
appears at the top of
the System and Test
Status screen, at
Self-Test Results.
Reset the unit and try again.
Contact your service
representative and provide the
8-digit failure code.
An LED appears
dysfunctional.
LED is burned out.
Run the Lamp Test. If the LED in
question does not flash with the
other LEDs, then contact your
service representative.
Not receiving data.
Network cable loose or
broken.
Reconnect or repair the cable.
Call the network service
provider.
Receiving data errors
Frame Relay Discovery is
Change the DLCI Type for each
network DLCI from Multiplexed to
Standard, turning off multiplexing.
on a multiplexed DLCI, being used for automatic
but frame relay is okay. DLCI and PVC
configuration.
The equipment at the other
end is not frame relay
RFC 1490-compliant.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Frame Relay PVC Problems
Table 8-3. Frame Relay PVC Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No receipt or
transmission of data
Cross Connection of the
DLCIs are configured
incorrectly.
Verify the PVC connections and
DLCIs by checking the
network-discovered DLCIs on the
LMI Reported DLCIs screen.
DLCI is inactive on the
frame relay network.
Verify that the DLCI(s) is active
on the LMI Reported DLCIs
screen. If the DLCI(s) is not
active, contact the service
provider.
Verify the LMI Reported DLCI
field on the Interface Status
screen.
DTE is configured
incorrectly.
Check the DTE’s configuration.
LMI is not configured
properly for the DTE or
network.
Configure LMI characteristics to
match those of the DTE or
network.
LMI link is inactive.
Verify that the LMI link is active on
the network; the Status Msg
Received counter on the Network
Frame Relay Performance
Statistics screen increments.
Losing Data
Out of Sync
Frame relay network is
experiencing problems.
Run PVC Loopback and Pattern
tests to isolate the problem, then
contact the service provider.
If Monitor Pattern was
selected, it means the test
pattern generator and
receiver have not yet
synchronized.
Verify that the unit at the other
end is configured to Send
Pattern.
Correct unit configurations.
Correct the CIR setting so both
units are configured the same.
CIR settings for the units at
each end are mismatched.
Check the line’s error rate – the
physical line quality.
If the message persists, it
means that 5 packets out
of 25 are missing or are out
of sequence.
Contact the service provider.
8-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
ISDN DBM Problems
Table 8-4. ISDN DBM Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
Cannot connect to the Misconfiguration
remote unit
Verify that the link profiles are
correct in both units, both the
area codes and phone or ID
numbers (see Setting Up ISDN
For a BRI DBM, verify that the
SPIDs and local area codes
and phone numbers are
correct (see Configuring the
Chapter 4, Configuration
Options).
Verify that the unit at one end is
configured to originate and the
unit at the other end is
configured to answer a call.
Verify that the ISDN interface is
enabled.
Verify that Auto Backup is
enabled and no time
restrictions apply.
DBM LMI comes up,
but no data is
transferred
Misconfiguration
Check that the DLCI numbers are
correct and are the same at both
ends.
Operation and Maintenance, for additional information about ISDN problems. Last
Cause Value messages appear on the DBM Interface Status screen.
Main Menu→ Status → DBM Interface Status
configuration.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Tests Available
The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9126, 9128, or 9128-II.
Test Menu Example
main/test
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
TEST
Network PVC Tests
Data Port PVC Tests
ISDN Call/PVC Tests
Network Physical Tests
Data Port Physical Tests
DSX-1 Physical Tests
PRI Physical Tests
IP Ping
Lamp Test
Abort All Tests
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature, ISDN Calldoes not appear with
the ISDN PVC Tests. PRI Physical Testsonly appears when an ISDN PRI
DBM is installed.
PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured
on the interface. Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and
secured.
Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5.x management system using its
Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface, as well as from the menu-driven
user interface.
8-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Test Timeout Feature
A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test (as opposed to
manually terminating a test) after it has been running a specified period of time.
It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely
managed through an inband data stream (PVC). If a test is accidently commanded
to execute on the interface providing management access, control is regained
when the specified time period expires, automatically terminating the test.
To use this feature, enable the Test Timeout configuration option, and set a
duration for the test to run in the Test Duration (min) configuration option (see
NOTE:
These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE,
like a DTE-initiated External Loopback.
DBM Tests
The Test menu allows you to run PVC loopbacks and test patterns on the unit and
its DBM interface. It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2.
Currently, there are no physical tests for a BRI DBM interface.
DBM tests are started and monitored the same as the network tests. See System
backup-related test messages appearing on the System and Test Status screen.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Starting and Stopping a Test
Use this procedure to start, monitor, or abort specific tests. To abort all active tests
When the status of a test is . . .
The only command available is . . .
Inactive
Active
Start
Stop
Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure.
Procedure
To start and stop a loopback or a send-pattern test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Test
2. Select an interface and test (e.g., Network, Data Port, or ISDN PVC Tests) and
press Enter.
The selected test screen appears. Startappears in the Command column.
Inactiveappears in the Status column.
3. Select the Port number and press Enter.
4. Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected.
The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available
test and is highlighted.
5. To start the test, highlight Startunder Command for the test you want to run
and press Enter. Stopnow appears and is highlighted, and the status of the
test changes to Active.
The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result
column.
6. To stop the test, press Enter to send the Stop command. Startreappears
and the status of the test changes back to Inactive.
8-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Aborting All Tests
Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on
all interfaces, with exception to DTE-initiated loopbacks. To abort individual tests
Procedure
To abort all tests on all interfaces:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Test
2. Select Abort All Tests and press Enter.
Command Completeappears when all tests on all interfaces have been
stopped.
NOTE:
Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE-initiated loopbacks.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
PVC Tests
PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface.
When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices,
they are nondisruptive to data, so user data can continue to be sent during a
test.
If the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device, PVC tests
are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data. Also, the Connectivity test
would not appear.
Loopback, and send/monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the
selected DLCI. FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit. If a PVC
Loopback is started at one end of the circuit, the other end can send and monitor
pattern tests.
The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with ISDN
backup capability, with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected. If a standard DLCI was
selected, (Disruptive), rather than (Non-Disruptive), would be displayed
after Test. Also, the Connectivity test would not appear.
PVC Tests Screen Example
main/test/network_pvc
Device Name: Node A
9128-II
5/26/2000 23:32
NETWORK PVC TESTS
DLCI Number: 550
Test (Non-Disruptive)
Command
Status
Result
PVC Loopback:
Send Pattern:
Monitor Pattern:
Start
Start
Start
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
Sequence Errors
Data Errors
99999+
99999+
Connectivity:
Test Call:
Start
Stop
Inactive
Active
RndTrip Time (ms) 99999
Frame Relay Link Up
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature, or if the ISDN Link Profile’s Link
Status is disabled, Test Calldoes not appear. An Outbound Phone Number
must be configured for Test Callto appear.
NOTE:
Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in
the two FrameSaver units. If errors are detected, verify the CIR configuration
and retest.
8-22
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
PVC Loopback
The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per-PVC
basis. This test logically (not physically) loops back frames received from another
FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device.
Main Menu→ Test → Network PVC Test
Network PVC Loopback
DTE
PVC #x
Network
PVC #x
98-16186
Main Menu→ Test → Data Port PVC Tests
Port PVC Loopback
DTE
PVC #x
Network
PVC #x
98-16187
Main Menu→ Test → ISDN Call/PVC Tests
ISDN PVC Loopback
PVC #x
DTE
ISDN DBM
ISDN
PVC #x
Network
98-16188
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Send Pattern
This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.
To send a pattern test on a link:
Main Menu→ Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests/
ISDN Call/PVC Tests]
If the selected DLCI is
configured as . . .
And the default
Rate (Kbps) setting is . . .
Then . . .
Standard
(Disruptive)appears
after Test
100% of CIR
10% of CIR
Multiplexed
(Non-Disruptive)
appears after Test
If the CIR is zero, the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps.
Monitor Pattern
This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.
To monitor a pattern test on a link:
Main Menu→ Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests/
ISDN Call/PVC Tests]
The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result
column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync. An Out of Syncmessage appears
when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence.
These error counts are updated every second. If the maximum count is reached,
99999+appears in these fields.
8-24
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Connectivity
Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver
device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active. This test stops
automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs.
To run a connectivity test on a link:
Main Menu→ Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests/
ISDN Call/PVC Tests]
Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of
the PVC. A RndTrip Time(ms)message appears in the Result column when a
response is received within 5 seconds, indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the
remote end is alive (operational and connected), and the round trip (RT) time is
shown in milliseconds (ms), with a resolution of 1 ms. If a response is not received
within 5 seconds, No Responseappears in the Result column.
Test Call
Test Call tests the device’s ability to place a call. It allows an alternate means of
controlling the activation or deactivation of an ISDN link. This test only appears for
a FrameSaver device with a DBM that is configured to originate backup calls
(typically, the remote site) and has its ISDN Link Status option set to Auto.
To place a test call:
Main Menu→ Test → ISDN Call/PVC Tests
When a test call is started, Activeappears in the Status column. While the call is
Active, the status of the call connection and the link appears in the Results
column.
A Frame Relay Link Upmessage indicates that the required calls have
been made and the link is successfully passing LMI data.
A Frame Relay Link Suboptimalmessage indicates that at least one
call has been made on the link, the link is successfully passing LMI data, but
the Maximum Link Rate configured in the ISDN Link Profile has not been
achieved for the link.
A Frame Relay Link Downmessage indicates that the call attempts were
not successful.
NOTE:
Primary network data is not affected by a test call. If there is a network failure
while a test call is active, the test call is terminated and the call is automatically
converted to a backup call.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Physical Tests
Physical tests require the participation of your network service provider.
Main Menu→ Test → [Network Physical Tests/Data Port Physical Tests/
DSX-1 Physical Tests/PRI Physical Tests]
If the unit does not have the ISDN PRI DBM feature, PRI Physical Tests does not
appear.
A FrameSaver unit’s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown
below.
Physical Tests Screen Example
main/test/network
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
5/26/2000 23:32
NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS
Test
Command
Status
Results
Local Loopbacks
Line Loopback:
Payload Loopback:
Repeater Loopback:
Start
Start
Start
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
Remote Loopbacks
Send Line Loopback: Down
Send
Inactive
0:00:00
Pattern Tests
Send:
user-defined 0a0a Stop
Active
Active
0:00:00 - Errors 99999+
0:00:00 - Errors 99999+
Monitor: user-defined0a0a Stop
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
InjectErr ResetMon
The InjectErr function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Send
Pattern Test is Active. Select InjectErr to inject a single bit error into the pattern
being sent.
The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a
Monitor 511 test pattern is Active. Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern
error counter.
CAUTION:
You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached;
you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test
equipment.
8-26
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Line Loopback
The Line Loopback (LLB) loops the information received on the selected interface
back to the source of the loopback. When used with a pattern test at the remote
node, LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1
facility.
Main Menu→ Test → Network Physical Tests
Framer
Other
The T1
Interface
All
1s
LLB
T1
Interface
97-15336
CAUTION:
This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the
selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down so any
IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.
An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:
Payload Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an active Monitor Pattern
on this network interface.
Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DS0s assigned to this
network interface.
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port (Port
Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this network interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Payload Loopback
The Payload Loopback (PLB) loops the information received on the selected
interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit
framing section of the device. Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is
with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device.
Main Menu→ Test → Network Physical Tests
Framer
Other
The T1
Interface
All
1s
T1
Interface
PLB
97-15337
CAUTION:
This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the
selected interface. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down
so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.
A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:
Line Loopback, Repeater Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an
active Monitor Pattern on this network interface.
Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DS0s assigned
to this network interface.
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port (Port
Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) and assigned to this network
interface.
8-28
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Repeater Loopback
The Repeater Loopback (RLB) loops data received from the data ports and the
DSX-1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry. Use RLB
to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the
interface. This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational.
Main Menu→ Test → Network Physical Tests
An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be
looped back.
Framer
Other
The T1
Interface
RLB
T1
Interface
AIS
97-15338
The FrameSaver unit will not respond to any messages from the network during
this test.
CAUTION:
This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the
selected interface. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down
so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.
An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:
Payload Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an active Monitor Pattern
on this network interface.
All loopbacks on any other T1 interface with DS0s assigned to this network
interface.
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port (Port
Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this network interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
DTE Loopback
The DTE external Loopback (DTLB) test loops the received signal on a DTE
interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports.
Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface.
Main Menu→ Test → Data Port Physical Tests
An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back.
Network
Interface
DSX
Interface
All 1s
DTLB
DTLB
DTE
Port 2
DTE
Port 1
98-16190
CAUTION:
This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the
selected port. Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be
disrupted.
8-30
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Send Line Loopback
The remote Line Loopback (LLB) up and down codes are in-band codes that allow
control of a remote device. The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote
unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback. Network
loopbacks are defined in AT&T TR 62411.
A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:
Any Loopback on the same interface.
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port (Port
Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) and assigned to this network
interface.
Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface.
Procedure
To start and stop a Line Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Test → Network Physical Tests
2. Select the Upcode in the Send Line Loopback row to put a remote device in
loopback.
3. To start the test, highlight Sendunder Command in the Send Line Loopback
row and press Enter. The code is sent for up to 10 seconds, or until an
acknowledgement is received from the remote end. The length of time that the
test has been running is shown in the Results column.
4. To stop the test, send the Downcode to take the remote device out of
loopback.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link
A network-initiated Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) loops data over the frame
relay link (DS0s) received on the network interface through the FrameSaver unit’s
framing circuitry and back to the same interface.
A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following
in-band methods:
V.54 Loopback.
ANSI T1.403 Annex B Fractional T1 (FT1) Channel Loopback.
The frame relay service provider can use DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame
relay circuit.
Framer
Other
The T1
Interface
T1
All
DCLB
Interface 1s
98-16223
CAUTION:
V.54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect operation of frame relay PVCs
assigned to the selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay link will
be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be
disrupted.
8-32
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Send Remote Line Loopback
The remote Line Loopback (LLB) up and down codes are in-band codes that allow
control of a remote device. The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote
unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback. Network
loopbacks are defined in AT&T TR 62411.
A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:
Any Loopback on the same interface.
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port (Port
Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) and assigned to this network
interface.
Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface.
Procedure
To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Test → [Network Physical Tests/PRI Physical Tests]
2. Select the desired network interface (shown in the screen title).
3. Select the Upcode in the Remote Line Loopback row to put a remote device
into loopback.
4. To start the test, highlight Sendunder Command in the Remote Line
Loopback row and press Enter. The code is sent for up to 10 seconds, or until
an acknowledgement is received from the remote end. The length of time that
the test has been running is shown in the Results column.
5. To stop the test, send the Downcode to take the remote device out of
loopback.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Send and Monitor Pattern Tests
The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit
pattern. These tests generate industry-standard bit patterns that can be used to
determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit.
The following test patterns are available:
— QRSS
— 511
All-zeros
2047
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15
All-ones
1-in-8
3-in-24
63
2E15-1 (2 -1)
20
2E20-1 (2 -1)
User-defined 2-byte test pattern (a0a0)
A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running:
Any Loopback on the same interface.
Send Pattern Test on any port assigned to this network interface.
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) and assigned to this network
interface.
Procedure
To send and monitor a Pattern Test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Test →[Network Physical Tests/DSX-1 Physical Tests]
2. Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field. If sending/monitoring a
user-defined pattern, enter the the desired 2-byte hexadecimal value in the
field next to Send or Monitor.
When sending a pattern, the InjectERR function key appears. Use InjectERR
if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern.
3. To send a pattern, highlight the Sendcommand to send a pattern and press
Enter.
To monitor the test, highlight the Startcommand and press Enter.
The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result
column. An error count is also displayed. When monitoring a pattern, the
ResetMon function key appears. ResetMon resets the error count to zero.
4. To stop the test, press Enter to send the Stopcommand. Startreappears
and the status of the test changes back to Inactive.
8-34
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
IP Ping Test
An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and
any FrameSaver unit, router, or NMS to which it has a route.
Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are:
To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in
To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver
unit and the central site NMS. During a remote-site installation, an IP Ping test
is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site. The
remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured, and one
To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site
FrameSaver unit. The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the
on page 8-40 to ping SNMP trap managers.
Ping Screen Example
main/test/ping
9128-II
Device Name: Node A
06/05/2001 06:02
IP PING
Target IP Address:
000.000.000.000
Destination Interface: Use Internal Route DLCI: 16
EDLCI: 0
Source IP Address:
Encapsulation:
Packet Size:
Special
Routed
64
135.90.25.1
Iteration Count:
1
Inter-ping Delay (sec): 5
Response Timeout (sec): 2
Start
---------------------------------------------------
Status:
Alive
Transmit Receive
000000 000000 000000
Lost
Loss Ratio
0000 (%)
Current Minimum Maximum Average
0000 0000 0000 0000
Pings:
Roundtrip Delay (ms):
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-5. Ping Options (1 of 3)
Target IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.001–126.000.000.000,
128.000.000.000–223.255.255.255
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP address to which a ping will be sent.
000.000.000.001–126.000.000.000, 128.000.000.000–223.255.255.255 – Specifies the
IP address.
Destination Interface
Possible Settings: Use_Internal_Route, Port-n, Net1-FR1
Default Setting: Use_Internal_Route
Specifies the routing method or destination interface for the ping.
Use_Internal_Route – When choosing which interface to send the ping, the unit first
consults its routing table. If the address or subnet does not appear in the routing table, the
ping will be sent to the Default IP Destination, if defined. (See Configuring Node IP
Port-n, Net1-FR1 – The ping is sent out the specified destination regardless of the
internal route configuration.
DLCI
Possible Settings: 16–1007
Default Setting: [Lowest assigned DLCI on the selected interface]
Specifies the DLCI to be used for the ping.
If the DLCI is configured on a Virtual Channel Connection (VCC), the VCI and VPI are
displayed next to the DLCI.
Display Conditions – This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to
Use_Internal_Route.
16–1007 – Specifies the DLCI.
EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0
Default Setting: 0
Specifies the EDLCI to be used for the ping.
Display Conditions – This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to
Use_Internal_Route, and then appears only if the specified DLCI is multiplexed.
0 – Specifies the EDLCI. The field cannot be modified.
8-36
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-5. Ping Options (2 of 3)
Source IP Address
Available Settings: Automatic, Special
Default Setting: Automatic
Specifies the source IP address to be identified with the ping.
Display Conditions – This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to
Use_Internal_Route.
Automatic – The source IP address is:
– The interface IP address, if one exists, else
– The node IP address if one exists, else
– The first available address in the address table
Special – The entered IP address is shown as the source. When Special is specified, and
additional field is displayed that allows you to enter an IP address
000.000.000.001–126.255.255.255, or 128.000.000.000–223.255.255.255.
Encapsulation
Available Settings: Routed
Default Setting: Routed
Specifies the IP encapsulation used by the data stream. This read-only field specifies that
the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490/RFC 2427 routed Network Level Protocol
IDentifier (NLPID) encapsulation, and not SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP)
encapsulation.
Display Conditions – This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to
Use_Internal_Route.
Routed – The encapsulation is routed NLPID.
Packet Size
Available Settings: 36–4096
Default Setting: 100
Specifies the size of the ping packet including the IP header (20 bytes) and the ICMP
header (8 bytes).
1–4096 – Packet size.
Iteration Count
Available Settings: 1–999999
Default Setting: 5
Specifies the number of pings to send.
1–999999 – Number of pings.
Inter-Ping Delay
Available Settings: 1–900
Default Setting: 1
Specifies, in seconds, the amount of time to wait between pings.
1–900 – The ping wait time.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
Table 8-5. Ping Options (3 of 3)
Response Timeout
Available Settings: 1–60
Default Setting: 2
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, to wait before a host that has not responded to a
ping is declared unreachable.
1–60 – The response timeout period.
When the ping has completed normally, timed out, or been stopped using the Stop
Table 8-6. Ping Responses
Field
Possible Values
Description
Status
In Progress
Alive
Ping has been sent.
Ping was successful.
Destination
Unreachable
The host could not be reached. See
RFC 792 for possible causes.
Ping Timed Out
There was no response in the period
specified in Response Timeout.
No route in this
device
The IP address is not in the routing
table, and no Default IP Destination is
configured.
Ping Loss Ratio (%)
0–100
The ratio of pings received to pings
transmitted.
Pings Transmitted
Pings Received
Pings Lost
1–999999
1–999999
1–999999
The number of pings transmitted.
The number of pings received.
The number of pings transmitted less the
number of pings received.
Current Roundtrip
Delay
0
No measurement exists.
1–9999
The time in milliseconds that it took to
complete the latest ping.
Minimum Roundtrip
Delay
0
No measurement exists.
1–9999
The least time in milliseconds that it
took to complete a ping during this test.
Maximum Roundtrip
Delay
0
No measurement exists.
1–9999
The most time in milliseconds that it
took to complete a ping during this test.
Average Roundtrip
Delay
0
No measurement exists.
1–9999
The average time in milliseconds that it
took to complete a ping during this test.
8-38
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
IP Ping Test – Procedure 1
Procedure
To ping any far-end FrameSaver unit:
1. Select the IP Ping test.
Main Menu→ Test → IP Ping
2. Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to, then select Start.
NOTE:
If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized, or the far-end unit has just
initialized, it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via
the proprietary RIP.
3. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.
— While the test is running, In Progress...appears in the Status field.
— When the test is finished, Alive should appear as the Status. If any
other message is displayed, additional testing is required.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
IP Ping Test – Procedure 2
Procedure
To ping the NMS at the central site:
1. Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address in its
routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.
2. Verify that the central site NMS’s router has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address
in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.
3. Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap
Manager if the router is to route data, so a route has been configured within
the FrameSaver unit.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
SNMP Traps
Or, for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router,
verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured.
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication→
Node IP→ Default IP Destination
Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC
Multiplexing is used, as when using the Auto-Configuration feature.
4. Select the IP Ping test.
Main Menu→ Test → IP Ping
5. Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS, then select Start.
6. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.
— While the test is running, In Progress...appears in the Status field.
— When the test is finished, Alive should appear as the Status. If any
other message is displayed, additional testing is required.
Lamp Test
The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and
functioning properly. All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1/2
second during execution of the test. When the test is stopped, the LEDs are
restored to their normal condition.
Main Menu→ Test → Lamp Test
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set, the
8-40
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices
The OpenLane Service Level Management (SLM) system provides the following
features:
Web and database services
Web access to health and status information
Web access to real-time, as well as historical graphs and reports
Web access to SLV reports, for units with the SLM feature set activated
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices
SNMP polling and reporting
Web-based diagnostic tests: end-to-end, PVC loopbacks, connectivity, and
physical interface tests
Basic device configuration, including RMON alarm and threshold configuration
when the unit has the advanced SLM feature set activated
Automatic device and PVC discovery for SLM devices with their SLV Delivery
Ratio configuration option enabled
Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network
Remote SLM feature activation for units with the diagnostic feature set
Multiple maintenance schedules for scheduling more than one maintenance
period, with a report for each scheduled task
Multiple Circuit IDs for multiple access levels so customers, as well as network
service providers, have access to network management information
Device reset capability
HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web
interface
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System
Instructions for installing the OpenLane SLM system are found in the
In addition to installation instructions, the Administrator’s Guide contains
instructions for:
Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services
Accessing the OpenLane application
Adding a FrameSaver device
Adding a Customer ID
OpenLane SLM also has an extensive online Help system.
9-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Setting Up FrameSaver Support
With OpenLane SLM’s extensive online Help, the application is self-documenting
and you have access to the most current system information.
Procedure
To set up FrameSaver support:
1. Start the OpenLane services, then access the application.
2. Log in as Admin for access to customer profiles, frame relay access facilities
components, and PVC components.
3. Add FrameSaver devices.
4. Create customer profiles.
5. Set up historical data collection.
6. Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data for FrameSaver devices
with the SLM feature set activated.
perform these steps and for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Ordering SLM Feature Set Activations
When advanced SLM functionality is needed at a site, an Activation Certificate
(Feature No.9126-C1-220 or 9128-C1-220) can be ordered, which will allow you to
activate SLM features in FrameSaver devices with the diagnostic feature set. You
must have the OpenLane SLM system, Release 5.3 or later, to activate SLM
capability in FrameSaver devices and to manage your certificates.
NOTE:
If you have a combination of models in your network, a separate Activation
Certificate must be ordered for each model number. Each certificate can be
ordered for a single unit or for many units.
Contact one of the following to request an Activation Certificate:
If you are an end user and managing your own network, contact your sales
representative or distributor.
If your network service provider (NSP) manages the network, contact the
service provider.
If you are a network service provider or distributor, contact Paradyne at
1-800-727-2396, www.paradyne.com, via a purchase order, or your
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI). If submitting a purchase order by fax, send
it to 1-727-532-5270.
An Activation Certificate can also be ordered through the Paradyne store at
www.paradyne.com/store.
Provide the following information:
Model (9126 or 9128)
Number of units to be activated
Your OpenLane SLM system license key number
To Find Your License Key Number
Your license key number was entered into your system when your OpenLane SLM
system was installed and is available from the OpenLane Administration screen.
However, to access the screen with your license key number, you must log in as a
user with Administrative system access.
Procedure
To find your OpenLane license key number:
1. Open the OpenLane SLM application and log in as a user with Administrative
access (e.g., ADMIN).
2. A bottom of the OpenLane Administration screen, select About OpenLane
SLM.
The license key is shown mid-screen, below the copyright and build
information.
9-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
The Activation Certificate
An Activation Certificate will be sent to you via Federal Express.
NOTE:
If you ordered an Activation Certificate via e-mail, Activation Certificate
information will be e-mailed to you so you can start activating units
immediately. The actual certificate will arrive the next day.
When the certificate arrives, it will include the following information:
Activation Certificate number
Your OpenLane License Key number
Model Prefix (9126 or 9128)
Feature Group: SLM
Number of device activations ordered (included on this certificate)
Sales order number
Customer purchase order number
Customer or company name
Contact (sent to the attention of)
Shipping address
Phone number
E-mail address
Date the certificate was generated
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Administering and Managing SLM Activations
The OpenLane SLM system provides the following features that allow you to
administer and manage your Activation Certificates and SLM activations. From the
Firmware/Feature Maintenance menu, you can:
Add or view the status of activations, and see how many activations remain on
each certificate.
Schedule when activations are to take place, and verify that the activations
occurred as scheduled.
View activations that are scheduled, cancel activations, or change the
FrameSaver devices that are scheduled for activation, as needed.
Generate and print a report that summarizes the activity on all Activation
Certificates in your system, which includes the number of activations ordered,
the number of activations remaining on the certificate, and the date the
certificate was ordered.
The report also includes information about each activated unit: its system
name, IP address, location, model, serial number, and date of activation.
The sections that follow describe what you need to do to get Activation Certificate
information into your OpenLane SLM system, and to activate SLM capability in
units with the diagnostic feature set.
9-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Entering an Activation Certificate
Once you receive an Activation Certificate, enter the Activation Certificate number
into your OpenLane SLM system’s database.
Procedure
To enter the Activation Certificate number:
1. Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level, which
must be Admin.
2. Select Firmware/Feature Maintenancefrom the OpenLane
Administration screen.
3. In the Feature Activations area, select View/Add activation
certificates,located near the bottom of the Firmware/Feature
Maintenance menu.
4. If no Activation Certificates have been entered into the system, or if adding
another certificate:
— Click inside the New certificate box under Add certificate.
— Enter the Activation Certificate number from the certificate.
— Click on the prompt below it. The frame at the bottom of the screen is
refreshed to display information about the new certificate.
See the OpenLane SLM system’s online Help for additional information.
Checking Activation Certificate Status
You can view the status of certificates and activations at any time by selecting
View/Add activation certificatesfrom the Firmware/Feature
Maintenance menu, and clicking on the prompt below Display certificates.
See the OpenLane SLM system’s online Help for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Scheduling Activations
You can activate one, many, or all FrameSaver devices at any time, until all the
activations ordered for the certificate have been completed.
NOTE:
Once SLM capability is activated in a FrameSaver device, the unit cannot be
returned to the diagnostic feature set.
Procedure
To schedule device activations:
1. Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level, which
must be Admin, and select Firmware/Feature Maintenancefrom the
OpenLane Administration screen.
2. In the Feature Activations area, select Schedule feature
verifications/activations.
3. Follow the steps included on this screen.
— Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time by model,
device name, or IP address, and click on the prompt below the selection
table.
Entering an asterisk (*) in the Name or Device IP field will display all
FrameSaver devices in your system, so you can pick and choose devices
that will be activated.
— Select whether to activate selected devices.
4. Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time under Select
devicesby model, device name, or IP address, then click on the prompt
below the device selection table. The table in the lower frame lists all the
devices in the selected category.
Entering an asterisk (*) in the Name or Device IP field will display all
FrameSaver devices in your system, so you can pick and choose devices that
will be activated.
5. In the lower frame, click on the box in the Activate column to select or deselect
a specific FrameSaver device for activation. Proceed through the list until you
have selected all the devices to be activated at this time.
6. Proceed through the other steps included on this screen, then click on the
prompt under Perform the scheduled verification/activationto
verify what you scheduled. The Verify/Schedule Feature Activations screen
appears so you can verify the scheduling information.
— If the information is correct, click on Apply.
— If not, or if you want to verify or change the devices that will be activated or
the time the activations are to occur, click on the prompt to return to the
previous screen and reselect you options.
9-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations
You can check the status of scheduled activations or cancel activations at any time
prior to the activations taking place by selecting View/Abort scheduled task
statusfrom the Firmware/Feature Maintenance menu. You can select all tasks,
or select tasks by model, device name, or IP address. When you click on the
prompt below the Select taskstable, the table in the lower frame lists all the
devices in the selected category scheduled for activation.
See the OpenLane SLM system’s online Help for additional information.
Canceling Scheduled Activations
To cancel scheduled activations, select View/Abort scheduled task
statusfrom the Firmware/Feature Maintenance menu, select the desired tasks,
and click on the prompt to display the FrameSaver devices scheduled for
activation.
Click on the box in the Abort column to select the FrameSaver devices that will not
be activated, then click on the prompt under Abort verifications/
activationsto verify your selections, and Apply. Activations for the selected
devices will be cancelled.
See the OpenLane SLM system’s online Help for additional information.
Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report
The Certificate Summary Report provides information about the Activation
Certificate and the activated devices. Select Generate certificate summary
reportfrom the Firmware/Feature Maintenance menu.
The report lists all Activation Certificates in your OpenLane SLM system and all
the FrameSaver devices activated using each certificate.
Activation Certificate information includes the model, feature, the number of
activations ordered, the number of activations still covered by the certificate,
and the date the certificate was ordered.
Device activation information includes the device’s name, IP address, its
location, model, serial number, and the date the device was activated.
We recommend that you print and save this report. However, before printing
change the orientation of the report to Landscape so no information is truncated.
See the OpenLane SLM system’s online Help for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices and Activating SLM Features
9-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for
FrameSaver Devices
10
This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to
FrameSaver SLV devices. It includes the following:
Release 5.5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides
FrameSaver SLV-specific support.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Preparation
Before getting started, you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a
NetScout Manager Plus user directory. OpenLane provides these directories as a
starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files. A template of
alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history
files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available.
OpenLane paradyne directories include the following:
Properties:
paradyne.fsd file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory
Properties:
paradyne.fst file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory
Alarms:
slvtemplate.fctfile found in
OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory
User history:
pd*.udhfiles found in OpenLane/netscout/userHistory/directory
These files should be moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.
10-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus
For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear, make sure your
environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file. You need
to:
Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory.
Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager.
Configure agent properties.
Verify and correct domains and groups.
Monitor the agent and DLCIs.
Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing
and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus, refer to
the:
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide to help you install the application, monitor
traffic, and diagnose emerging problems on network segments.
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you
configure agents, remote servers, and report templates using the various
NetScout products.
NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between
the FrameSaver unit and its router, and configure the probe on network
segments you want to monitor.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network
Procedure
1. Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window.
2. Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar (on the
left side of the window).
A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name
and IP Address headings. If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation,
the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet.
3. Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar (to the far
right of the screen). Applicable configuration and administration icons appear
in the box below the application bar.
4. Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main
window.
5. Select the Add... button (down the center of the screen).
6. Minimally, enter the following:
— Agent name
— IP address
— Enter 1 for the frame relay logical interface to be monitored.
— Properties File: Select paradyne.
7. Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent, discover its
DLCIs, and return to the Configuration Manager main window.
The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box, with its DLCIs
in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen.
8. Select the Test button (fourth button down, center of the screen) to make sure
you can communicate with the agent.
Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout
Server Administrator Guide for additional information.
10-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Verifying Domains and Groups
Procedure
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open
the Configuration Manager main window.
2. Verify that only FrameSaver SLV-supported domains appear listed in the
Domain column. FrameSaver SLV-supported domains include:
— ATALK
— DECNET
— IP
— IPX
— RMON
— SNA
— NETB
— NET~
— OSI
— VINES
— NEWVINES
— IPV6
3. Verify that:
— S (statistics collection) appears for each domain listed in the Group
column.
— H (hosts) appears for the IP domain only.
— Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column.
— Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns.
— Dashes appear under all Logging columns: Stat, Host, Conv.
4. If all these requirements are met, no further action is required. Close the
Configuration Manager window.
If all these requirements are not met, a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain
needs to be added, or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted, the
Properties File must be edited.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Correcting Domains and Groups
Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne-provided file and when:
An unsupported domain needs to be deleted.
A missing domain needs to be added.
Groups, Samples, Interval, and Logging are not configured as specified in
Procedure
1. Select the Property... button (down the center of the Configuration Manager
main window). The Property Editor window opens.
2. To delete an unsupported domain, click on the domain from the Domains list,
then select the Delete button.
The Are you sure?prompt appears. Select Yes. The unsupported domain
disappears from the list.
10-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
3. To add a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain or correct property settings,
select the Edit... button (to the right of the Domain section of the Property
Editor window). The Edit Domain window opens.
4. Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following:
Property
Description
Setting
Groups Stats (S)
Hosts (H)
Statistics collection
Enabled for all domains.
Level 3 information
(network)
Enabled for IP domain only.
Disabled for all other
domains.
Conversations (C) Protocols being used
Event logging
Disabled for all domains.
Logging
Disabled for all domains and
groups.
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply the changes.
Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager/Plus &
NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be configured and
assigned to each DLCI. OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms.
DLCI alarms can be configured manually, but using the Paradyne alarm defaults
template greatly reduces configuration time.
The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB:
— Frames Sent (SLVFramesSnt)
— Rx DLCI Utilization (SLVrxDLCIUtil)
— Tx CIR Utilization (SLVTxCIRUtil)
— Frames Sent Above CIR
(SLVFramesTxAbvCIR)
— Tx DLCI Utilization (SLVTxDLCIUtil) — Average Latency (AverageLatency)
— Frames Received (SLVFramesRec) — Current Latency (CurrentLatency)
These alarms and current values can be found in $NSHOME/usr/slvtemplate.fct,
which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms. This file can be copied
and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values.
The copied .fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all
DLCIs on the unit using the eztrap utility. All .fct files must be in $NSHOME/usr.
NOTE:
Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure
below. If you have an NT system, please install Perl before proceeding.
Procedure
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.
2. Type eztrap -i filename.fct -o agentname.fct agentname and press Enter to
run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCIs for the
copied .fct file.
The message eztrap doneappears when the .fct file is transferred.
3. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open
the Configuration Manager main window.
4. Edit any alarm values that need to be changed.
5. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager main
window) to load alarms for the unit. This may take some time, so please be
patient.
10-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Editing Alarms
Procedure
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open
the Configuration Manager main window.
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).
The Custom Property Editor window opens.
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Edit... button (to the right of the
list).
The Edit Trap window opens.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change.
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply your changes. The
window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears.
6. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager main
window) to apply your changes.
Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server
Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds.
10-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Adding SLV Alarms Manually
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be defined and assigned
to each DLCI.
When configuring alarms manually, every alarm must be configured for each DLCI;
that is, if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCIs, 160 trap configurations must be
created (8 x 20). For this reason, it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults
be used. Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually.
Procedure
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open
the Configuration Manager main window.
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).
The Custom Property Editor window opens (see the window in Editing Alarms
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Add... button (to the right of the
list). The Add Trap window opens.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
4. Click on the ... button to the right of indicated fields for a drop-down list from
which selections can be made. Minimally, configure the following fields:
Field
Select or Enter . . .
Domain
DLCI
User Defined
DLCI number for trap being assigned
PARADYNE
Stats Type
Trap Variable
Key1
Trap variable to be configured
The ifIndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1
DLCI number (same as DLCI above)
Key2
Type
Absolute or Delta radio button*
Rising, Falling, or Both radio button**
Threshold
Value that will trigger a trap.
* Latency MIB variables should be Absolute; all others should be Delta.
** Generally, Rising is selected.
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to add this alarm.
6. Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCIs.
Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server
Administrator Guide for additional information.
10-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Creating History Files
Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for
each interface. An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface. A
table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored. Additional
user history tables are created using the command-line prompt in NetScout
Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs (Object IDs) to be monitored
into the unit.
OpenLane provides several useful examples, including three files containing a
complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored: one for a DLCI,
one for a frame relay link, and one containing system-type OIDs. Any of these files
can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the
FrameSaver unit.
These files have a pdn*.udh(user-defined history) format and are found in the
OpenLane/netscout/userHistory directory. The userHistory files should be
moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.
A separate *.udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be
monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded. Use a text editor
to create these *.udh files by:
Copying one of the interface-specific files (DLCI or link) and editing it using
one of the examples provided as a guide.
Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the
FrameSaver unit.
CAUTION:
Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the
unit, UserHistory1 and UserHistory2. These files must not be modified.
These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports.
It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCIs before starting to be
sure your agent and DLCI lists are current. To rediscover agents and their DLCIs,
select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window (the
FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Procedure
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.
2. Copy an example or interface-specific file to a new file that contains the user
history table number.
3. Open the new file using a text editor.
The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs (Object IDs). The frame relay
interface number 101015001 must replace @IFN, and the DLCI number to be
monitored must replace @DLCI.
Example: frCircuitSentFrames
Change “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.@IFN.@DLCI”
to “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.101015001.301”
The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver SLV 9126, 9126-II, 9126-II
Router, or 9128-II is 101015001.
4. Edit the new file, as needed.
Refer to Creating .UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager
Plus User Guide for additional information.
information for an interface.
10-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Installing the User-Defined History Files
Once the user-defined history files have been created, the files need to be
installed. History files are installed from the command-line prompt in NetScout
Manager Plus. Should the FrameSaver unit be reset, these files will need to be
reinstalled. The command used to install a new user history table is located in
$NSHOME/bin.
CAUTION:
Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2. UserHistory1 and UserHistory2
are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports.
Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability.
Procedure
1. Type dvuhist -f agentname user_history_table_number config
number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined history
files for the frame relay link.
Example:
dvuhist -f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51k.udh
The interval must be entered in seconds.
2. Type dvuhist -f “agentname DLCI_number” user_history_table_number
config number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined
history files for a specific DLCI.
Example:
dvuhist -f “Dallas51 301” 3 config 30 60 Dallas301.udh
The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI.
For these examples, user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3
on the History List.
user-defined history files have been loaded.
Refer to Installing .UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager
Plus User Guide for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data
Once the monitoring variables have been defined, a problem DLCI can monitored.
Procedure
To monitor user history data:
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay radio
button still selected, select the Traffic radio button.
The appropriate icons appear.
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI list
box (under the agent list box).
3. Highlight the DLCI to be monitored.
4. Click on the Custom History icon. The NetScout Custom History window
opens.
Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed.
10-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
5. Select History List from the View menu. The History List window opens.
The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list.
6. Highlight the desired set of user history variables, and select the OK button.
Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables. This may
take some time, so please be patient.
7. Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu, if desired (3D Bar is shown).
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected, you can click
on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data.
8. Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view (see
Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in
Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional
information.
identify OID information being shown.
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus
Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus,
select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent,
or one of its DLCIs.
NOTE:
Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are
supported for FrameSaver SLV agents.
The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent’s traffic. The procedure is
the same for protocol monitoring, but you may be prompted to select a Domain
Group as well as an agent or DLCI.
10-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Procedure
1. Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent, or one of its
DLCIs.
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI list
box (under the agent list box).
3. If you want to monitor one of the agent’s DLCIs, highlight the DLCI to be
monitored.
4. Click on an applicable icon. The selected graphical report should open.
Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain
History. In the example below, the Domain History icon was selected, which is
actually a real-time report.
NOTE:
If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed
via OpenLane, the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate. Only
default size distributions are tracked.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
10-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices
Statistical Windows Supported
Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are
supported for FrameSaver units. For example, All Convs (conversations) and
TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected, but
conversations are not supported.
Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window, the
following are supported:
Traffic Statistics
Traffic Monitor
Protocol Statistics
Protocol Monitor
Protocol Zoom
TopNTalkers
Segment Zoom
Segment Details*
Domain History*
All Talkers
* Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only, not a link. If a link is
selected, all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero.
When a DLCI is selected, the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for
FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid
bucket (i.e., bucket size <64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65..127 bucket, and
>1518 statistics appear in the 1024..1518 bucket).
Conversations and Long-Term and Short-Term Histories are not supported in this
release. As a result, no data will appear on windows that include these panes.
10-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for
FrameSaver Devices
11
FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication’s Network Health
software. In addition, Network Health has released the first in a series of software
modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its
This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV
devices. It includes the following:
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
For additional information about installing, accessing, and managing FrameSaver
SLV devices through Concord’s Network Health, and for information about
applicable reports, refer to:
Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application.
Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application.
Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay
reports.
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand
and use Traffic Accountant reports.
Installation and Setup of Network Health
Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions, and
follow the instructions applicable to your network platform. Once Network Health is
installed, you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units.
Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions, called a
module. Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those
features and functions. Make sure you license the Poller application so you can
poll SLV units and collect data.
To use this application:
1. Discover network elements, units, and interfaces in the network.
2. Configure the Network Health applications, then save them.
3. Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes.
4. Set up and run reports.
Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide.
The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once
you have access to the applications.
See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup
information and a full discussion of the application’s features and how to use them.
11-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Discovering FrameSaver Elements
Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications, the Discover
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and
discover their DLCIs. Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the
Poller Configuration, which are used to poll the units.
IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered
for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their
elements. These elements are resources that can be polled (e.g., LAN/WAN
interfaces, frame relay circuits, routers, and servers).
The two types of elements that can be polled are:
Statistics elements – Provide counters and other gauges for information
gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis.
Conversation elements – Provide RMON2 and similar data for information
gathered about network traffic between nodes.
Procedure
To find SLV device elements in your network:
1. Select the LAN/WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found.
Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type.
2. Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located, and the Community
String (Community Name in the FrameSaver unit). The Community String is
case-sensitive.
3. Select the Discover button.
The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens,
showing the results of the discovery process.
A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of
existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete.
Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network, it
could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all
elements in the network.
See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional
information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to
the database.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Configuring the Discovered Elements
Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for
the first time. For a FrameSaver SLV unit, the speed set would be the unit’s CIR.
No additional configuration should be required. However, you should verify that all
appropriate information has been retrieved.
NOTE:
If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured, or if it is not configured correctly,
Network Health sets the unit’s CIR to 0 Kbps. For this reason, you should
reconfigure the unit’s CIR before Network Health polls it. If 0 Kbps is the speed
setting, you will need to edit the unit’s CIR from Network Health.
Additional information can be edited, as well. See Discovering Elements in the
Network Health User Guide for additional information.
Procedure
To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health:
1. Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog
box once the discovery process is completed.
The Poller Configuration window opens.
2. Double-click on the first element discovered. The Modify Element dialog box
opens.
3. In the Speed box, select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the
unit in the text box.
Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts (e.g., enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per
second, or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second).
4. Apply your changes:
— Select the Apply/Next button to save your change and bring up the next
element to be edited. Continue until all newly discovered frame relay
elements have been modified before selecting the OK button.
— Select the the OK button.
The Modify Element dialog box closes.
5. Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window. The
modified elements are saved to the database, and the units are polled.
Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for
data to be gathered before running any reports.
11-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Grouping Elements for Reports
Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made, the
newly discovered elements (DLCIs) should be organized into a group for Health
reporting. Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node
types (e.g., all SLV elements). Once grouped, you can then run reports on all
DLCIs in the network, as well as reports on individual DLCIs.
Procedure
To group elements:
1. From the console, select Edit Groups from the Reports menu. The Add
Groups dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name in the Group Name field. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
A through Z, a through z, 0 through 9, dashes (–), periods (.), and underscores
(_ ) can be used. No spaces can be included, and the word All cannot be
used.
3. Select the WAN radio button (above the Available Elements list).
4. Highlight all the DLCIs listed on the Available Elements list, or select specific
DLCIs, then select the left arrow button.
The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the Group
Members list.
5. Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the
Group Members list.
The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on
the Groups dialog box.
See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for
additional information. That chapter also tells you how to customize reports.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Generating Reports for a Group
Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCIs
and the DLCIs have been grouped, you can start generating reports. When
selecting a report Section, select WAN from the drop-down list. See Running
Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional
information. That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report
generation.
NOTE:
Network Health provides information with each chart or table, generally
referred to as a report. Click on the hyperlink (Explanation of...) for an
explanation of the report and its features. You can also refer to the Network
Health Reports Guide.
About Service Level Reports
For long-term analysis and reporting, you will want to license the Service Level
Reports application. This application analyzes data collected over months, or by
quarters, and provides service level information about an enterprise, a region,
department, or business process. Executive, IT Manager, and Customer Service
Level reports are provided.
Using these reports, you can measure service performance against goals and
agreements. Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables:
availability, bandwidth, bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need
to be set before reports are scheduled.
About At-a-Glance Reports
At-a-Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network
performance indicators onto a single page. Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an
At-a-Glance Report.
compare a DLCI’s volume with the network’s performance over a specified period
of time. Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables:
availability, bandwidth, bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need
to be set before reports are scheduled. In addition, all the enhanced network
statistics that only an SLV device can accurately collect is provided so you can
truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the
customer’s utilization on network efficiency.
11-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
About Trend Reports
By specifying specific variables like bandwidth, trend analysis can be performed
and shown on Trend Reports. Up to ten variables for a DLCI, or ten DLCIs on one
variable can be generated on a single trend report. Information can be presented
in a line graph, pie chart, bar chart, or table format. Any amount of time can be
specified for the reporting period.
These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health
Index rating. See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings.
Printed Reports
All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports.
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices
The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units:
Exception Reports – Provide summary and detail information that identifies
DLCIs with the highest incidence of errors, high bandwidth utilization, and
trends.
These reports identify those DLCIs that have exceeded a specified number of
accumulated exception points. It is a good idea to run this report daily so that
DLCIs having the most problems can be attended to first. DLCIs contained on
this report need immediate attention.
If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports, check whether any new
equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly
configured. If its configuration is correct, the equipment could be faulty.
Summary Reports – Provide summary information for the network, volume
and error leaders, and DLCI traffic.
— Network Summary Report – Provides an overall view of the network.
Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into
problems.
— Leaders Summary Report – Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume
and errors. High traffic volume may be increasing latency, and the high
Health Index rating indicates problems. It is a good idea to run these
reports daily so a norm can be established. The same DLCIs should
appear.
Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems. Problems to
look for include: a normally high-volume DLCI is dropped from the list, a
new DLCI appears on the list (check Element Summaries), a DLCI has a
high Health Index rating, but low volume, significant differences between a
DLCI’s average and peak Health Index rating.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
— Elements Summary Report – Compares DLCI traffic with volume and
the baseline, bandwidth utilization, and errors.
Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison, to identify
DLCIs with above or below average volume so they can be investigated
when there are any significant changes.
Supplemental Report – Shows DLCI availability and latency. The information
shown in this report is also on other Health reports. However, these charts
show more than ten DLCIs at a time so you have a broader view of the service
provided by the network.
Service Level Reports – Provide summary information for a group list for a
longer reporting period than other reports.
— Executive Service Level Report – Provides service level performance
for an enterprise on a single page. Use this report to assess whether IT
service levels are meeting availability and service goals.
— IT Manager Service Level Report – Provides service level information for
various groups. Using this report, you can compare service level
performance of various groups. The report summarizes service levels for
a group of DLCIs, along with details on individual DLCIs within that group.
— Customer Service Level Report – Provides service level information for
customers. This report is used to provide service level information to
service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed
based upon their own traffic data, as well as provide documented
evidence for increasing CIR. It combines daily volume, daily Health
exceptions, bandwidth distribution, average Health Index ratings and
availability for each DLCI onto a single page.
At-a-Glance Reports – Provides consolidated DLCI and network
performance information onto a single page.
— At-a-Glance Report – Consolidates bandwidth utilization, network traffic,
events occurring over the reporting period, and availability and latency
levels information. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a
trend report (e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be
generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions
Reports, Supplemental Reports, and Health reports.
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high
Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem
leading to a DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.
11-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
— FrameSaver SLV Plus At-a-Glance Report
Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCIs. This is
the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV’s unique
monitoring capabilities, using the unit’s SLV-enhanced network statistics.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Trend Reports – Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for
DLCIs. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report (e.g.,
burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when
investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports, Supplemental
Reports, and Health reports.
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health
Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a
DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.
See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports.
11-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Hierarchy
A
Menus
The Menu Hierarchy on the following pages shows a pictorial view of the
organization of the FrameSaver CSU/DSU and Router’s screens, which can help
you navigate the menus and access information.
ISDN backup and Data Ports options do not apply to the router. The Virtual Router
Ports option does not apply to the CSU/DSUs.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Menu Hierarchy
MAIN MENU
Status
Status
System and Test Status
LMI Reported DLCIs
IP Path Connection Status
PVC Connection Status
Timeslot Assignment Status
DBM Interface Status
IP Routing Table
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Easy Install
Performance Statistics
Trap Event Log
Display LEDs
and Control Leads
Identity
IP Path
Connection
Status
• Device Name
• IP Address
• Status
System and
Test Status
• Self-Test Results
• Last System
Reset
• Health and
Status
• Test Status
LMI
Reported
DLCIs
• DLCI
• Status
• CIR (bps)
PVC Connection Timeslot
Identity
• System
• NAM
Trap Event
Performance IP Routing
Status
Assignment
Log
Statistics
Table
Status
• Network
Timeslot
Status
• DSX-1
Timeslot
Status
• Source Link,
DLCI, EDLCI
• Primary
Destination Link,
DLCI, EDLCI,
Status
• Number of
Trap Events
• Time Elapsed • DLCI
Since Event
• Event
• Service Level
Verification
• Destination
• Mask
• DBM
• Gateway
• Hop
• Type
• Interface
• TTL
• Frame Relay
• ESF Line
• DBM Call
• Ethernet
• Clear All
Statistics
• Discovery
Source
• Alternate
Destination Link,
DLCI, EDLCI,
Status
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
PVC Tests:
Network
Data Port
ISDN Call/
Physical Tests:
Network
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
PVC Tests
Easy Install
(DLCI Number)
• PVC Loopback
• Send Pattern
• Monitor Pattern
• Connectivity
Data Port
DSX-1
PRI (9128-II)
Other:
IP Ping
Lamp Test
Abort All Tests
Physical Tests
• Local Loopbacks
• Remote Loopbacks
• Send/Monitor Patterm Tests
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
•
Test Call
Load
Configuration
from:
Configuration
Edit/Display
System
Network
DSX-1
Data Ports (CSU/DSUs)
Virtual Router Ports (Routers)
ISDN
Time Slot Assignment
PVC Connections
IP Path List
Management and
Communication
Auto Backup Criteria
Easy Install
System
• Frame Relay
and LMI
• Class of
Service
Definitions
• Service Level
Verification
DSX-1
• Interface Status
• Line Framing Format
• Line Coding Format
• Line Equalization
• Send All Ones
ISDN
• Physical
• Link Profiles
• DLCI Record
• General
s
Network and
Data Ports
• Physical
• Frame Relay
• DLCI Records
Time Slot
IP Path
Virtual Router
Ports
• DLCI Records
Management and
Communication Options
• Node IP
PVC Connection
List
Assignment
Table
• Frame Relay
• Add and
Display
Static
• Source Link, DLCI,
Network
EDLCI
• Management PVCs
• General SNMP Management
• Telnet and FTP Session
• SNMP NMS Security
• SNMP Traps
• Ethernet
• Communication Port
• Modem Port
Assignments
• Primary Destination
Link, DLCI, EDLCI
• Alternate Destination
Link, DLCI, EDLCI
• DSX-1 to
Network
Assignments
• Sync Data Port
Assignments
(9128-II NAM)
Paths
New or Modify
• Clear
Assignments
PVC Connection Entry
New or Modify
Management PVC Entry
02-17304a
A-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Menu Hierarchy
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Auto-Configuration
•
•
•
Frame Relay Discovery Mode
Automatic Circuit Removal
Automatic Backup
Easy Install
Configuration
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Control
Modem Call Directories
System Information
Administer Logins
Easy Install
Change Operating Mode
Select Software Release
LMI Packet Capture Utility
Enable/Disable Modem
PassThru to COM
Disconnect Modem
Reset Device
Administer Logins
• Login ID
• Password
• Access Level
LMI Packet Capture Utility
System
Select Software Release
Information
• Capture Interface
• Packet Capture Start/Stop
• Status
• Packets in Buffer
• Display LMI Trace Log
• Current Release
• Alternate Release
• Switch & Reset
• Device Name
• System Name,
Location, Contact
• Date
• Time
New
LMI Trace Log
Login Entry
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Easy Install
Easy Install
• Node IP Address and Subnet Mask
• TS Access
• Create Dedicated Network Management Link
• Time Slot Assignment Screen
• Ethernet Port Options Screen
• Selected Network Physical Interface Options
02-17304b
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Menu Hierarchy
A-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
MIB Support
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1, and has the capability of
being managed by any industry-standard SNMP manager and accessed by
external SNMP managers using SNMP protocol.
The following MIBs are supported:
MIB II (RFC 1213 and RFC 1573)
Frame Relay DTEs MIB (RFC 2115)
DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)
RS-232-Like MIB (RFC 1659)
Frame Relay Service MIB (RFC 1604)
Enterprise MIB
Dial Control MIB using SMIv2 (RFC 2128)
RMON Version 1 MIB (RFC 1757)
RMON Version 2 MIB (RFC 2021)
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps
Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World
Wide Web site.
Procedure
To access Paradyne MIBs:
1. Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www.paradyne.com.
2. Select Technical Support.
3. Select Management Information Base (MIBs).
The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS
application software. Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional
download information.
B-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
System Group (mib-2)
This section provides the system object identifier and system description for the
System Group for the FrameSaver unit, which is an SNMPv1 MIB.
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)
The following is the system description (sysDescr [system 1]) for the NMS
subsystem in the FrameSaver unit:
PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver SLV; Model: [9126/9126-II/9126-IIR/9128-II]; S/W
Release: (MM.mm.bb [Major.minor.build] format); NAM CCA number:
(hardware version in hhhh-hhh format); Serial number: sssssss
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)
The following is the system object identifier (sysObjectID [system 2]), or OID, for
the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver units:
FrameSaver SLV 9126-SLV:
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II:
FrameSaver SLV 9126-IISLV:
FrameSaver SLV 9126-IIR:
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.11.4.1
FrameSaver SLV 9126-IIRSLV: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.11.4
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II:
FrameSaver SLV 9128-IISLV:
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.8.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.8
Interfaces Group (mib-2)
Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group, as defined in RFC 1573 and
RFC 1213, which is an SNMPv1 MIB, is provided in this section.
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
The following table provides the ifName for each interface type, the ifDescr, and
the ifIndex that Paradyne has assigned to each.
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information (1 of 3)
ifName
Description
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
Physical Layer
Network T1
T1 network interface
DSX-1 interface
Network T1; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
101001001
101002001
DSX-1 T1
DSX-1 T1; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Sync Data Port Synchronous Data
S01P1 Port-1
Synchronous Data Port, Slot: 1, 101003001
Port: 1; T1 FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information (2 of 3)
ifName Description ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
Physical Layer (continued)
Sync Data Port Synchronous Data
Synchronous Data Port, Slot: 1, 101003002
Port: 2; T1 FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
S01P2
Port-2 (if applicable)
Communications port
Modem port
COM
COM Port; T1 FR NAM;
101004001
101005001
101110001
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Modem
Modem Port; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM
ISDN BRI DBM; T1 FR NAM;
interface (if applicable) Child Card: ISDN-BRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
ISDN PRI DBM ISDN PRI DBM
ISDN PRI DBM; T1 FR NAM;
interface (if applicable) Child Card: ISDN-PRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
101111001
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame Relay Logical Layer
FR Bundle
Multilink Frame Relay
(MFR) Bundle
FR Bundle, Profile: [Link Name]; 9126:
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
101025001
to
101025051
9128:
101025001
to
101025120
FR UNI
Frame relay logical link For the DTE side:
101015001
on the T1 network
interface
Network T1 of FR DTE;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the DCE side:
Network T1 of FR SERVICE;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame relay logical link For the user side:
101016001
on the Sync Data
Port-1
Synchronous Data Port of FR
DTE, Slot: s, Port: 1;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
Synchronous Data Port of FR
SERVICE, Slot: s, Port: 1;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
B-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information (3 of 3)
ifName Description ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
Frame Relay Logical Layer (continued)
ifIndex
FR UNI
Frame relay logical link For the user side:
101016002
on the Sync Data
Synchronous Data Port of FR
Port-2 (if applicable)
DTE, Slot: s, Port: 2;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
Synchronous Data Port of FR
SERVICE, Slot: s, Port: 2;
T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame relay logical link For the user side:
on BRI (if applicable) ISDN BRI DBM of FR DTE;
101018001
101018002
Profile: [Link Name]; T1 FR
NAM;
Child Card: ISDN-BRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
ISDN BRI DBM of FR
101018001
101018002
SERVICE; Profile: [Link Name];
T1 FR NAM;
Child Card: ISDN-BRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame relay logical link For the user side:
on PRI (if applicable) ISDN PRI DBM of FR DTE;
101017001
to
Profile: [Link Name];
101017024
T1 FR NAM;
Child Card: ISDN-PRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
ISDN PRI DBM of FR
SERVICE; Profile: [Link Name];
T1 FR NAM;
Child Card: ISDN-PRI DBM;
S/W Release: MM.mm.bb;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with
NetScout Probes, use the following ifName, ifDescr, and ifIndex.
Table B-2. NetScout Interface Objects Information (1 of 2)
ifName
Description
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
Frame Relay Logical Layer
Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical link For the DTE side:
1
Network
on the network
interface
RMON (IN/OUT); Network T1 of
FR DTE; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the DCE side:
RMON (IN/OUT); Network T1 of
FR SERVICE; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame Relay 3 Frame relay logical link For the user side:
3
Sync Data
Port 1
on Synchronous Data RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous
Port-1
Data Port of FR DTE, Slot: s,
Port: 1; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous
Data Port of FR SERVICE,
Slot: s, Port: 1; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame Relay 4 Frame relay logical link For the user side:
4
Sync Data
Port 2
on Synchronous Data RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous
Port-2
Data Port of FR DTE, Slot: s,
Port: 2; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous
Data Port of FR SERVICE,
Slot: s, Port: 2; T1 FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
B-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-2. NetScout Interface Objects Information (2 of 2)
ifName
Description
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
RMON Logical Layer
RMON Frame
Relay Logical
Interfaces
These values are
calculated.
IN – RMON (IN);
[ifName of the interface]
17–48
For the DTE:
(ifIndex –1) * 2 +17
OUT – RMON (OUT);
[ifName of the interface]
For the DCE: DTE
calculated value +1
RMON Virtual
Interfaces
These values are
calculated based on
the probe’s internal
circuit index: circuit
index +65.
ALL – VIRTUAL PVC [interface 65–512
number] [DLCI number] ALL
RMON Virtual
Logical
These values are
calculated.
IN – VIRTUAL PVC [interface
number] [DLCI number] DTE
513–1023
Interfaces
For the DTE:
(virtual interface
ifIndex –65) * 2
+513
OUT – VIRTUAL PVC [interface
number] [DLCI number] DCE
For the DCE:
DTE calculated
value +1
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps
This section describes the FrameSaver unit’s compliance with SNMP format
standards and with its special operational trap features.
All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap.
Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing $ifString have the
following format:
‘DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” of $ifName frame relay link “$linkName”.’
— $dlciNumber is the DLCI number. DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” only
appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap.
— $circuitId is the name given to the circuit. It can be an empty string, or a
1– 64 byte string within quotes (e.g., “Chicago to New York”), and only
appears when a DLCI with “circuitID” is associated with the trap.
— $linkName is the name given to the link. Frame relay $linkName only
appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with
the trap.
— $ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable.
Examples:
‘DLCI 100 “Chicago to New York” of Network T1 frame relay link’ In this
example, a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap.
Typically, the $circuitId is a coded string encoded by the network service
provider. The following shows an example.
‘DLCI 100 “cc0402–dec0704.RG21” of Network T1 frame relay link’
The unit supports the following:
These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table.
B-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Trap: warmStart
This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized.
Table B-3. warmStart Trap
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
warmStart
FrameSaver unit has just
reinitialized and stabilized itself.
Reset command sent.
Power disruption.
Variable-Binding
String:
‘Unit reset.’
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)
Trap: authenticationFailure
This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to
lack of authentication.
Table B-4. authenticationFailure Trap
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
authenticationFailure
Access to the FrameSaver
unit was attempted and
failed.
Bad password on COM port
terminal.
String:
‘Unauthorized access
attempted from COM port.’
Bad password on modem port
terminal.
String:
‘Unauthorized access
attempted from modem port.’
Bad password through telnet.
String:
‘Unauthorized access
attempted from telnet user at
$ipAddress.’
SNMP bad community,
unauthorized IP address, or
unauthorized operation.
String:
‘Unauthorized access
attempted from SNMP user at
$ipAddress.’
authenticationFailure
An ISDN backup call has been
received, but the call was
rejected.
Variable-Binding
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)
String:
‘Bad Caller ID $phone.’
($phone is either a phone
number or “no number.”)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: linkUp and linkDown
These traps are supported on the following interfaces:
Network, DSX-1, and synchronous data ports – Physical sublayer interfaces
Frame relay logical link layer interfaces
Table B-5. linkUp and linkDown Traps
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
linkDown
A failure in one of the
communication interfaces
has occurred.
A failure in one of the
communication interfaces has
occurred.
linkUp
One of the failed
One of the failed communication
communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational.
up and operational.
Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces
Table. It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and
either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB.
B-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (1 of 2)
Interface
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
Physical Sublayer
T1 Network,
DSX-1,
PRI
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
interface.
ifAdminStatus (RFC
1573)
Alarm conditions include:
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
(Supported by the
media-specific DS1
MIB.)
– Loss of Signal (LOS) or
far-end loss of signal
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
– Out of Frame (OOF)
– Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS)
– Excessive Error Rate (EER)
– Yellow Alarm
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’ No alarms
exist. (e.g., ‘Network T1 down
due to yellow alarm.’)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an
intentional shutdown.)
linkUp – No alarms on the
interface.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
Synchronous Data
Port
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
port.
ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
(Supported by the
media-specific
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
– DTR off
RS232-like MIB.)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
– RTS off
–
‘ ’ – Not DTR or RTS, but
link is down.
String:
‘$ifString $alarmString down.’
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1
DTR and RTS down.’)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an
intentional shutdown.)
linkUp – No alarms on the port.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
1
The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the DTR lead state.
2
3
The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the RTS lead state.
If the LMI Protocol is not configured, a linkUp/linkDown trap is based solely upon
whether the interface is enabled or disabled.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (2 of 2)
Interface
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
Physical Sublayer (continued)
BRI
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
interface.
ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
(Supported through
ifIndex – RFC 1573.)
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’ No alarms
exist on the link.
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an
intentional shutdown.)
linkUp – No alarms on the
interface.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
Logical Link Sublayer
T1 Network,
BRI,
PRI,
Synchronous Data
Port
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
linkDown – LMI is down for the
LMI Protocol configured, or
Frame Relay link is disabled.
ifAdminStatus (RFC
1573)
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’ No alarms
exist on the link due to LMI.
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Service Side of the
Frame Relay UNI
‘$ifString LMI down.’ No alarms
exist on the link. (e.g., ‘Sync
Data Port S01P1 frame relay
link “Port-1” LMI down.’)
(Supported by the
media-specific Frame
Relay Services MIB.)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an
intentional shutdown.)
linkUp – LMI is up or Frame
Relay link is enabled.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
T1 Network,
BRI,
PRI,
Synchronous Data
Port
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
linkDown – LMI is down for the
LMI Protocol configured, or
Frame Relay link is disabled.
3
ifAdminStatus (RFC
1573)
Strings:
‘$ifString LMI down.’
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an
intentional shutdown.)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
DTE Side of the Frame
Relay UNI
(Supported by the
media-specific Frame
Relay DTE’s MIB.)
linkUp – LMI is up or Frame
Relay link is enabled.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
1
The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the DTR lead state.
2
3
The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the RTS lead state.
If the LMI Protocol is not configured, a linkUp/linkDown trap is based solely upon
whether the interface is enabled or disabled.
B-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: enterprise-Specific
These traps indicate that an enterprise-specific event has occurred. Supported
enterprise-specific traps are listed below.
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (1 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
enterpriseCIR-
Change(15)
devFrExtDlciIfIndex
(devFrExt.mib)
CIR has changed due to the LMI
report. LMI Protocol is set to
Standard and the network’s CIR
changed.
devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
String:
devFrExtDlciCIR
(devFrExt.mib)
‘CIR on $ifString changed to
$CIR bps.’
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
enterpriseConfig-
Change(6)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Configuration has been changed
via the menu-driven user
interface, an SNMP Manager, or
auto-configuration after
60 seconds has elapsed without
another change.
String:
‘Device configuration change.’
enterpriseDLCI-
delete (17)
devFrExtDlciIfIndex
(devFrExt.mib)
The DLCI has been deleted. The
network no longer supports the
DLCI, and it was removed.
devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
Strings:
‘$ifString deleted by Auto-DLCI
delete.’’
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib.)
enterpriseDLCI-
Down(11)
DLCI Status is set to Inactive; the
DLCI is down.
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’ (Due to LMI or
physical failure.)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
enterpriseDLCIUp(12)
DLCI Status is set to Active; DLCI
is up again.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
enterpriseLatency-
Exceeded(21)
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
An IP SLV latency threshold has
been exceeded for a particular
Class of Service for a path.
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
String:
‘Latency exceeded
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, COS nn,
DLCI nnnn’
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (2 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
enterpriseMissedSLV-
Down(16)
devFrExtDlciIfIndex
(devFrExt.mib)
Received SLV communications
have been missed; SLV Timeout
Error Event Threshold has been
exceeded.
devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
String:
devFrExtDlciMissed-
SLVs (devFrExt.mib)
‘SLV down on $ifString due to
excessive SLV packet loss. Total
SLV packets lost is $numLost.’
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib.)
enterpriseMissedSLV-
Up(116)
SLV Timeout Error Event has
been cleared.
String:
‘SLV up on $ifString because SLV
communication was
reestablished. Total SLV packets
lost is $numLost.’
enterprisePath-
Down(19)
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
A path on the network interface
has become unavailable.
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
String:
‘Path xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Down, DLCI
nnnn’
enterprisePathUp(20)
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
A path on the network interface
has become available.
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
String:
‘Path xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Up,
DLCI nnnn’
enterprisePrimary-
ClockFail(1)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Operating software has detected
that the primary clock source has
failed.
String:
‘Primary clock failed.’
enterprisePrimary-
ClockFailClear(101)
Operating software has detected
that the primary clock source is
operational again.
String:
‘Primary clock restored.’
enterpriseRMON-
ResetToDefault(13)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
All RMON-related option changes
have been reset to their default
values.
Default Factory Configuration
settings have been reloaded,
returning RMON-related options
to their original settings.
String:
‘RMON database reset to
defaults.’
B-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (3 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
enterpriseSecondary-
ClockFail(4)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Operating software has detected
that the secondary clock source
has failed.
String:
‘Secondary clock failed.’
enterpriseSecondary-
ClockFailClear(104)
Operating software has detected
that the secondary clock source is
operational again.
String:
‘Secondary clock restored.’
enterpriseSelfTest-
Fail(2)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Unit has completed
(re)initialization and a hardware
failure was detected.
String:
‘Self test failed: $s.’ ($s is the
contents of devSelfTestResult.)
enterpriseTest-
Start(5)
For physical interfaces and At least one test has been started
frame relay links:
ifIndex (RFC 1573)
.0.0 (placeholder)
on an interface or virtual circuit.
String:
‘$testString test started on
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘DTE Loopback
test started on Sync Data Port
S01P1.’)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
enterpriseTest-
Stop(105)
All tests have been halted on an
interface or virtual circuit.
For virtual circuits (DLCIs):
devFrExtDlciIfIndex
(devFrExt.mib)
String:
‘$testString test stopped on
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘Disruptive PVC
Loopback test stopped on DLCI
100 of Sync Data Port S01P1
frame relay.’)
devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: RMON-Specific
Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON. See
generate RMON-specific traps.
Table B-8. RMON-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
risingAlarm
alarmIndex (RFC 1757)
Object being monitored has risen
above the set threshold.
alarmVariable
(RFC 1757)
String:
‘Change in $variableName
$typeString threshold of
$alarmRisingThreshold by
$(alarmValue –
alarmSampleType
(RFC 1757)
alarmValue (RFC 1757)
AlarmRisingThreshold.’ (e.g.,
Octets received on Network T1
frame relay rose to threshold of
1.’)
alarmRisingThreshold
(RFC 1757)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
fallingAlarm
alarmIndex (RFC 1757)
Object being monitored has fallen
below the set threshold.
alarmVariable
(RFC 1757)
String:
‘Change in $variableName
$typeString threshold of
$alarmFallingThreshold by
$(alarmValue –
alarmSampleType
(RFC 1757)
alarmValue (RFC 1757)
AlarmFallingThreshold.’
(e.g., Octets received on Network
T1 frame relay fell to threshold of
1.’)
alarmFallingThreshold
(RFC 1757)
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
B-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Trap: dialControl
These traps indicate when an ISDN backup call is initiated or terminated, or when
an outgoing call is rejected by the far end device.
Table B-9. dialControl Traps (1 of 2)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
Standard Dial Control MIB
dialCtlPeerCall-
Information
callHistoryPeerId
(RFC 2128)
A peer-to-peer call has been
ended.
callHistoryPeerIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
String:
‘Call sequence on $ifString [using
B-Chnl $channel] terminated due
to $causeString.’
callHistoryLogicalIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
The B-channel in this example is
only provided if it is known.
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
callHistoryPeerAddress
(RFC 2128)
See Most Recent and Previous
Operation and Maintenance, for a
list of the $causeStrings and their
cause numbers.
callHistorySubAddress
(RFC 2128)
callHistoryDisconnect-
Cause (RFC 2128)
callHistoryConnectTime
(RFC 2128)
callHistoryDisconnect-
Time (RFC 2128)
callHistoryInfoType
(RFC 2128)
callHistoryCallOrigin
(RFC 2128)
dialCtlPeerCall-
Setup
callActivePeerId
(RFC 2128)
A peer-to-peer call has been sent
or received.
callActivePeerIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
String:
‘Call sequence on $ifString [using
B-Chnl $channel] initiated
[remotely/locally].’
callActiveLogicalIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
The B-channel in this example is
only provided if it is known.
ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
callActivePeerAddress
(RFC 2128)
callActiveSubAddress
(RFC 2128)
callActiveInfoType
(RFC 2128)
callActiveCallOrigin
(RFC 2128)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-9. dialControl Traps (2 of 2)
Trap Variable-Bindings
Dial Control Extension MIB
Possible Cause
dialCtlPeerCall-
Rejected
callHistoryPeerId
(RFC 2128)
A peer-to-peer call was not
successful; the call was rejected
by the far end.
callHistoryPeerIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
ISDN Call Profile has been
disabled.
callHistoryLogicalIfIndex
(RFC 2128)
This unit’s phone number was
not in the far end device’s ISDN
Call Profile.
callHistoryPeerAddress
(RFC 2128)
String:
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
‘Call on $ifString using B-Chnl
$channel rejected by remote.’
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold set
for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap or a log event is sent.
Event Defaults
Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit, there is no
need to define multiple events for each alarm type, so only the following two events
need to be generated:
eventIndex eventDescription
eventType
eventCommunity
65533
65534
Default SLV Rising Event log-and-trap(4)
Default SLV Falling Event log-and-trap(4)
0
0
The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default
alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit, shows the alarm and event types, the interval
used when generating alarms, and thresholds.
remote monitoring.
B-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Rising Event Operation
If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table (e.g., frames
dropped by the network), the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end
of the interval. Only one alarm per event per interval is generated. The alarm
condition persists until the event has been disarmed (reset).
The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising
threshold has not been crossed during an interval, allowing the event to return to
its original disarmed state.
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit’s network interface.
Table B-10. Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
Rising
Falling
Sample
Type
Threshold Threshold
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval Event Type Default
Default
Unavailable
Seconds
D
MIB: DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406) 900 secs Rising
1
1
(15 mins)
Tag: dsx1TotalUASs
I
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1.5.
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
2
I
in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults
These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit’s frame relay link interfaces. They are
created during RMON initialization.
Table B-11. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (1 of 2)
Rising
Falling
Sample
Type
Event
Type
Threshold Threshold
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Default
Invalid Frames
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
Rising
Rising
Rising
Rising
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.18.I
Short Frames
Long Frames
Rx Discards
Tx Discards
D
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort
900 secs
(15 mins)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.6.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong
900 secs
(15 mins)
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.7.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.15.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.14.I
Rx Total
Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.20.I
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
B-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-11. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (2 of 2)
Sample
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default
Falling
Event
Type
1
2
Item
Type
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Tx Total Errors
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
Rising
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.19.I
Rx Overruns
Tx Underruns
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.28.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTx-
Underruns
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.29.I
Rx Non-octet
Aligns
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRx-
NonOctet
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.16.I
Rx CRC
Errors
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
Rising
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.17.I
Total LMI
Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotal-
LMIErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.32.I
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area
These alarms apply to all DLCIs on the network interface and can be created
during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created. They are put into the
Paradyne-defined alarm area.
Table B-12. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (1 of 2)
Rising
Falling
Sample
Type
Event
Type
Threshold Threshold
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Default
DLCI Inactive
Seconds
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactive-
Secs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
Missing
Latency
Responses
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
Rising
Rising
Rising
5
1
1
5
5
1
1
5
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D
Rx FECNs
Rx BECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115) 60 secs
(1 min)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
4.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115) 60 secs
(1 min)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
5.I.D
Congested
Seconds
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
Tag: devFrExtDlciSts-
CongestedSecs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D
Frames
Dropped by
Network
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
B-22
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-12. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (2 of 2)
Rising
Falling
Sample
Type
Event
Type
Threshold Threshold
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Default
Maximum
Latency
A
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyMax
60 secs
(1 min)
Rising
0
0
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.3.1.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area
These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is
created. They are put into the NetScout alarm area. Table B-11 identifies alarm
speed changes.
The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so
they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider. Up
to eight alarms per interface are allowed. Any additional alarms are added to the
Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-13. Static DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area
Rising
Falling
Sample
Type
Event Threshold Threshold
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Type
Default
Default
Current Latency
A
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
None
Must be
configured.
0
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D
Average Latency
Frames Received
Frames Sent
A
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg
900 secs
(15 mins)
None
None
None
None
None
Must be
configured.
0
0
0
0
0
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115) 60 secs
Must be
configured.
(1 min)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames
OID:
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115) 60 secs
Must be
configured.
(1 min)
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames
OID:
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D
Tx Frames
Exceeding CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
Must be
configured.
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D
Tx CIR Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115) 60 secs
Must be
(1 min)
configured.
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
OID:
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
B-24
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default Default
Falling
Sample
Type
Event
Type
1
2
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Rx DLCI Link
Utilization
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D
60 secs. (1 Rising
min)
70% of link 65% of link
capability capability
Tx DLCI Link
Utilization
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
60 secs. (1 Rising
min)
70% of link 65% of link
capability capability
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is
contained in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold set
for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap or a log event is sent.
This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the
NetScout Custom History screen (shown below), which provides the OID instead
of the alarm condition.
OID cross-reference.
B-26
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (1 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.I
Item
MIB/Tag
Link Speed
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag:ifSpeed
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.I
All DLCI + LMI Rx Octets
All DLCI + LMI Tx Octets
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag:ifInOctets
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.I
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag:ifOutOctets
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.10.32.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D
Rx FECNs
Rx BECNs
Tx Frames
Tx Octets
Rx Frames
Rx Octets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag:frCircuitReceivedFECNs
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag:frCircuitSentFrames
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag:frCircuitSentOctets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag:frCircuitReceivedFrames
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag:frCircuitReceivedOctets
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1.2.P
Protocol Octets (for
11 protocols)
MIB: RMON II (RFC 2021)
Tag:protocolDistStatsOctets
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (2 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.5.4.8.1.2.I
Unavailable Seconds
Rx Non-octet Aligns
IP Top Listeners (1–6)
IP Top Talkers (1–6)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFreeRunUAS
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.4.H.T.N
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.6.H.T.N
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devRmonIPTopNDstIP
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devRmonIPTopNSrcIP
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.3.I.D
DLCI CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciFrCIR
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.18.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.22.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.37.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.39.I.D
Tx DEs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciTxDE
Tx BECNs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrCircuitTxBECN
Tx Frames Above CIR
Rx Frames Above CIR
Network Frames Lost
Rx DEs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrOutCIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciNetDropFr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxDE
Network Frames Offered
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtOffFr
Network Frames Offered In
CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrInCir
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
B-28
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (3 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4 . . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.41.I.D
Network Frames Dropped In MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
CIR
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropOffFrInCir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.43.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.45.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.55.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.57.I.D
Network Frames Offered
Above CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrOutCir
Network Frames Lost Above MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
CIR
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtDropFrOutCir
Network Frames Offered
Above CIR Within EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropFrCirToEir
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Network Frames Dropped
Above CIR Within EIR
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-
CirToEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.59.I.D
Network Frames Offered
Above EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.61.I.D
Network Frames Dropped
Above EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-
OverEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.63.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.9.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.6.I.D
DLCI EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciEir
DLCI Inactive Seconds
Backup Count
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciStsBackupCnt
Backup Time
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciStsBackupTime
Average Latency
Maximum Latency
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLatencyAvg
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLatencyMax
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (4 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4 . . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.8.I.D
Latency Packet Size
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLatencyPacketSz
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2 . . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N
Frame Size Upper Limit
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
(1–5)
Tag:devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N
Frame Size Count (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtFrameSzCount
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.2.I.D.N Burst Upper Limit (1–5)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.3.I.D.N Burst Octets (1–5)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.4.I.D.N Burst Frames (1–5)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1. . .
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtBurstUpLimit
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtBurstOctets
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtBurstFrames
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.2.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I
LMI Unavailable Seconds
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs
Rx Short Frames
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxShort
Rx Long Frames
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxLong
LMI Sequence Errors
Rx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkSeqErr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
Total Rx CRC Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
B-30
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (5 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I
Rx Illegal Frames
Total Tx Errors
Total Rx Errors
Total LMI Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.2.I.N
Port Burst Upper Limits
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
(1–4)
Tag:devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.3.I.N
Rx Port Burst Octets (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.4.I.N
Tx Port Burst Octets (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
cross-reference.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-16. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (1 of 3)
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1.5.I
Unavailable Seconds
MIB: DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)
Tag: dsx1TotalUASs
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D
Rx FECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D
Rx BECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
Frames Sent
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames
Tx CIR Utilization
Tx DLCI Link Utilization
Frames Received
Rx DLCI Link Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D
Tx Frames Exceeding CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
Frames Dropped by Network MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: frFrExtDlciNetDropFr
Missing Latency Responses MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs
Congested Seconds
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs
DLCI Inactive Seconds
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
B-32
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-16. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (2 of 3)
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
Average Latency
Current Latency
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.14.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.28.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest
Frame Size Upper Limits
(1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit
Frame Size Count (1–5)
Rx Short Frames
Rx Long Frames
LMI Sequence Errors
Tx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzCount
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkSeqErr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards
Rx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
Rx Nonoctet Aligns
Rx CRC Errors
Rx Illegal Frames
Tx Total Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
Rx Total Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
Rx Overruns
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
B-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-16. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (3 of 3)
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.29.I
Tx Underruns
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I
Total LMI Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
B-34
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Router CLI Commands, Codes, and
Designations
C
CLI Commands
The FrameSaver SLV 9126-II Router is managed with text commands from the
Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI can be accessed:
Locally via a PC or asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port.
Remotely via a Telnet session.
The conventions used in the command line syntax are shown below.
Convention
Meaning
Brackets indicate an optional element.
[ ]
{ }
|
Braces indicate a required entry.
Vertical bars separate mutually exclusive elements. Enter one
element only.
Braces within brackets indicate a required choice within an optional
element.
[{ }]
The entry is a variable.
Italics
The entry in its explicit form is typed as shown. (Most commands
Reference for more information.)
Courier Bold
32-bit IP address and mask information where x is an 8-bit
weighted decimal notation.
x.x.x.x
MAC address information where x is a hexadecimal notation.
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
With the exception to the Login ID and Password, the CLI is not case-sensitive.
Operation, for additional information.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
This appendix contains the following tables for commands:
In addition, the following tables are used in the commands above.
Protocol and Port Designations
C-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Pager Command
The pager command allows you to enable or disable screen paging for a CLI
session, and enter comments at the command line, which is useful when adding
comments within scripts.
Table C-1. Pager Command
[no] pager
Operator
Minimum Access Level modes:
All modes
Command Mode:
Allows you to control the flow of uninterrupted output to the screen. Information added
!
after the at the command line is ignored.
pager
– Enables display paging. When enabled and there are more than 23 lines to
display, moredisplays on line 24. This is the default each time a session is started.
– Press the Spacebar to view the next screen.
– Press the Enter key to display the next line.
q
Ctrl-c
, or any other key to return to the command line.
– Press the key,
no pager
– Disables paging, and the entire output is sent to the screen without
interruption.
Access Control Commands
Access control commands allow you to end a session. For password and changing
Table C-2. Access Control Commands
end
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
All config modes
Command Mode:
Allows you to exit any configuration mode and return to standard operating mode.
exit
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
All modes
Command Mode:
Allows you to exit the current mode or end the session.
exit
If configuration changes have been made when
is entered, the
There are
unsaved configuration changes. Are you sure you want to exit? (no,
yes)prompt appears.
yes
– If
changes are lost.
no
is entered, the router leaves configuration mode and any configuration
– If
is entered, the configuration prompt is returned to so you can save your
changes.
exit
If in standard operating mode when
returned to the Main Menu.
is entered, the session is ended and you are
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Configuration Commands
Configuration control commands put the router in configuration mode and
allows you to save configuration changes. To show a configuration, see
Table C-3. Configuration Commands
configure {terminal| factory}
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Causes the router to enter configuration mode. The router stays in configuration mode
until the exitcommand is entered or the session times out.
Example: configure terminal
NOTES:
When in configuration mode:
– SNMP setcommands or changes saved from the menu-driven user interface for
router configuration are prevented; an in use message is generated.
– Router sub-interfaces and/or DLCIs cannot be added or deleted via the
menu-driven user interface’s CreatePVC function key.
– The number of configuration commands that can be entered without performing a
saveis limited; a warning message is generated.
– The only showcommand available is show configuration.
terminal
– Enter configuration mode and a copy of the currently running configuration is
loaded into the edit buffer. Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied current
configuration when the savecommand is entered, the configuration is saved to the
currently running configuration (terminal), and an automatic reset is performed.
factory
– Enter configuration mode and a copy of the factory default settings is loaded
into the edit buffer. Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied default settings
when the savecommand is entered, the configuration is saved to the currently running
configuration (terminal), and an automatic reset is performed. This is the default.
save
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
All config modes
Command Mode:
Causes configuration changes to be saved to the currently active configuration, and the
router to be reset.
If the savecommand is entered and changes made require a reboot of the device, a
prompt states that a reset is required for the changes to take effect.
yes
– If
A message displays when the save is complete.
no
is entered, changes are stored and the device resets automatically.
– If
is entered, you stay in configuration mode.
C-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Interface Commands
Interface commands allow you to configure the Ethernet and network interfaces,
and their sub-interfaces.
Table C-4. Interface Commands (1 of 3)
interfaceintf-type intf-num
nointerfaceintf-type intf-num.sub-intf-num [point-to-point]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config, config-if, config-subif
Command Mode:
Allows you to enter interface or sub-interface configuration mode and create
sub-interfaces. All commands entered while in interface or sub-interface configuration
mode are applied to the specified interface or sub-interface. No sub-interfaces are
enabled by default.
Example: interface serial 132.53.4.2 132.53.4.250
config
Use the no interfacecommand to delete sub-interfaces while in
mode. The
command does not delete interfaces.
When a sub-interface that is currently in use is deleted, all sub-interface uses are
automatically removed from the system configuration. This includes all route entries
destined for the sub-interface; ip addresses and subnets for the sub-interface; and all
frame relay DLCIs, bridge group assignments, and ip nat inside/outside assignments
configured on the sub-interface.
intf-type – Serial interface is supported, the frame relay serial interface.
intf-num – Interface index number for the Serial interface. Valid range is from 0 up to the
maximum number of serial interfaces, minus one.
sub-intf-num – Sub-interfaces are only supported on the network interface (Serial 0).
Valid range for the sub-interface is 0–4,294,967,295.
point-to-point
– Specifies a point-to-point sub-interface. By default, all sub-interfaces are
point-to-point.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-4. Interface Commands (2 of 3)
ipaddressip-addr subnet-mask
noipaddress[ip-addr subnet-mask]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
Command Mode:
config-if
config-subif
(Serial)
(Ethernet),
Assigns an IP address to the Ethernet interface or a Serial port sub-interface. No IP
addresses are assigned to interfaces or sub-interfaces by default.
Example: ip address 132.53.4.2 255.255.255.255
Use the no ip addresscommand to remove an IP address assigned to an interface or
sub-interface, and disable IP processing on the interface. The following rules apply:
Each sub-interface must be assigned to a different subnet.
A customer data IP address and subnet mask must be different from any IP address
used for management.
When an IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface or sub-interface,
the device automatically creates a routing table entry with the same destination
address and subnet mask, saying that IP addresses within that range are directly
reachable on the interface. This is the interface route.
If the maximum number of static routes have already been configured, you cannot
assign an IP address to the interface or sub-interface.
When an interface address and subnet mask are deleted, any routing entries with a
Next Hop Router address that fall within the interface’s address range are deleted
automatically.
ip-address – IP address of the interface or sub-interface.
subnet-mask – Subnet mask to be used when the IP address is being compared during
route table lookups. The subnet mask cannot be 0.0.0.0 and only contiguous, left-justified
subnet masks are allowed.
encapsulationencapsulation-type encapsulation-protocol
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
Command Mode:
config-if
(Serial)
Specifies the type of encapsulation on an interface.
Example: encapsulation frame-relay ietf
encapsulation-type – Specifies Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface. The
frame-relay
default is
.
encapsulation-protocol – Specifies RFC 1490 encapsulation protocol on the serial
ietf
interface. The default is
.
C-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-4. Interface Commands (3 of 3)
[no] ipunnumbered[null0]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-subif
Command Mode:
Enables or disables IP processing on a serial sub-interface without assigning an explicit
address. The no ip unnumberedcommand removes any IP address assigned to the
interface and disables IP processing on the interface. The default is that IP processing is
disabled.
Example: ip unnumbered
no ip unnumbered
When an interface IP address and subnet mask are deleted via the
command, any routing entries with a Next Hop Router address that fall within the
interface’s address range are deleted automatically.
[no] frame-relayinterface-dlcidlci-num
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-subif
Command Mode:
Specifies or removes a DLCI on a sub-interface configured for frame relay encapsulation.
Only one DLCI may be configured per sub-interface.
Example: frame-relay interface-dlci 103
dlci-num – Any valid DLCI number that is not already in use on the interface. Range for
DLCI numbers is 16–1007. The default is None.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
IP Routing Commands
Internet Protocol (IP) routing commands are used to enable and disable IP routing,
and to create or delete static routes in the routing table.
Table C-5. IP Routing Commands
iproutedest-ip dest-mask {next-hop-ip | intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] }
noiproutedest-ip dest-mask
[next-hop-ip | intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows manual creation or deletion of static route entries. There are no route entries by
default. A default gateway destination route may be specified by entering a destination IP
address and mask of “0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0” with a default gateway IP address or interface.
Example: ip route 132.53.4.2 255.255.255.255 serial 0.x
NOTE: Generally, routes are specified using a next hop address. However, routes over
unnumbered point-to-point sub-interfaces should specify the sub-interface to reach the
destination.
dest-ip
– IP address of the destination host or network or “0.0.0.0” if a default destination
gateway is specified.
dest-mask
– The subnet mask to be used when the destination IP address is compared
during route table lookups. The dest-mask cannot be 0.0.0.0 unless a dest-ip address of
0.0.0.0 has been specified, and only contiguous, left-justified masks are allowed.
next-hop-ip
– IP address of the next-hop router used to reach the destination.
intf-type
– Two interface types are supported:
Ethernet
–
– IEEE 802.3 interface
Serial
–
– Frame relay serial interface
intf-num
0
– Valid interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces is .
sub-intf-num
– Sub-interfaces are only supported on the network interface (Serial 0).
If a serial interface is specified, a sub-interface must also be specified. Valid range for a
sub-interface is 0–4,294,967,295.
[no] iprouting
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Enables or disables IP routing in the device. The IP routing default is Enable.
NOTE: When IP routing is disabled, all static route entries are deleted. However,
adding new route entries while IP routing is disabled is not prevented.
[no] ipmulticast-routing
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Enables or disables the forwarding of IP multicast packets. The default is Disable.
C-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Bridge Commands
Bridge commands are used to enable or disable simultaneous bridging and
routing, configuration of bridge groups and their attributes, and apply or remove
bridge groups from an interface or sub-interface.
Table C-6. Bridge Commands (1 of 2)
bridge{crb | bridge-group {acquire | aging-timeaging-time |
protocolspan-tree-protocol | priorityspan-tree-priority |
routeroute-protocol }}
nobridge{crb | bridge-group {acquire | aging-time[aging-time] |
priority[span-tree-priority ] | route[route-protocol ] }}
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
A user can enable or disable simultaneous bridging and routing and configure attributes
associated with a bridging group. Bridge group 1 is created by default with a priority of
32768 and configured as a learning bridge utilizing the IEEE 802.1 spanning tree protocol.
Simultaneous routing and bridging is disabled by default. Once concurrent routing/
bridging is enabled, you must configure an explicit bridge route for any protocol to be
routed on interfaces in a bridge group.
Example: bridge crb 1 route ip
crb
– Enable or disable concurrent routing and bridging on the device.
bridge-group – Bridge group 1 is created by default. If a bridge-group is specified, one of
must
the following attributes
be specified:
acquire
– Configure a learning bridge that is capable of dynamically learning new
no bridge
stations. This argument is configured by default on all bridge groups. The
command is not accepted for this argument.
aging-time
– Specifies the length of time that an unused dynamic entry is maintained
in the bridge table. The no bridgecommand resets the aging-time to the default
value.
aging-time – Valid range is 10–1,000,000 seconds. The default is 300.
protocol
– Specify a spanning tree protocol.
span-tree-protocol – Valid spanning tree protocol for IEEE 802.1 protocol is ieee.
priority
– Specify the priority ranking for this bridge. The higher the number, the less
likely this bridge will be selected as the spanning tree root.
span-tree-priority – Valid priority values when spanning tree protocol is
IEEE.802.1 are: 0–65535. The default is 32768.
route
– Specify a protocol to be routed in this bridge group when concurrent routing
and bridging are enabled.
route-protocol – Valid routing protocol is IP.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-6. Bridge Commands (2 of 2)
[no] bridge-groupbridge-group
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-if, config-subif
Command Mode:
Allows a user to apply or remove a set of bridge group parameters to/from an interface or
sub-interface. When a set of bridge group parameters is applied or removed at the
interface level, the command also applies to all sub-interfaces on the interface.
Example: no bridge-group
NOTE: If the bridge group is only required on specific sub-interfaces, remove the
bridge group from an interface and apply it at the sub-interface level.
1
bridge-group – Valid bridge group number is applied to all interfaces by default. Any
sub-interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge
group.
[no] bridge-groupbridge-group
{input-type-listin-access-list-200num |
output-type-listout-access-list-200num}
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-if
Command Mode:
Allows a user to specify or remove an input or output Ethernet type code filter for an
interface. No bridge group filters are applied to interfaces by default.
Example: bridge-group 1 input-type-list 8069
NOTE: The order in which access-list filters are entered affects the order in which the
filters are applied. Each filter is applied in succession until all filters have been applied.
If no conditions match, a frame is discarded.
1
bridge-group – Valid bridge group number is applied to all interfaces by default. Any
sub-interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge
group.
input-type-list
– Specify the filter applied to incoming Ethernet packets by type code.
in-access-list-200num – The input type access list valid range for protocol type-code
access lists: 200–299.
output-type-list
– Specify the filter applied to outgoing Ethernet packets by type code.
out-access-list-200num – The output type access list number valid range for protocol
type-code access lists: 200–299.
C-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
ARP Commands
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) commands are used to create entries in the
ARP table, specify how long the information will be retained, and remove dynamic
entries in the table.
Table C-7. ARP Commands
arpip-address mac-address arp-type
noarpip-address [mac-address arp-type]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to create or delete a single, static ARP table entry. Static ARP entries created
with this command are permanent and are retained across resets/power cycles. Up to the
maximum number of static ARP entries specified may be entered. There are no static
ARP entries by default.
ip-address
– The IP address of the ARP entry to be created or deleted.
mac-address
– MAC address.
arp-type
arpa
, the standard Ethernet-style
– Specifies the ARP type. Valid ARP type is
ARP (RFC 826).
arptimeouttime
noarptimeout[time]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-if
Command Mode:
(Ethernet)
Allows you to specify the amount of time that ARP information is retained in the ARP
cache. The no arp timeoutcommand restores the default ARP timeout value.
Example: arp timeout 28000
NOTES:
– The amount of time the device waits before reattempting to acquire ARP information
for incomplete entries is 5 seconds and is not configurable.
– The internal ARP timeout timer has one minute precision, so the ARP timeout is
implemented by rounding up to the nearest minute.
time
– The ARP timeout value in seconds. Valid range is 1–4294967 seconds.
The default is 14400.
cleararp-cache
Minimum Access Level:
Administrator
Standard
Command Mode:
Deletes all dynamic ARP table entries from the ARP cache.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
NAT Commands
Network Address Translation (NAT) commands are used to enable or disable NAT
on an interface or sub-interface and specify whether IP addresses on the interface
are public or private.
Table C-8. NAT Commands (1 of 3)
[no] ipnat{inside | outside}
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-if, config-subif
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify if Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on an interface or
sub-interface and whether IP addresses on the interface are private or public addresses.
NAT is disabled by default.
Example: ip nat inside
inside
– Specifies inside (private) IP addresses on this interface.
outside
– Specifies outside (public) IP addresses on this interface.
ipnattranslationtimeout [time]
noipnattranslationtimeout [time]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify the amount of time that a dynamically configured standard NAT
(non-port translation) mapping can remain unused before the mapping is automatically
deleted.
The default is 24 hours. To reset the timeout to the default, use the no nat
translation timeoutcommand.
Example: ip nat translation timeout 604800
NOTE: When NAPT is enabled, mappings are automatically deleted based on a
separate set of non-configurable timeouts:
– UDP translations timeout: 5 minutes.
– TCP translations timeout: 24 hours.
– ICMP translations timeout: 1 minute.
time – The timeout value in seconds. The valid range is 1–2147483647.
The default is 86400 seconds (24 hours).
C-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-8. NAT Commands (2 of 3)
ipnatpoolpool-name start-ip-addr end-ip-addr
{netmasknetmask | {prefix-length |/} prefix-length}
noipnatpoolpool-name [start-ip-addr end-ip-addr
{netmasknetmask | {prefix-length | /} prefix-length} ]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Defines a pool of addresses for Network Address Translation. Addresses can then be
allocated from the pool as needed. Up to 30 NAT pools can be supported.
To remove a pool, use the no ip nat poolcommand. No NAT pools are configured by
default.
Example: ip nat pool Largo 132.53.4.2 132.53.4.250 / 24
pool-name
– Name of the pool comprised of 1–20 ASCII printable characters.
start-ip-addr
end-ip-addr
netmask
– Starting IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool.
– Ending IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool.
– Specify a network mask that indicates which address bits belong to the
network and subnet fields, and which bits belong to the host field.
netmask
– Network mask of the network for the pool addresses.
prefix-length
/
or – Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are
ones and define the network and subnet fields.
prefix-length
– The number of bits in a network mask address that are ones. Valid
range is 1–32.
[no] ipnatinsidesource
{listaccess-list-1-99num poolpool-name [overload] |
listaccess-list-1-99num interfaceintf-type intf-num
[.sub-intf-num] overload |
static{static-ip-addr1 static-ip-addr2 |
protocol static-ip-addr1 static-port-num static-ip-addr2} }
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows a user to specify or remove Network Address Translation rules. Both dynamic and
static address translations may be specified. Command forms that include an access list
are used to specify dynamic translation rules. Packets from addresses that match the
access list are translated using addresses allocated from the named pool or the IP
address assigned to the interface. No NAT rules are configured by default.
inside
– Inside address translation converts an inside (private) IP address to an outside
(public) IP address (and port, if overload is specified for NAPT).
source
– Specifies source address translation.
list
– Specify the access list number for dynamic address translation. For inside source
translation, this access list describes local addresses. If no rules have been created for
the specified access list, no translations based on this rule will occur.
access-list-1-99num
– A standard IP Access list. The valid range is 1–99.
(Continued on next page)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-8. NAT Commands (3 of 3)
(Continued from previous page)
pool – Specify the name of a pool of addresses available for dynamic address translation.
For inside source translation, this is the pool of local addresses.
pool-name – The name of a NAT pool comprised of 1–20 ASCII printable characters.
interface – For dynamic address translation, specifies an interface or sub-interface that
provides the address for the translation. For inside source translation, specifies the
interface that provides the global address. If there is no address on the interface, the
interface has not been specified as an outside interface, or the interface is not operational,
no translations based on this rule will occur. If a public IP address is specified for NAPT on
this interface, that address is used instead of the interface’s assigned IP address.
intf-type – Two interface types are supported:
Ethernet – IEEE 802.3 interface
Serial – Frame relay serial interface
intf-num – Interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces, 0 or 1.
sub-intf-num – Sub-interface number. Sub-interfaces are only supported on the
network interface (Serial 0). If a Serial interface is specified, a sub-interface must also
be specified. Sub-interface number range is 0–4,294,967,295.
overload – Specifies that Network Address Port Translation (NAPT), also known as Port
Address Translation (PAT), is to be used for UDP and TCP.
static – Specifies a fixed, one-to-one mapping between an inside (private) IP address
(and port for PAT) and a outside (global) IP address (and port for PAT). For inside source
translation, a private address (and port for PAT) is mapped to a global address (and port
for PAT). Static inside and outside destination translations are not supported.
static-ip-addr1 – Specifies the first IP address in the static route. For inside source
translation, this is the local address to be mapped.
static-ip-addr2 – Specifies the second IP address in the static route. For inside source
translation, this is the global address to be mapped.
protocol – Protocol that applies to this static route, which include:
tcp – Transmission Control Protocol
udp – User Datagram Protocol
static-port-num – Specifies the second TCP/UDP port in a static protocol route. For
inside source translation, this is the local port. It should only be specified when a static
protocol translation is specified. Only one static route per protocol can specify a
static-port-num. The valid range of TCP/UDP ports is 1–65535.
clear ipnattranslation *
Minimum Access Level: Administrator
Command Mode: Standard
Allows you to clear all dynamic NAT translations from the translation table.
C-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
DHCP Server Commands
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server commands are used to
enable or disable the DHCP server, and create or delete a DHCP pool.
Table C-9. DHCP Server Commands (1 of 3)
[no] servicedhcp
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to enable or disable the DHCP server. The DHCP server is enabled by default
but is not active until other DHCP server options are configured. When an IP address is
assigned to a host by the DHCP Server and there is no matching routing table entry, a
host entry for that IP address is created. This entry is deleted from the routing table when
the lease expires or the IP address is relinquished.
When an IP address is assigned to a host on the local Ethernet by the DHCP Server, an
ARP table entry is created mapping that IP address to the corresponding host MAC
address. This entry is deleted from the ARP table when the lease expires or the IP
address is relinquished. This entry is not deleted according to the timeout mechanism that
applies to normal ARP entries.
NOTE: The DHCP Relay and DHCP Server cannot be enabled at the same time.
[no] ipdhcppoolpool-name
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to create or delete a DHCP pool and places it in DHCP pool configuration
mode to configure IP DHCP pool parameters. All commands entered while in DHCP pool
configuration mode are applied to the specified DHCP pool. No DHCP pools are
configured by default.
Example: ip dhcp pool pool17
pool-name – The name of the DHCP pool, as 1–20 ASCII printable characters.
[no] ipdhcpexcluded-address ip-addr [end-ip-addr]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify a single IP address, or a range of IP addresses, that the DHCP
server should not distribute to clients. The no ip dhcp excluded-addresscommand
allows you to release previously excluded IP addresses for distribution to clients. No IP
addresses are excluded by default. Up to 30 individual or ranges of IP addresses are
supported.
Example: ip dhcp excluded-address 132.53.4.2
ip-addr – Specifies an IP address to exclude, or the first IP address in a range of excluded
IP addresses.
end-ip-addr – Specifies the last IP address in a range of excluded IP addresses.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-9. DHCP Server Commands (2 of 3)
lease{days[hours] [minutes]| infinite}
nolease[days[hours] [minutes] |infinite]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-dhcp
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify or clear the lease time for an IP address assigned to a DHCP client.
After the lease time has expired, the address assignment is no longer valid. The default
lease time is one day.
Example: lease 120 23 0
days – Number of days the lease is valid. The default is1. Valid range of days is 0–365.
hours – Number of hours the lease is valid. The default is 0. Valid range for hours
is 0–24.
minutes – Number of minutes the lease is valid. The default is 0. Valid range for minutes
is 0–59.
infinite
– Specifies an infinite lease time. The IP address assignment does not expire.
default-routerip-address
nodefault-router [ip-address]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-dhcp
Command Mode:
Allows you to configure or remove the default router IP address provided to clients by the
DHCP server. The default router address is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply
message from the DHCP server and as the next hop router by the clients. The IP address
for the default router should be on the same subnet as the client.
Example: default-router 132.53.4.2
ip-address – Specifies the IP address of the default router. The default is None.
domain-namedomain-name
nodomain-name[domain-name]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-dhcp
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify or remove the domain name provided to clients by the DHCP server.
This domain name is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply message from the DHCP
server.
domain-name – Specifies a string defining the domain name. The domain name string
contains 255 ASCII printable characters. The default is None.
dns-serverip-address
nodns-server[ip-address]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-dhcp
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify or remove the Domain Name System (DNS) IP address provided to
clients by the DHCP server.
Example: dns-server 132.53.4.2
ip-address – Specifies the IP address of the DNS server.
C-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-9. DHCP Server Commands (3 of 3)
networknetwork-num
[ [netmask] netmask | {prefix-length | /} prefix-length]
nonetwork[network-num
[ [netmask] netmask | {prefix-length | /} prefix-length] ]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config-dhcp
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify or remove a subnet and subnet mask to a DHCP server pool. The
configured subnet and subnet mask will specify the range of IP addresses that will be
allocated to clients by the DHCP server. Only one network or subnet may be specified for
a server pool.
Example: network 8
network-num
– The IP address of the DHCP address pool.
netmask
– Specify a network mask that indicates which address bits belong to the
network and subnet fields and which bits belong to the host field.
netmask
– The network mask for the pool of IP addresses.
prefix-length
/
or – Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are ones
and define the network and subnet fields.
prefix-length
– Number of ones bits in a network mask address. Valid range is 1–32.
NOTES:
– If the mask or prefix-length is not specified, the class A, B, or C natural mask is
used.
– When the DHCP address range is changed, all binding entries and dynamic routes
for the clients configured with the old address range are removed.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
DHCP Relay Agent Commands
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent commands
Table C-10. DHCP Relay Agent Commands
ipdhcprelaymax-clientsmax-dhcp-clients
noipdhcprelaymax-clients[max-dhcp-clients]
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to limit the number of DHCP clients supported. The no dhcp relay
max-agentscommand resets the maximum number of DHCP clients supported to the
default of 1.
Example: ip dhcp relay max-clients 1
max-dhcp-clients – Number of DHCP clients supported: 1–256.
[no] ipdhcp-serverip-address
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows you to specify or remove the address of the DHCP server where DHCP requests
received on the Ethernet interface are forwarded. When no server address is assigned,
the DHCP Relay agent is effectively disabled.
NOTE: The DHCP Relay agent cannot be enabled if either the DHCP server or NAT
are enabled.
ip-address – IP address of the DHCP server.
C-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Filter (access-list) Commands
Filter commands are used to create or delete Access Lists.
Table C-11. Filter Commands (1 of 4)
access-listaccess-list-num [{permit | deny}
{{source-ip [source-wildcard ] | any | hostsource-host-ip} |
{protocol {source-ip source-wildcard | any | hostsource-host-ip}
[src-operator src-port [src-end-port] ]
{dest-ip dest-wildcard | any | host dest-host-ip}
[ [icmp-msg-type [icmp-msg-code] ] |
[dest-operator dest-port [dest-end-port] ] ] }|
{type-code [rangeend-type-code] } }
noaccess-listaccess-list-num [{permit | deny}
{{source-ip [source-wildcard] | any| hostsource-host-ip} |
{protocol {source-ip source-wildcard |any| hostsource-host-ip}
[src-operator src-port [src-end-port] ]
{dest-ip dest-wildcard | any| host dest-host-ip}
[ [icmp-msg-type [icmp-msg-code] ] |
[dest-operator dest-port [dest-end-port ] ] ] } |
{type-code [ rangeend-type-code] } }
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
config
Command Mode:
Allows a user to create or delete a rule for an access list. Access lists default to an implicit
deny statement for everything. Access lists are terminated by an implicit deny.
access-list-num
– The access list number. Valid ranges for access lists are:
1–99
– Standard IP access lists.
100–199
– Extended IP access lists.
200–299
– Protocol type-code access lists.
permit
– Specifies to permit access and forward packets matching the criteria.
deny
– Specifies to deny access and discard packets matching the criteria.
For Standard IP Access Lists:
Example: access-list 1 permit 10.1.1.1
source-ip
– The source IP Address to match.
source-wildcard
– Specifies a 32-bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the
source IP address to ignore during matches. This argument must be supplied when a
source-ip address is specified.
any
– Specifies to match any source host. A source-ip of 0.0.0.0 and a source-wildcard of
255.255.255.255 are specified.
host
– Specify a single host source address to match.
source-host-ip
– The source host IP address to match.
(Continued on next page)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-11. Filter Commands (2 of 4)
(Continued from previous page)
For Extended IP Access Lists:
Example: access-list 100 permit tcp 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255 20.1.1.1
0.0.0.255
protocol – The IP protocol to which the filter will be applied. The following protocols are
supported:
ip – Filter applies to all IP packets (including but not limited to ICMP, TCP, and UDP).
icmp – Internet Control Message Protocol.
tcp – Transmission Control Protocol.
udp – User Datagram Protocol.
source-ip – The source IP Address to match.
source-wildcard – Specifies a 32-bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the
source IP Address to ignore during matches. This argument must be supplied when a
source-ip address is specified.
any – Match any source host. A source-ip of 0.0.0.0 and a source-wildcard of
255.255.255.255 are specified.
host – Specify a single host source address to match.
source-host-ip – The source host IP address to match.
dest-ip – The destination IP Address to match.
dest-wildcard – Specifies a 32-bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the
destination IP Address to ignore during matches. This argument must be supplied
when a dest-ip address is specified.
any – Specifies to match any destination host. A dest-ip of 0.0.0.0 and a dest-wildcard of
255.255.255.255 are specified.
host – Specify a single host address to match.
dest-host-ip – The destination host IP address to match.
icmp-msg-type – Specify a specific ICMP message type to be filtered. Valid if the
icmp-msg-code – Specify a specific ICMP message code to be filtered. Valid if an
icmp-msg-type has been specified and the protocol specified is icmp. For valid ICMP
is 0–255.
src-operator – Specifies how the source port is evaluated. This argument may only be
specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp. Valid values are:
eq – Match only packets with a port number equal to the source port number input.
gt – Match only packets with a port number greater than the source port number.
lt – Match only packets with a port number less than the source port number input.
neq – Match only packets with a port number not equal to the source port number.
range – Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by src-port and
src-end-port. If range is specified, enter both a src-port and a src-end-port.
(Continued on next page)
C-20
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-11. Filter Commands (3 of 4)
For Extended IP Access Lists: (continued)
src-port – Specify a TCP or UDP port number to be filtered. Valid if the protocol specified
src-end-port – Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be
filtered. Valid if the protocol specified is tcp or udp and if src-operator value is range. Refer
number range is 0–65535.
dest-operator – Specifies how the destination port is evaluated. This argument may only
be specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp. Valid values are:
eq – Match only packets with a port number equal to the destination port number.
gt – Match only packets with a port number greater than the destination port number.
lt – Match only packets with a port number less than the destination port number.
neq – Match only packets with a port number not equal to the destination port number.
range – Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by dest-port and
dest-end-port. If range is specified, enter both a dest-port and dest-end-port.
dest-port – Specifies a specific TCP or UDP port number to be filtered. This option only
applies to a protocol of tcp or udp. Many of the valid TCP and UDP ports are described in
or UDP port number range is 0–65535.
dest-end-port – Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be
filtered. This option only applies to a protocol of tcp or udp with dest-operator set to range.
range is 0–65535.
For Protocol Type Access Lists:
Example: access-list 200 permit 0x200 range 0x210
type-code – Specifies the 16-bit hexadecimal number written with a leading “0x” that
specifies either an Ethernet type code or the first Ethernet type code in a range of
Ethernet type codes to filter. If a user attempts to a type code that is not a 16-bit
hexadecimal number written with a leading “0x”, it will be treated as a syntax error. Many
range – Specifies a range of ether-type codes. This option only applies to protocol
type-code access lists.
end-type-code – The last ethernet type code included in the filter range. A 16-bit
hexadecimal number written with a leading “0x” used to specify one of the Ethernet
type codes. This option only applies for protocol type-code access lists.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-11. Filter Commands (4 of 4)
[no] ipaccess-groupaccess-list-1-199num [in | out]
Minimum Access Level: Administrator
Command Mode: config-if
Allows you to control access to an interface by allowing you to designate (or delete) a set
of access rules to be applied to either incoming or outgoing packets. By default, no access
lists are applied to interfaces.
Example: ip access-group 17 in
NOTE: A user may specify that an access list is applied to either inbound packets,
outbound packets, or both inbound and outbound packets (two commands). If a
specified access list does not exist, all packets are passed.
access-list-1-199num – The access list number. The valid ranges for access lists are:
1–99
– Standard IP access lists.
100–199
– Extended IP access lists.
– Specifies that filters will be applied to inbound packets.
out
in
– Specifies that filters will be applied to outbound packets. If no direction (in or out) is
specified, the filter is applies to outbound packets by default.
C-22
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Diagnostic Commands
Diagnostic commands allow you to ping or trace the route to a specified
destination.
Table C-12. Diagnostic Commands (1 of 2)
ping[protocol] dest-ip [sourcesource-ip] [lengthbytes]
[timeouttime] [interfaceintf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Pings the specified destination address.
For a successful ping, the results are shown as:
Ping reply [x.x.x.x]: bytes of data = packet-length
Where packet-length is the length of echo packets sent.
For a timeout, the results are shown as:
Ping reply [x.x.x.x]: REQUEST TIMED OUT
For an ICMP echo response of unreachable destination, the results are shown as:
Ping reply [x.x.x.x]: DESTINATION UNREACHABLE
protocol
– The protocol of the IP echo message: ip.
dest-ip
source
– Address of the device to ping.
– Specify the source IP address.
source-ip
– The source IP address used in the ping request. The default source IP
address is the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the
destination IP address. The source IP address specified must be an IP address
assigned to an interface or sub-interface.
length –
Specify the length of echo packets sent.
bytes
– Number of data bytes. Range = 0–1500. Default = 64.
– Specify the time in seconds before the ping test is abandoned.
– Number in seconds before the ping test is abandoned. Maximum is 30 seconds.
timeout
time
Default = 5 seconds.
interface
– Specify the target interface. The default target interface is the interface on
which packets are routed to the destination IP address.
intf-type
– Two interface types are supported:
Ethernet
– IEEE 802.3 interface
Serial
– Frame relay serial interface
intf-num
– The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces: 0.
sub-intf-num
– The sub-interface number. Sub-interfaces are only supported on the
Network interface (Serial 0). Sub-interface number range is 0–4,294,967,295.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-12. Diagnostic Commands (2 of 2)
traceroute[protocol] dest-ip [sourcesource-ip] [lengthbytes]
[timeouttime] [hopshops] [interfaceintf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num]]
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
This command performs the TraceRoute test to the specified destination IP address. The
general format of the TraceRoute results is seen as follows:
Tracing route to x.x.x.x over a max of nn hops, with nnn byte packet:
1
2
3
4
<100ms <100ms <100ms x.x.x.x
<100ms <100ms <100ms x.x.x.x
<200ms <200ms <200ms x.x.x.x
<200ms <200ms <200ms x.x.x.x
The first column is the hop number, which is the Time to Live (TTL) value set in the IP
packet header. Each of the three next columns contains the round-trip time in 100ms
intervals for each attempt to reach the destination with that TTL value. If no response is
received, an * (asterisk) is displayed in place of the roundtrip time. The fifth column is the
IP address of the responding system. If no response is received for a hop, the last column
is blank.
protocol
– The protocol of the echo message for TraceRoute: ip.
dest-ip – Address of the device to TraceRoute.
source
– The source IP address. The default source IP address is the IP address for the
interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address.
source-ip – The source IP address used in the TraceRoute test. The default source IP
address will be the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the
destination IP address. The source IP address specified must be an IP address
assigned to an interface or sub-interface.
length
– Specify the length of packets sent.
bytes – Number of data bytes. Range = 0–1500. Default = 64.
timeout
– Specify the time in seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned.
time – Number of seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned. Range = 1–30.
Default = 5 seconds.
hops
– Specify the maximum number of hops to be tested.
hops – The maximum number of hops to be tested. Range = 1–128. Default = 8.
interface
– Specify the target interface. The default target interface is the interface on
which packets are routed to the destination IP address.
intf-type – Two interface types are supported:
Ethernet
– IEEE 802.3 interface
Serial
– Frame relay serial interface
intf-num – The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces: 0.
sub-intf-num – The sub-interface number is only supported on the Network interface
(Serial 0). The following sub-interface numbers are supported: 0–4,294,967,295.
C-24
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Show Commands
Show commands allow you to display information.
Table C-13. Show Commands (1 of 4)
showarp
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays the devices in the ARP table.
The general format of the show arpcommand is:
IP Address Timeout (min)
MAC address
Type
Interface
Interface
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
STATIC
time
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
ARPA
ARPA
The first column displays the IP address. The second column displays the actual time left
for the specific entry, or “STATIC” for configured static entries. The third column displays
the MAC address for the ARP entry. The fourth column displays the ARP type (only ARPA
is currently supported). The fifth column displays the Interface or sub-interface for the
ARP table entry.
showbridge
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database.
showconfiguration
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays/outputs a sequence of commands in the form of ASCII strings that have the
effect of setting all configurable parameters to the current values in memory.
Passwords are write-only and not output. The text file can be used with a terminal
The general format of the show configcommand is:
global commands
!
interface n
interface n commands....
!
interface n sub-interface n
interface n sub-interface n commands...
!
interface n sub-interface n+1
interface n sub-interface n+1 commands...
interface n+1
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-13. Show Commands (2 of 4)
showconfiguration {saved | unsaved}
Administrator
Minimum Access Level:
All config modes
Command Mode:
Displays/outputs a sequence of commands in the form of ASCII strings that have the
effect of setting all configurable parameters to the current values, either saved in memory
or entered during a current configuration session.
Passwords are write-only and not output. The text file can be used with a terminal
config command is the same as the previous command, show configuration, in Standard
mode.
saved
– Displays the command sequence for saving parameters currently saved in
memory.
unsaved
– Displays the command sequence for saving parameters entered during the
current configuration session.
show frame-relay map
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays the status of all frame relay DLCIs seen on the router’s frame relay interface.
The general format of the show frame-relay mapcommand is:
(
):
,
interface interface-status dlci dlci-number dlci-status
Where the interface (or sub-interface) shall be displayed in the standard format shown in
the Interface Commands. The interface-status is up or down. The dlci-number is in the
range 16–1007. Frame relay map statements are only displayed for DLCIs configured on
both the router and on the devices user interface. The dlci-status is active or inactive.
showinterface[intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num]]
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Shows the status of the named interface, sub-interface, or all interfaces and
sub-interfaces on the device.
intf-type
– The interface type. The following two types are supported:
Ethernet
– IEEE 802.3 interface
Serial
– Serial interface
intf-num
– The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces: 0.
sub-intf-num
– The sub-interface numbers are only supported on the Network interface
(Serial 0). Sub-interface numbers supported: 0–4,294,967,295.
C-26
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-13. Show Commands (3 of 4)
showipdhcpbinding[ip-address]
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Allows users to display address bindings associated with the DHCP server. If the IP
address is not specified, all DHCP server bindings are displayed. If an IP address is
specified, only the DHCP server binding for the specified client is displayed.
ip-address – Specifies the DHCP client’s IP address for the binding to be displayed.
The general format of the show ip dhcp bindingscommand is as follows:
IP Address MAC address
x.x.x.x xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Lease Expires
ddd:hh:mm
The first column displays the IP addresses in use. The second column displays the MAC
address bound to each IP address. The third column displays the remaining lease time in
days, hours, and minutes or “Infinite”.
showipnattranslations
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Shows the active Network Address Translation (NAT) translations. The general format of
the show ip nat translationscommand is:
Pro
Inside global Inside local
x.x.x.x:port
Outside local
x.x.x.x:port
Outside global
x.x.x.x:port
udp x.x.x.x:port
The first column, Pro, displays the Protocol of the port identifying the address. The second
column displays the Inside global IP address for one or more inside local IP addresses to
the outside world. The third column displays the Inside local IP address assigned to a host
on the inside network.
The fourth column displays the Outside local IP address of an outside host as it appears
to the inside network. The fifth column displays the Outside global IP address assigned to
a host on the outside network by its owner. Whenever one of the IP addresses or the
Protocol designation does not apply to a NAT table entry, “---” is displayed. A protocol port
is appended to IP addresses when NAPT is specified for that NAT entry.
showiproute[ip-address]
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
This command shows the IP route table entry for the specified IP address. If no IP
address is specified, the entire table is shown. When the Next Hop IP Address is 0.0.0.0,
the host is directly reachable on the interface.
The general format of the show ip routecommand will be as follows:
Dest. IP Address Dest. Subnet Mask Next Hop IP Addr Interface
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
x.x.x.x
interface
interface
ip-address
– Specific IP address for route information display.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-13. Show Commands (4 of 4)
showiptraffic
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays the IP statistics for the device.
showspanning-tree
Operator
Minimum Access Level:
Standard
Command Mode:
Displays the devices spanning-tree topology.
C-28
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Ethernet Type Codes
incoming Ethernet packets by Type Code. Many of the Type Codes listed below
are distributed by Xerox Corporation.
Table C-14. Ethernet Type Codes (Hex) (1 of 2)
Type Code
0000–05DC
010101FF
0200
Description
Type Code
803E
Description
IEEE802.3 Length Field
Experimental
DEC Unassigned
DEC LAN Traffic Monitor
DEC Unassigned
Planning Research Corp.
AT&T
803F
Xerox PUP (see 0A00)
PUP Addr Trans (see 0A01)
Xerox NS IDP
8040–8042
8044
0201
0600
8046–8047
8049
0800
DOD IP
ExperData
0801
X.75 Internet
805B
Stanford V Kernel exp.
Stanford V Kernel prod.
Evans & Sutherland
Little Machines
0802
NBS Internet
805C
0803
ECMA Internet
805D
0804
Chaosnet
8060
0805
X.25 Level 3
8062
Counterpoint Computers
University of Mass. at Amherst
Veeco Integrated Auto.
General Dynamics
AT&T
0806
ARP
8065–8066
8067
0807
XNS Compatibility
Symbolics Private
Xyplex
081C
8068
0888–088A
0900
8069
Ungermann-Bass net debugger
Xerox IEEE802.3 PUP
PUP Addr Trans
806A
Autophon
0A00
806C
ComDesign
0A01
806D
Computgraphic Corp.
Landmark Graphics Corp.
Matra
0BAD
1000
Banyan Systems
Berkeley Trailer nego
Berkeley Trailer encap/IP
Valid Systems
80E–E8077
807A
1001–100F
1600
807B
Dansk Data Elektronik
Merit Internodal
807C
4242
PCS Basic Block Protocol
BBN Simnet
807D–807F
8080
Vitalink Communications
Vitalink TransLAN III
Counterpoint Computers
Appletalk
5208
6000
DEC Unassigned (Exp.)
DEC MOP Dump/Load
DEC MOP Remote Console
DEC DECNET Phase IV Route
8081–8083
809B
6001
6002
809C–809E
809F
Datability
6003
Spider Systems Ltd.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-14. Ethernet Type Codes (Hex) (2 of 2)
Type Code
6004
Description
Type Code
80A3
Description
DEC LAT
Nixdorf Computers
Siemens Gammasonics Inc. (Xerox)
DCA Data Exchange Cluster (Xerox)
Pacer Software
6005
DEC Diagnostic Protocol
DEC Customer Protocol
DEC LAVC, SCA
DEC Unassigned
3Com Corporation
Ungermann-Bass download
Ungermann-Bass dia/loop
LRT
80A4–80B3
80C0–80C3
80C6
6006
6007
6008–6009
6010–6014
7000
80C7
Applitek Corporation
Intergraph Corporation
Harris Corporation
Taylor Instrument
Rosemount Corporation
IBM SNA Service on Ether
Varian Associates
Integrated Solutions TRFS
Allen-Bradley
80C8–80CC
80CD–80CE
80CF–80D2
80D3–80D4
80D5
7002
7020–7029
7030
Proteon
7034
Cabletron
80DD
8003
Cronus VLN
80DE–80DF
80E0–80E3
80E4–80F0
80F2
8004
Cronus Direct
HP Probe
8005
Datability
8006
Nestar
Retix
8008
AT&T
80F3
AppleTalk AARP (Kinetics)
Kinetics
8010
Excelan
80F4–80F5
80F7
8013
SGI diagnostics
SGI network games
SGI reserved
Apollo Computer
8014
80FF–8103
8107–8109
8130
Wellfleet Communications
Symbolics Private
Waterloo Microsystems
VG Laboratory Systems
Novell, Inc.
8015
8016
SGI bounce server
Apollo Computers
Tymshare
8019
8131
802E
8137–8138
8139–813D
814C
802F
Tigan, Inc.
KTI
8035
Reverse ARP
Aeonic Systems
DEC LANBridge
DEC Unassigned
SNMP
8036
9000
Loopback
8038
9001
3Com(Bridge) XNS Sys Mgmt
8039–803C
9002–9003
3Com(Bridge) TCP-IP Sys & loop
detect
803D
DEC Ethernet Encryption
FF00
BBN VITAL-LanBridge cache
C-30
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Protocol and Port Designations
The following tables are used for filtering.
ICMP Designations
ICMP Designations, when specifying a specific ICMP message to be filtered.
Table C-15. ICMP Designations (1 of 2)
Type
Code
ICMP Message
Description
0
0
echo-reply
Echo (ping) reply
All 3n = Destination unreachable
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
2
3
4
net-unreachable
host-unreachable
protocol-unreachable
port-unreachable
packet-too-big
Network unreachable
Host unreachable
Protocol unreachable
Port unreachable
Fragmentation needed and do not
fragment (DF) bit set
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
source-route-failed
network-unknown
host-unknown
Source route failed
6
Destination network unknown
Destination host unknown
Source host isolated
7
8
host-isolated
9
dod-net-prohibited
dod-host-prohibited
net-tos-unreachable
Destination network admin prohibited
Destination host admin prohibited
10
11
Network unreachable for TOS (Type
of Service)
3
3
12
13
host-tos-unreachable
Host unreachable for TOS
Administratively-prohibited
Communication admin. prohibited by
filtering
3
3
4
14
15
0
host-precedence-unreachable Host precedence violation
precedence-unreachable
source-quench
Precedence cutoff in effect
Source quench (flow control)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
Table C-15. ICMP Designations (2 of 2)
Type Code ICMP Message
All 5n = All redirects
Description
5
5
5
0
1
2
net-redirect
Redirect for network
Redirect for host
host-redirect
net-tos-redirect
Redirect for Type of Service (TOS) &
network
5
3
host-tos-redirect
Redirect for Type of Service (TOS) &
host
8
0
0
0
0
echo
Echo request (ping)
9
router-advertisement
router-solicitation
ttl-exceeded
Router discovery advertisements
Router discovery solicitations
10
11
TTL (Time to Live) = 0 & exceeded
during transit (Traceroute)
11
1
reassembly-timeout
TTL (Time to Live) = 0 & exceeded
during reassembly
12
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
general-parameter-problem
option-missing
IP header bad
Parameter required but not present
Parameter required but no room
Timestamp request
no-room-for-option
timestamp-request
timestamp-reply
information-request
information-reply
mask-request
Timestamp reply
Information request
Information reply
Address mask request
Address mask reply
mask-reply
C-32
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
TCP Port Designations
TCP Port Designations, when specifying a specific TCP port to be filtered.
Table C-16. TCP Port Designations
TCP Port #
7
TCP Port Table
echo
Description
Echo
9
discard
daytime
chargen
ftp-data
ftp
Discard
13
Daytime
19
Character generator
FTP data connections
File Transfer Protocol
Telnet
20
21
23
telnet
smtp
25
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
Time
37
time
43
whois
tacacs
domain
gopher
finger
www
Nicname
49
TAC Access Control System
Domain Name Service
Gopher
53
70
79
Finger
80
World Wide Web (HTTP)
NIC hostname server
Post Office Protocol v2
Post Office Protocol v3
Sun Remote Procedure Call
Network News Transport Protocol
Border Gateway Protocol
Internet Relay Chat
Exec (rsh)
101
109
110
111
119
179
194
512
513
514
514
515
517
540
543
544
hostname
pop2
pop3
sunrpc
nntp
bgp
irc
exec
login
Login (rlogin)
cmd
Remote commands (rcmd)
Syslog
syslog
lpd
Printer service
talk
Talk
uucp
UNIX-to-UNIX Copy Program
Kerberos login
klogin
kshell
Kerberos shell
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
C-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Router CLI Commands, Codes, and Designations
UDP Port Designations
Designations, when specifying a specific UCP port to be filtered.
Table C-17. UDP Port Designations
UDP Port #
7
UDP Port Name Description
echo
Echo
9
discard
time
Discard
37
Time
42
nameserver
tacacs
domain
bootpc
bootps
tftp
IEN116 name service (obsolete)
TAC Access Control System
Domain Name Service (DNS)
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) client
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Sun Remote Procedure Call
Network Time Protocol
NetBios name service
NetBios datagram service
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNMP Traps
49
53
67
68
69
111
123
137
138
161
162
177
195
434
512
513
514
517
520
sunrpc
ntp
netbios-ns
netbios-dgm
snmp
snmptrap
xdmcp
dnsix
X Display Manager Control Protocol
DNSIX security protocol auditing
Mobile IP registration
mobile-ip
biff
Biff (mail notification, comsat)
Who service (rwho)
who
syslog
talk
System Logger
Talk
rip
Routing Information Protocol
C-34
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Router Command Line Summaries and
Shortcuts
D
CLI Summaries
For summaries of Command Line Interface commands, see:
The minimal characters that must be typed when entering commands are shown in
courier boldfor these tables.
For details on each command and the conventions used for command line syntax,
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts
Show Command Summary
CLI.
Table D-1. Show Commands
Command
Function
show arp
Displays all the devices in the router’s ARP
table.
show bridge
Displays the router’s bridge forwarding
database entries.
show configuration
Displays the router’s current configuration.
show configuration {saved|unsaved} Shows the current configuration, either saved in
memory or entered during the current session.
show frame-relay map
Shows the status of all frame relay DLCIs on
the router’s frame relay interface.
show interface
[intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
Shows the status of the specified interface,
sub-interface, or all interfaces and
sub-interfaces for the router.
show ipdhcp binding [ip-address]
Shows the address bindings associated with
the DHCP server.
If an IP address is specified, only bindings
for that client will be displayed.
If no IP address is specified, all DHCP
server bindings are displayed.
show ipnat translations
Displays all the address bindings associated
with the DHCP server.
show iproute [ip-address]
Shows the Routing Table entry for the device
with the specified IP address, or all Routing
Table entries if no IP address is specified.
show iptraffic
Shows IP statistics for the router.
show spanning-tree
Displays the router’s spanning-tree topology.
D-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts
Access Control and System Level Command Summary
control and system level commands for the CLI.
Table D-2. Access Control and System Level Commands
Command
Function
?
Displays all valid commands for the current
access level.
!
Used to enter comments. Comments following
the ! are ignored by the CLI.
configure {terminal|factory)
Enters configuration mode so configuration
options can be edited.
disable
Exits Administrator access level.
enable
Enters/enables the Administrator access level.
enable password password
Sets or disables the password level. Default is
None.
no enable password [password ]
end
Leaves configuration mode to return to
standard operating mode.
exit
Leaves the current configuration level or
terminates the session. It may be necessary to
enter the exit command several times when
leaving configuration mode.
help
Displays a summary of help options.
Enables/Outputs up to 23 lines.
[no] pager
reload
save
Resets the router and reloads its configuration.
Saves changes to the router’s configuration.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts
CLI Command Summary
Table D-3. CLI Commands (1 of 2)
Command
access-list access-list-num [{permit | deny}
{ {source-ip [src-wildcard] | any | host source-host-ip} |
{protocol {source-ip source-wildcard | any | host source-host-ip}
[src-operator src-port [src-end-port] ]
{dest-ip dest-wildcard | any | host dest-host-ip}
[ [icmp-msg-type [icmp-msg-code] ] |
[dest-operator dest-port [dest-end-port] ] ] } |
{type-code [range end-type-code] } }
noaccess-list access-list-num [{permit | deny}
{ {src-ip [src-wildcard] | any | host src-host-ip} |
{protocol {src-ip src-wildcard | any | host src-host-ip}
[src-operator src-port [src-end-port] ]
{dest-ip dest-wildcard | any | host dest-host-ip}
[ [icmp-msg-type [icmp-msg-code] ] |
[dest-operator dest-port [dest-end-port] ] ] } |
{type-code [range end-type-code] } ]
arp ip-address mac-address arp-type
no arp ip-address [mac-address arp-type]
arp timeout time
no arp timeout [time]
bridge {crb | bridge-group {acquire | aging-time aging-time |
protocol span-tree-protocol | priority span-tree-priority |route route-protocol} }
no bridge {crb | bridge-group {acquire|aging-time [aging-time]|
priority [span-tree-priority] | route [route-protocol] } }
[no] bridge-group bridge-group
[no] bridge-group bridge-group
{input-type-list in-access-list-200num |
output-type-list out-access-list-200num}
clear arp-cache
clear counters [intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
clear ip nat translations *
default-router ip-address
no default-router [ip-address]
dns-server ip-address
no dns-server [ip-address]
domain-name domain-name
no domain-name [domain-name]
D-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts
Table D-3. CLI Commands (2 of 2)
Command
encapsulation encapsulation-type encapsulation-protocol
[no] frame-relay interface-dlci dlci-num
interface intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num [point-to-point] ]
no interface intf-type intf-num.sub-intf-num [point-to-point]
ipaddress ip-addr subnet-mask
no ipaddress [ip-addr subnet-mask]
[no] ipaccess-group access-list-1-199num [in | out]
[no] ipdhcppool pool-name
ipdhcprelay max-clients max-dhcp-clients
no ipdhcprelay max-clients [max-dhcp-clients]
[no] ipdhcp-server ip-address
[no] ipmulticast-routing
[no] ipnat {inside | outside}
[no] ipnat inside source
{list access-list-1–99num pool pool-name [overload ] |
list access-list-1–99num interface intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] overload |
static {static-ip-addr1 static-ip-addr2 |
protocol static-ip-addr1 static-port-num static-ip-addr2} }
[no] ipnat pool pool-name start-ip-addr end-ip-addr
{netmask netmask | {prefix-length | / } prefix-length}
ipnat translation timeout time
no ipnat translation timeout [time]
iproutedest-ip dest-mask {next-hop-ip | intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] }
no iproutedest-ip dest-mask [next-hop-ip | intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
[no] iprouting
[no] ipunnumbered [null 0]
lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite}
no lease [days [hours] [minutes] | infinite]
network network-num [ [netmask] netmask | {prefix-length | / } prefix-length]
no network [network-num [ [netmask] netmask | {prefix-length | / } prefix-length] ]
ping [protocol] dest-ip [source source-ip] [length bytes]
[timeout time] [interface intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
[no] service dhcp
traceroute [protocol] dest-ip [source source-ip] [length bytes] [timeout time]
[hops hops] [interface intf-type intf-num [.sub-intf-num] ]
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts
CLI Command Default Settings
The following list shows the default settings:
!software version d1.06.04
!
no enable password
ip routing
no ip multicast-routing
service dhcp
ip nat translation timeout 86400
ip dhcp relay max-clients 256
bridge 1 acquire
bridge 1 aging-time 300
bridge 1 protocol ieee
bridge 1 priority 32768
interface Ethernet 0
bridge-group 1
arp timeout 14400
!
interface Serial 0
Encapsulation frame-relay ietf
bridge-group 1
!
end
D-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin
Assignments
E
This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit rear panels, and pin assignments for
the connectors/interfaces and cables. Standard interfaces are used on the unit, so
most cables do not have to be specially ordered; they can be purchased
anywhere.
NOTE:
In the pin assignment tables of this appendix, if the pin number is not shown, it
is not being used.
Rear Panels
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126
(without Ethernet).
POWER
COM
DSXDSNXE-1T MDM DBM
98-16154
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II (with
Ethernet) and the 9126-II Router.
POWER
COM
ENET DSDXSXN-1ET MDM
02-17141a
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II (with
Ethernet and DBM).
POWER
COM
ENET DSDXSXN-1ET MDM DBM
02-17141
The following illustration shows the rear panel of a 1-slot FrameSaver SLV 9128-II.
P
O
R
T
P
O
R
T
1
2
MODEM DBM NET
ENET
COM
DSX
POWER
00-16840
E-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the carrier-mounted, single T1,
dual port FrameSaver SLV 9128-II.
SINGLE
T1 NAM
N
E
T
D
B
M
M
D
M
D
S
X
E
N
E
T
P
O
R
T
1
P
O
R
T
2
C
O
M
00-16850
Model 9128-II
The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
COM Port Connector
The type of COM port connector depends on the model.
COM Port for 9126 and 9128-II (25-Position)
The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver SLV 9126
and 9128-II units’ 25-position EIA-232C communication port connector.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
1
Shield (GND)
—
DCE Transmit Data (TXD)
DCE Receive Data (RXD)
DCE Request to Send (RTS)
DCE Clear to Send (CTS)
DCE Data Set Ready (DSR)
Signal Ground (SG)
From DTE (In)
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
—
2
3
4
5*
6*
7
DCE Carrier Detect (CD)
DCE Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
* Pins 5, 6, and 8 are tied together.
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
8*
20
COM Port for 9126-II (9-Position)
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 1-slot FrameSaver
SLV 9126-II’s 9-position EIA-232C communication port connector.
Pin # Signal
Direction
To DTE (Out)
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
From DTE (In)
—
1*
2
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
Receive Data (RD)
Transmit Data (TD)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Signal Ground (GND)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Not used
3
4
5
6*
7
To DTE (Out)
—
8*
9
Clear To Send (CTS)
Not used
To DTE (Out)
—
*Pins 1, 6, and 8 are tied together.
E-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
COM Port for 9128-II Carrier Mount
The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the carrier-
mounted FrameSaver SLV 9128-II NAM’s 8-position communication port
interface/connector.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
DCE Received Data (RXD)
Signal Ground (SG)
From DCE (Out)
To/From DCE
To DCE (In)
To DCE (In)
From DCE (Out)
To DCE (In)
2
3
4
5
6
7
DCE Transmit Data (TXD)
DCE Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
DCE Carrier Detect (CD)
DCE Request to Send (RTS)
COM Port-to-PC Cable (Feature No. 3100-F2-550)
Order this cable when connecting the 8-position COM port to a PC. The following
shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface.
COM Port
Non-Keyed
8-Position
DTE
DB9 Socket
Modular Plug
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx Clock
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
Connection
2
Rx Data
5
3
4
1
8
6
7
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
CD
CD
RTS
CTS
No
Connection
Rx Clock
DSR
RTS
98-16166
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable (Feature No. 3100-F2-540)
Order this cable when connecting the 8-position COM port to a terminal or printer,
rather than to a PC. The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port
to the DTE interface.
COM Port
Non-Keyed
DTE
DB25 Plug
8-Position
Modular Plug
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
Not Used
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
3
7
2
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
20 DTR
8
5
CD
CD
CTS
DSR
RTS
RTS
6
Not Used
4
17
98-16167
E-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
COM Port-to-Router Cables
The following tables provide the pin assignments for connecting the 1-slot
FrameSaver unit’s 25-position communication port to various router auxiliary
(AUX) or console ports using standard cables.
Cisco 2500 Series Router – RJ45 Jack
COM Port
DB25 Pin #
AUX Port
Signal
Signal
Direction
RJ45 Pin #
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
2
3
4
5
6
7
To DTE
3
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
From DTE
To DTE
From DTE
From DTE
—
6
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
1
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
DCE Clear to Send
(CTS)
8
DCE Clear to Send
(CTS)
DCE Data Set
Ready (DSR)
7
DCE Data Set
Ready (DSR)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
4, 5
2
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Data Terminal 20
Ready (DTR)
To DTE
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
Cisco 7000 Series Router – DB25 Plug
COM Port
AUX Port
Signal
DB25 Pin #
Direction
DB25 Pin #
Signal
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
2
To DTE
2
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
3
4
7
8
From DTE
To DTE
—
3
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
4
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
7
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Carrier Detect
(CD)
To DTE
To DTE
8
DTE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DCE Data Terminal 20
Ready (DTR)
20
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
3COM Router – DB9 Socket
COM Port
DB25 Pin #
Console Port
Signal
Signal
Direction
DB9 Pin #
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
2
3
4
7
8
To DTE
3
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
From DTE
To DTE
—
2
7
5
1
4
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Carrier Detect
(CD)
To DTE
To DTE
DTE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DCE Data Terminal 20
Ready (DTR)
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
The following tables provide the pin assignments for connecting the FrameSaver
SLV 9128-II NAM’s 8-position communication port to various router auxiliary (AUX)
or console ports using standard cables.
Cisco 2500 Series Router – RJ45 Jack
COM Port
RJ45 Pin #
AUX Port
Signal
Signal
Direction
RJ45 Pin #
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
2
3
4
5
7
From DTE
6
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
—
4, 5
3
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
To DTE
To DTE
To DTE
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
2
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
1
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
E-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Cisco 7000 Series Router – DB25 Plug
COM Port
AUX Port
Signal
RJ45 Pin #
DB25 Pin #
Signal
Direction
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
2
From DTE
3
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
3
4
5
6
7
—
7
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
To DTE
To DTE
To DTE
To DTE
2
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
20
8
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
DCE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DTE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
4
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
3COM Router – DB9 Socket
COM Port
AUX Port
Signal
RJ45 Pin #
Direction
DB25 Pin #
Signal
DCE Receive Data
(RXD)
2
From DTE
2
DTE Receive Data
(RXD)
DCE Signal Ground
(SG)
3
4
5
6
7
—
5
3
4
1
7
DTE Signal Ground
(SG)
DCE Transmit Data
(TXD)
To DTE
To DTE
To DTE
To DTE
DTE Transmit Data
(TXD)
DCE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
DTE Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
DCE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DTE Carrier Detect
(CD)
DCE Request to
Send (RTS)
DTE Request to
Send (RTS)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Gender Adapter/Changer
When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay Assembler/
Disassembler (FRAD), a gender adapter is required to convert the
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer cable’s plug-type interface to a socket-type interface
for the router’s or FRAD’s AUX port.
LAN Adapter Converter and Cable
A LAN adapter converter and cable is not needed for the FrameSaver SLV 9128-II
carrier-mounted unit, and cannot be used with the FrameSaver SLV 9126-II.
The following shows the pin assignments for the:
DB25 plug-to-modular jack converter between the COM port and the
8-conductor LAN Adapter cable (Feature No. 3100-F2-920)
Custom 8-conductor cable (with modular plugs on both ends) between the
converter and the LAN Adapter (Feature No. 3100-F2-910)
Plug-to-Modular
Jack Converter
Cable
Com Port
8-Position
Plug to
Plug to
(DB25 Plug)
Modular Jack
Modular Jack
LAN Adapter
Tx Clock 15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Unused
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
3
7
2
DTR
Tx Data
Signal Ground
Rx Data
CTS
DTR 20
CD
8
4
RTS
Frame Ground
Unused
Rx Clock 17
98-16214
E-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
DTE Port Connector
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34-position
V.35 connector to the DTE.
Signal
ITU CT#
101
Direction
—
34-Pin Socket
Shield
A
B
C
D
E
F
Signal Ground/Common (SG)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
102
—
105
To DSU (In)
From DSU (Out)
From DSU (Out)
From DSU (Out)
106
107
Receive Line Signal Detector
(RLSD or LSD)
109
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Local Loopback (LL)
108/1, /2
141
To DSU (In)
To DSU (In)
To DSU (In)
H
L
Transmit Data (TXD)
103
P (A)
S (B)
Receive Data (RXD)
104
113
115
114
142
From DSU (Out) R (A)
T (B)
Transmit Signal Element Timing –
DTE Source (XTXC or TT)
To DSU (In)
U (A)
W (B)
Receive Signal Element Timing –
DCE Source (RXC)
From DSU (Out) V (A)
X (B)
Transmit Signal Element Timing –
DCE Source (TXC)
From DSU (Out) Y (A)
AA (B)
Test Mode Indicator (TM)
From DSU (Out) NN
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Standard V.35 Straight-through Cable
A standard V.35 straight-through cable can be used to connect a DTE port to a
DTE, where a 34-pin plug-type connector is needed for the data port and a
34-position socket-type connector is needed for the DTE. No special-order cables
are required.
Standard V.35 Crossover Cable
A standard V.35 crossover cable with a 34-pin plug-type connector on each end of
the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit’s DTE port to another DCE.
The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V.35 crossover
cable.
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
LL
NN
LL
NN
KK
KK
MM
MM
P1
Pin
P2
Pin
TXD A
TXD B
RXD A
RXD B
TXC A
P
S
R
T
T
R
S
P
Z
Y
TXC B AA
Z
AA
Y
W
U
X
V
A
B
F
C
E
H
L
RXC A
RXC B
ETXC A
ETXC B
FRM GND
SIG GND
RTS
V
X
U
W
A
B
C
F
CD
DTR
DSR
LL
H
E
L
98-16165a
E-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
DSX-1 Connector
The type of DSX-1 port connector depends on the model.
DSX-1 Port for 9126, 9126-II, and Carrier Mounted 9128-II (8-Position)
The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 8-position
modular DSX-1 interface on the FrameSaver SLV 9126, 9126-II, and 9128-II
carrier-mounted units. The DSX-1 Adapter is required for this interface.
Function
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Shield
Circuit
Direction
From DTE
From DTE
—
Pin Number
R1
T1
—
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
Shield
To DTE
To DTE
—
T
—
DSX-1 Adapter (Feature No. 9008-F1-560)
The DSX-1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the FrameSaver unit’s
DSX-1 connector and the DTE’s DB15 interface. The following shows pin
assignments and the purpose of each.
8-Position
DB15
Socket
Modular Plug
Unkeyed
Blue
Blue
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Shield
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
1
4
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Shield
White/Blue
Orange
White/Blue
Orange
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
Shield
11 Transmit Ring
3
2
Transmit Tip
Shield
White/Orange
White/Orange
99-16216a
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
DSX-1 Port for 1-Slot 9128-II (15-Position)
The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 15-position
DSX-1 interface on the FrameSaver SLV 9128-II standalone units. A DSX-1
adapter is not required for this interface.
Function
Circuit
Direction
From DTE
To DTE
—
Pin Number
Receive Tip
Transmit Tip
Shield
T1
T
1
3
—
R1
R
2, 4
9
Receive Ring
Transmit Ring
From DTE
To DTE
11
E-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
T1 Network Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-500)
Network access is via a 20-foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug-type connector
on each end. The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each.
Function
Circuit
Direction
Pin Number
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
R1
T1
R
From Network
From Network
To Network
To Network
1
2
4
5
T
T1 Mass Termination Cable (Feature No. 9007-F1-500)
The following pin assignments are for the T1 Mass Termination cable that
connects multiple carrier-mounted FrameSaver units to an M66 block. It has a
50-pin RJ48H plug at one end and seven RJ48C plugs at the other end.
Function
Circuit Line # Pin # Function
Circuit Line # Pin #
Receive ring R1
from the
network
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Transmit ring to
the network
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Receive tip
from the
network
T1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Transmit tip to the
network
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-510)
The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the
FrameSaver unit’s network connector and the T1 network interface. The following
shows pin assignments and the purpose of each.
RJ48C
Plug
Unkeyed
DA15P
Plug
Blue
Blue
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11 Receive Ring
3
Receive Tip
White/Blue
Orange
White/Blue
Orange
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
9
1
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
White/Orange
White/Orange
98-16215
Ethernet Port Connector
The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit’s
Ethernet port 8-position unkeyed modular jack.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
10/100 BaseT Transmit Data (TD +)
10/100 BaseT Transmit Data (TD –)
10/100 BaseT Receive Data (RD +)
10/100 BaseT Receive Data (RD –)
To LAN Interface (Out)
To LAN Interface (Out)
From LAN Interface (In)
From LAN Interface (In)
1
2
3
6
E-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Modem Connector
The dial modem interface/connector that is integrated into the FrameSaver unit is
an RJ11 6-position, 4-contact unkeyed modular jack. The following table shows pin
assignments and the purpose of each.
Function
Ring
Circuit
Direction
Pin Number
R
T
To Local Loop
To Local Loop
2
3
Tip
ISDN DBM Connector
The backup connection is through the DBM interface/connector, which is an
8-position keyed modular jack. The following tables show pin assignments for the
ISDN PRI and BRI DBMs and the purpose of each.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II ISDN PRI pin assignments:
Function
Circuit
DBM1
DBM2
DBM4
DBM5
Direction
Pin Number
PRI Receive Ring
PRI Receive Tip
PRI Transmit Ring
PRI Transmit Tip
From Local Loop
From Local Loop
To Local Loop
To Local Loop
1
2
4
5
FrameSaver SLV 9126 ISDN BRI/U pin assignments:
Function
Circuit
Direction
Pin Number
BRI Transmit/Receive Ring
DBM4
To/From
4
Local Loop
BRI Transmit/Receive Tip
DBM5
To/From
5
Local Loop
ISDN Modular Cable
The ISDN cable comes with the FrameSaver unit ordered with the DBM feature.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
E-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
E-18
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
F
The following technical specifications are included:
Table F-1. NAM Technical Specifications (1 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
Approvals
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
Class A digital device
Refer to the equipment’s label for the Registration
Number.
Industry Canada
Safety
Refer to the equipment’s label for the Certification
Number.
Refer to the equipment’s label for safety information.
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Physical Dimensions
NAM
Height
Depth
I/O Card
Height
Depth
8 inches (20.32 cm)
11.58 inches (29.41 cm)
10.15 inches (25.78 cm)
2.9 inches (7.37 cm)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-1. NAM Technical Specifications (2 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
Weight
NAM
1 lb. 2 oz. (.51 kg)
6 oz. (.17 kg)
I/O Card
Power Consumption and
Dissipation
9.5 watts, 0.080A at 120 VAC
Result: 32 Btu per hour
COM Port/Interface –
8-position unkeyed modular jack
Communications/Management
Standard
EIA-232/ITU, V.24 (ISO 2110)
Data rates
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, and 115.2 Kbps
T1 Network Interface
Data rates
8-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack
Up to 1.536 Mbps
Services supported
Physical interface (USA)
Physical interface (Canada)
Framing format
Fractional T1 service, frame relay service
RJ48C
CA81A using adapter cable
D4, ESF
Coding format
AMI, B8ZS
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
Bit stuffing
AT&T TR 62411
DSX-1 Interface
8-position modular connector with
8-position modular-to-DB15 adapter: D-Sub 15 socket
Framing format
D4, ESF
Coding format
AMI, B8ZS
DTE line equalization
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet
(0 – 196.5 meters)
Send AIS
Selectable
Data Port
Standard
Data rates
34-position V.35 connector
V.35/ITU (ISO 2593)
Variations for T1 rates; automatically set to the network
rate.
Modem (MDM) Interface
Data rates
6-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack
Up to 14.4 Kbps
PPP, SLIP
Link Protocol
F-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-1. NAM Technical Specifications (3 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
ISDN PRI DBM Interface
Service supported
Data rates
8-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack
PRI, NI-1 or NI-2
1.536 Kbps
Framing format
Coding format
D4, ESF
B8ZS
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
0.0 dB, -7.5 dB, -15 dB, -22.5 dB
Selectable
Ethernet Port
Standard
8-position modular unkeyed jack
ANSI/IEEE Standard 802.3, Ethernet Version 2
Data rates
10/100 BaseT (auto-sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet
rates
Table F-2. 1-Slot CSU/DSUs and Router Technical Specifications (1 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
Approvals
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
Class A digital device
Refer to the equipment’s label for the Registration
Number.
Industry Canada
Safety
Refer to the equipment’s label for the Certification
Number.
Refer to the equipment’s label for safety information.
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Physical Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
2.9 inches (7.4 cm)
8.5 inches (21.6 cm)
12.5 inches (31.8 cm)
Weight
FrameSaver SLV 9126
2.10 lbs. (0.95 kg)
2.65 lbs. (1.2 kg)
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II and
9126-II Router
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II
2.59 lbs. (1.18 kg)
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-2. 1-Slot CSU/DSUs and Router Technical Specifications (2 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
Power Consumption
and Dissipation
Built-in power cord
NEMA 5-15P plug
100–240 VAC power supply:
FrameSaver SLV 9126
9.1 watts, 60 Hz ±3, 0.151 A at 120 VAC ±12
Result: 31.05 BTU per hour
120 VAC power supply:
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II and 7.3 watts, 60 Hz ±3, 0.131 A at 120 VAC ±12
9126-II Router
Result: 24.9 BTU per hour
10.3 watts, 60 Hz ±3, 0.125 A at 120 VAC ±12
Result: 35.14 BTU per hour
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II
COM Port/Interface –
25-position (DB25) connector (9126, 9128-II)
Communications/Management
9-position (DB9) connector (9126-II and 9126-II Router)
Standard
EIA-232/ITU, V.24 (ISO 2110)
Data rates
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, and 115.2 Kbps
T1 Network Interface
Data rates
8-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack
Up to 1.536 Mbps
Services supported
Physical interface (USA)
Physical interface (Canada)
Framing format
Fractional T1 service, frame relay service
RJ48C
CA81A using adapter cable
D4, ESF
Coding format
AMI, B8ZS
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
Bit stuffing
AT&T TR 62411
DSX-1 Interface
Physical interface
FrameSaver SLV 9126,
8-position modular connector with
9126-II, and 9126-II Router
8-position modular-to-DB15 adapter: D-Sub 15 socket
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II
Framing format
15-position D-Subminiature connector
D-Sub 15 socket
D4, ESF
Coding format
AMI, B8ZS
DTE line equalization
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet (0 – 196.5
meters)
Send AIS
Selectable
F-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-2. 1-Slot CSU/DSUs and Router Technical Specifications (3 of 3)
Specification
Criteria
Data Port
Standard
Data rates
34-position V.35 connector
V.35/ITU (ISO 2593)
Variations for T1 rates; automatically set to the network
rate.
Modem (MDM) Interface
Data rates
6-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack
Up to 14.4 Kbps
PPP, SLIP
Link Protocol
ISDN BRI DBM Interface
Service supported
Data rates
8-position keyed modular USOC RJ49C jack
BRI, NI-1
56 Kbps and 64 Kbps
ISDN PRI DBM Interface
8-position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack
(FrameSaver SLV 9128-II only)
Service supported
Data rates
PRI, NI-1 or NI-2
1.536 Kbps
Framing format
Coding format
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
D4, ESF
B8ZS
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
Ethernet Port (FrameSaver
SLV 9126-II, 9126-II Router,
and 9128-II)
8-position modular unkeyed jack
ANSI/IEEE Standard 802.3, Ethernet Version 2
Standard
10/100 BaseT (auto-sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet
rates
Data rates
Table F-3. 14-Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications (1 of 2)
Specification
Criteria
Approvals
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
Class A digital device
Refer to the equipment’s label for the registration
number.
Industry Canada
NRTL/C and CSA
Refer to the equipment label for the certification
number.
Refer to the equipment label.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
F-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-3. 14-Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications (2 of 2)
Specification
Criteria
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Physical Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
10.5 inches (26.7 cm) or 6U
17.2 inches (43.7 cm)
14.3 inches (36.3 cm)
Weight
Empty access carrier (without power supply)
11 lbs. 6 oz. (5.16 kg)
AC Power Requirements
AC Power Supply
90 to 265 VAC, 50/60 Hz ±3A maximum
DC Power Supply
–48 VDC, 6.6 amps, 316 watts
Heat Dissipation (Max.)
227 VAC
Fully loaded access carrier
585 Btu per hour maximum
465 Btu per hour maximum
–48 VDC
Typical Power Consumption
AC Power Supply
1 power supply installed
100 VAC 60 Hz 1.7 amps 171 watts
120 VAC 60 Hz 1.03 amps 60 watts
100 VAC 50 Hz 1.15 amps 60 watts
Result: 207 Btu per hour
2 power supplies installed
100 VAC 60 Hz 1.25 amps 64.5 watts
120 VAC 60 Hz 1.5 amps 177 watts
230 VAC 50 Hz 0.9 amps 172 watts
Result: 221 Btu per hour
DC Power Supply
1 power supply installed
104 watts at –48 VDC
Result: 355 Btu per hour
2 power supplies installed
124 watts at –48 VDC
Result: 423 Btu per hour
F-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-4. ISDN BRI DBM (Optional Feature) Technical Specifications
Specification
Criteria
Standards Compliance
ANSI T1.601 – 1992 (physical layer)
Bellcore SR-NWT-001937, Issue 1 – February 1991
ITU Q.921 – 1992 (link layer)
ITU Q.931 – 1993 (network layer)
TR-TSY-00860, ISDN Calling Number Identification
Services – February 1989, and Supplement –
June 1990
Power Consumption
60 mA at 15 VDC
Average power .9 watt (3.07 Btu per hour)
Weight
0.27 lbs. 4.3 oz. (0.12 kg 122 grams)
National ISDN-1 (NI-1)
Switch Compatibility
Service Supported
Capability Package IOC B for 1B-service, which
supports up to two circuit-switched B-channels, BRI-B1
and BRI-B2, with one Service Profile Identification
(SPID) number and one local phone number.
Capability Package IOC R for 2B-service, which
supports up to two circuit-switched B-channels, BRI-B1
and BRI-B2, with two SPID numbers and two local
phone numbers.
Switched Network Interface
One USOC RJ49C 8-pin keyed modular plug and jack,
specified in ISO/IEC 8877
Transmit Interface
Signal Level
13.5 dBm nominal over frequency band, 0 Hz – 80 kHz
Impedance
135 Ω
Receive Interface
Dynamic Range
Impedance
Operates on 2-wire loops, defined in ANSI T1.601-1992
135 Ω
Modulation and Frequency
2B1Q line coding with 4-level amplitude modulation
(PAM) at 80 Kbps baud
Channel Equalization
Receiver
Automatic adaptive equalizer with echo cancellation
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
F-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Technical Specifications
Table F-5. ISDN PRI DBM (Optional Feature) Technical Specifications
Specification
Criteria
Standards Compliance
ANSI T1.403 – 1989 (physical layer) and AT&T 62411
Bellcore SR-NWT-002120, Issue 1 – May 1992
ITU Q.921 – 1992 (link layer)
ITU Q.931 – 1993 (network layer)
TR-TSY-00860, ISDN Calling Number Identification
Services – February 1989, and Supplement –
June 1990
Power Consumption
8 mA at 120 VAC
Average power 1 watt (3.4 Btu per hour)
Weight
0.15 lbs. 2.4 oz. (0.07 kg 68 grams)
Switch Compatibility
Service Supported
National ISDN-2 (NI-2), ATT 4ESS, or ATT 5ESS
PRI, NI-2, ATT 4ESS custom, or ATT 5ESS custom
(supporting up to 23 B-channels), with Circuit-Switched
Data capability.
Framing Format
Coding Format
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
D4, ESF
B8ZS
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
F-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
G
Equipment
Model/Feature
Number
Description
FrameSaver SLV Units
FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9126-A1-201
Integral modem
Support for up to 16 PVCs
Includes 1-Slot Housing, Universal 100–240 VAC Power Supply,
Network Cable, Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with
SLM Feature Set
9126-A1-202
Integral modem
ISDN BRI DBM
Support for up to 16 PVCs
Includes 1-Slot Housing, Universal 100–240 VAC Power Supply,
Network Cable, RJ49C BRI ISDN/U Cable, Installation Instructions,
and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II T1 remote site unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9126-A2-201
Integral modem
Support for up to 64 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Equipment List
Model/Feature
Number
Description
FrameSaver SLV Units (continued)
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II T1 remote site unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9126-A2-202
Integral modem
ISDN BRI DBM
Support for up to 64 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
RJ49C BRI ISDN-V Cable, Installation Instructions, and Quick
Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II T1 remote site unit with:
Diagnostic Feature Set
9126-A2-211
9126-A2-214
9126-A2-224
Integral modem
Support for up to 64 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II T1 Router with:
Diagnostic Feature Set
Integral modem
Support for up to 8 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9126-II T1 Router with:
SLM Feature Set
Integral modem
Support for up to 8 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
G-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Equipment List
Model/Feature
Number
Description
FrameSaver SLV Units (continued)
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site 1-slot unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9128-A2-202
Integral modem
ISDN PRI DBM
Support for up to 120 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
RJ48C PRI ISDN Cable, Installation Instructions, and
Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site 1-slot unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9128-A2-204
Integral modem
Support for up to 120 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site 1-slot unit with:
SLM Feature Set
9128-A2-204 with
9098-F1-870
Integral modem
Support for up to 120 PVCs
ISDN BRI DBM
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
ISDN BRI DBM, RJ49C BRI ISDN Cable, Installation Instructions,
and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site 1-slot unit with:
Diagnostic Feature Set
9128-A2-211
Integral modem
Support for up to 120 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 VAC Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Equipment List
Model/Feature
Number
Description
FrameSaver SLV Units (continued)
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site carrier NAM with:
Diagnostic Feature Set
9128-B2-211
Integral modem
Support for up to 120 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes Network Cable, Installation Instructions, and
Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV 9128-II T1 central site carrier NAM with:
SLM Feature Set
9128-B2-212
Integral modem
Support for up to 120 PVCs
Ethernet port for management
Includes Network Cable, Installation Instructions, and
Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Upgrade
FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Activation Certificate for 9126
FrameSaver SLM Feature Set Activation Certificate for 9128
User Manual
9126-C1-220
9128-C1-220
FrameSaver SLV, Models 9126, 9126-II, and 9128-II CSU/DSU and 9128-A2-GB20
9126-II Router, User’s Guide (Paper Manual)
NMS Products
OpenLane Enterprise
7805-D1-001
7805-D1-003
OpenLane Workgroup
Optional Features
Wall Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housing
Shelf Mounting Kit for Up to Two 1-Slot Housings
ISDN BRI DBM
9001-F1-891
9001-F1-894
9098-F1-870
9098-F1-875
ISDN PRI DBM
Power Supplies
100 – 240 VAC for 1-Slot Housing
120 VAC for 1-Slot Housing
AC Power Supply for Access Carrier
DC Power Supply for Access Carrier
9001-F1-040
9001-F1-020
9007-F1-040
9005-F1-050
G-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Equipment List
Model/Feature
Number
Description
9000 Series Access Carrier (9128-II NAM only)
Access Carrier
9007-B1-409
9007-B1-509
Includes 14-Slot Housing, Universal 90 – 250 VAC Power Supply,
Power Supply Tray, Baffle, Fan Tray, Mounting Brackets, and
Installation Instructions.
Access Carrier
Includes 14-Slot Housing, Universal –48 VDC Power Supply,
Power Supply Tray, Baffle, Fan Tray, Mounting Brackets, and
Installation Instructions.
Baffle for Access Carrier
9007-S1-897
9007-S1-898
9007-S1-899
Fan Tray for Power Supply in Access Carrier
Fan Tray for Access Carrier
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
G-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Equipment List
Cables
This table lists cables you can order.
Description
Part Number
Feature Number
RJ48C DSX-1 Network Cable,
8-pin modular-to-8-pin modular –
20 feet/6.1 meters
035-0209-2031
3100-F1-500
RJ48C T1 Network Cable,
RJ48C-to-RJ48C –
20 feet/6.1 meters
035-0209-2031
035-0221-2031
035-0315-1431
3100-F1-500
3100-F1-510
3100-F1-910
T1 Line Interface Cable,
RJ48C-to-CA81A – 20 feet/6.1 meters
For use in Canada.
COM Port-to-LAN Adapter Cable,
custom unkeyed 8-pin plug-to-8-pin plug
modular cable – 14 feet/4.3 meters
Used for a LAN Adapter (LANA).
Adapter, DB25 plug-to-8-pin modular
receptacle
002-0069-0031
3100-F1-920
Used with the COM Port-to-LAN Adapter
Cable.
COM Port-to-Terminal Cable,
8-pin modular-to-DB25P –
14 feet/4.3 meters
035-0314-1431
035-0313-1431
035-0363-0531
3100-F2-540
3100-F2-550
9007-F1-500
COM Port-to-PC Cable,
D-Sub9-to-DB25 for PC serial port –
14 feet/4.3 meters
T1 Mass Termination Cable,
50-pin plug-to-seven RJ48S plugs –
5 feet/1.5 meters
Connects carrier-mounted units to a
M66 block.
Adapter, 8-pin modular plug to DB15 jack
Used for DSX-1 interface.
035-0386-0031
035-0386-0031
9008-F1-560
9008-F1-560
DSX-1 Adapter Cable,
RJ48C-to-DB15 – 1 foot/0.3048 meters
For use by FrameSaver 9126, 9126-II, and
carrier-mounted 9128.
G-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
assign
C
Call
assigning
Auto Backup
availability
Caller
certificate
changing
Character
B
Back-to-Back
operation
Backup
CIR
Class of Service
Clearing
Event
BECN
CLI
blank
Bridge
bursting
IN-2
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Clock
Configuration (continued)
configuring
Command Line Interface (CLI)
commands
DHCP
Connectivity
Control
Leads
Control Leads and LEDs
controlling
Communication
Port
ConcordsNetworkHealth
Configuration
COS
creating
CTS
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
D
Data
server
Port
dialControl
dialCtlPeerCall
DBM
Dial-Out
Directory
disabling
Disconnect
Discovery
DE
designations
Frame Relay Mode
displaying
Device
IN-4
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
DLCI (continued)
EIA-232C
EIR
emulation programs
Enterprise
Error
domains and groups
downloading
Event
DSX-1
Errors
ESF Line
Ethernet
port
DTE
DTR
Event Log
Excessive
External
E
EER
F
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
feature sets
H
hardware revision
filtering
HDLC errors
history
hyperlink to more information
Frame Relay
I
Mode
Identity
installation and setup
installing
Interface
interface
G
Gateway Address
General
Interface Status
SNMP management
Internal
IN-6
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
IP
L
LAN
round trip
Validation
and control leads
IP address
IP addressing
IP Enabled
IP SLV
limiting
Line
ISDN
Link
K
linkUp and linkDown
keys
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
LMI
M
Main Menu
Management
and Communication
General SNMP
menu
local
LOF
Log
Login
messages
Loopback
Test Status
MIB
Mode
LOS
Loss of Signal
IN-8
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
port
Net Link
NetScout
Monitor
Manager Plus
Network
monitoring
DLCI records
Multilink Frame Relay
interface
Multiplexed
N
N1
N2
N3
NMS
SNMP security
Node
IP
Number of
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
physical
O
OID
(object identification)
OOF
pin assignments
COM port-to-router
operating mode
Operator
Out of Sync
Outbound
ping
Policing
Port
P
packet capture
assignment
PassThru
communication
Ethernet
pattern
payload management
modem
Status
PC
IN-10
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Port (continued)
Primary Clock
Primary Destination
R
ratios
reports
reset
resetting
printer
profiles
restoring
revision
Proprietary
Protocol
Serial Line
PVC
RMON
router
Q
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Routing
Session
RTS
setting up
RXD
S
show
SIG
Sampling
screen
Secondary Clock
SLV
SNMP NMS
Round Trip Latency
Timeout
selecting
Send
serial number
SNMP
service level
NMS security
verification
IN-12
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
software
switching
System
revision
Frame Relay and LMI
Source
specifications
starting
T
T1
Status
T2
T3
Telnet
Terminal
Enquiry
suggestions
summary
Test
Status messages
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Traps
SNMP and dial-out
time
time slot assignments
Timeout
timers
timeslot assignments
TXD
Trace Log
Type
Transmit Clock
Trap
U
upgrade
uploading
Managers
IN-14
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
user history
W
warmStart
events
Web-site
communication port
Y
Yellow
V
V.35
verifying
viewing
9128-A2-GB20-80
September 2002
IN-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
IN-16
September 2002
9128-A2-GB20-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|